Carrier Aquasnap Air Cooled Chillers With Comfortlink Controls 30Rap010 060 Users Manual 30rap 2t

30RAP010-060 to the manual 556e3ae9-fcb8-42ef-b900-abf4bd5d8276

2015-01-24

: Carrier Carrier-Aquasnap-Air-Cooled-Chillers-With-Comfortlink-Controls-30Rap010-060-Users-Manual-310468 carrier-aquasnap-air-cooled-chillers-with-comfortlink-controls-30rap010-060-users-manual-310468 carrier pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 124

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

30RAP010-060
Air-Cooled Chillers
with COMFORTLINK™ Controls

AQUASNAP®

Controls, Start-Up, Operation,
Service, and Troubleshooting
CONTENTS
Page
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Conventions Used in this Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Basic Controls Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-44
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Main Base Board (MBB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Energy Management Module (EMM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Current Sensor Board (CSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
AUX Board (AUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Expansion Valve Board (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Emergency On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Board Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Control Module Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) Interface . . . . . . . . . .19
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
• COOLER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR
• COOLER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR
• COMPRESSOR RETURN GAS
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
• OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (OAT)
• DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR (DTT)
• REMOTE SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR OR DUAL
LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Energy Management Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Loss-of-Cooler Flow Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Electronic Expansion Valves (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Capacity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
• MINUTES LEFT FOR START
• MINUTES OFF TIME
• LEAD/LAG DETERMINATION
• CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES
Head Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Operation of Machine Based on Control Method
and Cooling Set Point Selection Settings. . . . . . . . .32
Cooling Set Point Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Low Sound Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Heating Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Service Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Optional Factory-Installed Hydronic Package. . . . . . .34
Cooler Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Cooler Pump Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Configuring and Operating Dual Chiller Control . . . .36
Temperature Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Demand Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
• DEMAND LIMIT (2-Stage Switch Controlled)
• EXTERNALLY POWERED DEMAND LIMIT
(4 to 20 mA Controlled)
• DEMAND LIMIT (CCN Loadshed Controlled)
Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Digital Scroll Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
• DIGITAL SCROLL OPERATION
• DIGITAL COMPRESSOR CONFIGURATION
PRE-START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,45

Page

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
START-UP AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,46
Actual Start-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Check Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Operating Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
• TEMPERATURES
• LOW AMBIENT OPERATION
• VOLTAGE — ALL UNITS

OPERATION SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46,47
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-63
Electronic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
• CONTROL COMPONENTS
Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
EXV Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
• FIELD SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS
• VALVE REPLACEMENT
• VALVE REASSEMBLY
Compressor Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Cooler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
• BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER
REPLACEMENT
• BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER
CLEANING
Oil Charge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX)
Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning
Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Check Refrigerant Feed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
• FILTER DRIER
• MOISTURE-LIQUID INDICATOR
• MINIMUM LOAD VALVE
• PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES
Check Unit Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
• HIGH-PRESSURE SWITCH
• PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS
• COOLER FREEZE-UP PROTECTION
• HEATER CABLE
• WINTER SHUTDOWN
Thermistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Pressure Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Chilled Water Flow Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Strainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Condenser Fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Motormaster® V Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
• GENERAL OPERATION
• CONFIGURATION
• DRIVE PROGRAMMING
• EPM CHIP
• LOSS OF CCN COMMUNICATIONS
• REPLACING DEFECTIVE MODULES
Hydronic Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64
Recommended Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX)
Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning
Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64-73

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.
Catalog No. 04-53300067-01
Printed in U.S.A.
Form 30RAP-2T
Pg 1
12-10
Replaces: 30RAP-1T

CONTENTS (cont)
WARNING

Page

Complete Unit Stoppage and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
• GENERAL POWER FAILURE
• UNIT ENABLE-OFF-REMOTE CONTACT SWITCH IS
OFF
• CHILLED FLUID PROOF-OF-FLOW SWITCH OPEN
• OPEN 24-V CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKERS
• COOLING LOAD SATISFIED
• THERMISTOR FAILURE
• LOW SATURATED SUCTION
• COMPRESSOR SAFETIES
Alarms and Alerts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74-89
APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-100
APPENDIX C — FACTORY SETTINGS FOR
PUMP AND MANUAL STARTERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET
COMMUNICATONS WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102-109
APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY
AND LOG SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-113
START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 30RAP LIQUID
CHILLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CL-1 to CL-10

DO NOT attempt to unbraze factory joints when servicing
this equipment. Compressor oil is flammable and there is
no way to detect how much oil may be in any of the
refrigerant lines. Cut lines with a tubing cutter as required
when performing service. Use a pan to catch any oil that
may come out of the lines and as a gage for how much oil
to add to system. DO NOT re-use compressor oil.

CAUTION
This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control
system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out
components, or to bypass or otherwise depart from recommended procedures. Any short-to-ground of the control
board or accompanying wiring may destroy the electronic
modules or electrical components.

CAUTION
To prevent potential damage to heat exchanger, always run
fluid through heat exchanger when adding or removing
refrigerant charge. Use appropriate brine solutions in cooler
fluid loop to prevent the freezing of brazed plate heat
exchanger, optional hydronic section and/or interconnecting
piping when the equipment is exposed to temperatures
below 32 F (0 °C). Proof of flow switch and strainer are
factory installed on all models. Do NOT remove power
from this chiller during winter shutdown periods without
taking precaution to remove all water from heat exchanger
and optional hydronic system. Failure to properly protect
the system from freezing may constitute abuse and may
void warranty.

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Installing, starting up, and servicing this equipment can be
hazardous due to system pressures, electrical components, and
equipment location (roof, elevated structures, mechanical
rooms, etc.). Only trained, qualified installers and service
mechanics should install, start up, and service this equipment.
When working on this equipment, observe precautions in
the literature, and on tags, stickers, and labels attached to the
equipment, and any other safety precautions that apply. Follow
all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use
care in handling, rigging, and setting this equipment, and in
handling all electrical components.

WARNING

CAUTION

Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut
off all power to this equipment during installation. There
may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all disconnect locations to alert others not to restore power until work
is completed.

Compressors and optional hydronic system pumps require
specific rotation. Test condenser fan(s) first to ensure
proper phasing. Swap any two incoming power leads to
correct condenser fan rotation before starting any other
motors.

WARNING

CAUTION

DO NOT VENT refrigerant relief valves within a building.
Outlet from relief valves must be vented outdoors in
accordance with the latest edition of ANSI/ASHRAE
(American National Standards Institute/American Society
of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers)
15 (Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration). The
accumulation of refrigerant in an enclosed space can
displace oxygen and cause asphyxiation. Provide adequate
ventilation in enclosed or low overhead areas. Inhalation of
high concentrations of vapor is harmful and may cause
heart irregularities, unconsciousness or death. Misuse can
be fatal. Vapor is heavier than air and reduces the amount
of oxygen available for breathing. Product causes eye and
skin irritation. Decomposition products are hazardous.

Refrigerant charge must be removed slowly to prevent loss
of compressor oil that could result in compressor failure.

CAUTION
Puron® refrigerant (R-410A) systems operate at higher
pressures than standard R-22 systems. Do not use R-22 service equipment or components on Puron refrigerant equipment. If service equipment is not rated for Puron
refrigerant, equipment damage or personal injury may
result.

Control System for 30RAP units. The display has up and down
arrow keys, an ENTER key, and an ESCAPE key. These
keys are used to navigate through the different levels of the
display structure. Press the ESCAPE key until the highest
operating level is displayed to move through the top 11 mode
levels indicated by LEDs on the left side of the display. See
Fig. 1 and Tables 2-14.

GENERAL
This publication contains Controls, Start-Up, Operation,
Service, and Troubleshooting information for the 30RAP
AquaSnap® air-cooled chillers. See Table 1. These chillers are
equipped with ComfortLink™ controls and electronic expansion valves (EXVs).

WARNING

Once within a mode or sub-mode, pressing the ENTER
and ESCAPE keys simultaneously will put the scrolling
marquee display into expanded text mode where the full meaning of all sub-modes, items and their values can be displayed
for the current selection. Press the ENTER and ESCAPE
keys to return the scrolling marquee display to its default menu
of rotating display items (those items in Run StatusVIEW).
In addition, the password will be disabled, requiring that it be
entered again before changes can be made to password protected items. Press the ESCAPE key to exit out of the expanded
text mode.

This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control
system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out or
bypass components or otherwise depart from recommended procedures. Any short-to-ground of the control
board or accompanying wiring may destroy the board or
electrical component.
Table 1 — Unit Sizes
UNIT
30RAP010
30RAP015
30RAP018
30RAP020
30RAP025
30RAP030
30RAP035
30RAP040
30RAP045
30RAP050
30RAP055
30RAP060

NOMINAL CAPACITY (TONS)
10
14
16
19
24
28
34
39
43
48
53
56

Conventions Used in This Manual — The follow-

ing conventions for discussing configuration points for the
local display (scrolling marquee or Navigator™ accessory)
will be used in this manual.
Point names will be written with the mode name first, then
any sub-modes, then the point name, each separated by an
arrow symbol (. Names will also be shown in bold
and italics. As an example, the Lead/Lag Circuit Select Point,
which is located in the Configuration mode, Option sub-mode,
would be written as Configuration OPTNLLCS.
This path name will show the user how to navigate through
the local display to reach the desired configuration. The user
would scroll through the modes and sub-modes using the
and
keys. The arrow symbol in the path name represents pressing ENTER to move into the next level of the
menu structure.

MODE
Run Status
Service Test
Temperature
Pressures
Setpoints
Inputs

Alarm Status

Outputs
Configuration
Time Clock

ESCAPE

ENTER

Operating Modes
Alarms

Fig. 1 — Scrolling Marquee Display
Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in
the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press
ENTER so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to
change the value or state and press the ENTER key to accept
it. Press the ESCAPE key to return to the next higher level of
structure. Repeat the process as required for other items.

When a value is included as part of the path name, it will be
shown at the end of the path name after an equals sign. If the
value represents a configuration setting, an explanation will
be shown in parenthesis after the value. As an example,
ConfigurationOPTNLLCS = 1 (Circuit A leads).
Pressing the ESCAPE and ENTER keys simultaneously
will scroll an expanded text description of the point name or
value across the display. The expanded description is shown in
the local display tables but will not be shown with the path
names in text.

Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are password protected. The words ‘PASS’ and ‘WORD’ will alternate
on the display when required. The default password is 0111.
Press ENTER and the 1111 password will be displayed. Press
ENTER again and the first digit will begin to flash. Use the
arrow keys to change the number and press ENTER to accept
the digit. Continue with the remaining digits of the password.
The password can only be changed through CCN operator interface software such as ComfortWORKS®, ComfortVIEW™
and Service Tool.

The CCN (Carrier Comfort Network®) point names are also
referenced in the local display tables for users configuring the
unit with CCN software instead of the local display. The CCN
tables are located in Appendix B of the manual.

Basic Controls Usage
SCROLLING MARQUEE DISPLAY — The scrolling marquee display is the standard interface display to the ComfortLink

See Tables 2-14 and Appendix A for further details.
3

the Navigator module, press the ESCAPE key until the display reads, “Select a menu item.” Using the arrow keys move
to the Configuration mode. Press ENTER to obtain access to
this mode. The display will read:

ACCESSORY NAVIGATOR™ DISPLAY MODULE —
The Navigator module provides a mobile user interface to the
ComfortLink™ control system, which is only available as a
field-installed accessory. The display has up and down arrow
keys, an ENTER key, and an ESCAPE key. These keys are
used to navigate through the different levels of the display
structure. Press the ESCAPE key until ‘Select a Menu Item’
is displayed to move through the top 11 mode levels indicated
by LEDs on the left side of the display. See Fig. 2.

> TEST OFF
METR OFF
LANG ENGLISH
Pressing ENTER will cause the “OFF” to flash. Use the up
or down arrow to change “OFF” to “ON”. Pressing ENTER
will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the view
screen. Pressing ENTER and ESCAPE simultaneously
allows the user to adjust the display contrast. Use the up or
down arrows to adjust the contrast. The screen’s contrast will
change with the adjustment. Press ENTER to accept the
change. The Navigator module will keep this setting as long as
it is plugged in to the LEN bus.

Once within a Mode or sub-mode, a “>” indicates the currently selected item on the display screen. Pressing the
ENTER and ESCAPE keys simultaneously will put the Navigator module into expanded text mode where the full meaning
of all sub-modes, items and their values can be displayed. Pressing the ENTER and ESCAPE keys when the display says
‘Select Menu Item’ (Mode LED level) will return the Navigator
module to its default menu of rotating display items (those items
in Run StatusVIEW). In addition, the password will be disabled, requiring that it be entered again before changes can be
made to password protected items. Press the ESCAPE key to
exit out of the expanded text mode.

Adjusting the Backlight Brightness — The backlight of the
display can be adjusted to suit ambient conditions. The factory
default is set to the highest level. To adjust the backlight of the
Navigator module, press the ESCAPE key until the display
reads, “Select a menu item.” Using the arrow keys move to the
Configuration mode. Press ENTER to obtain access to this
mode. The display will read:
> TEST OFF
METR OFF
LANG ENGLISH
Pressing ENTER will cause the “OFF” to flash. Use the up
or down arrow keys to change “OFF” to “ON”. Pressing
ENTER will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the
view screen. Pressing the up and down arrow keys simultaneously allows the user to adjust the display brightness. Use the
up or down arrow keys to adjust screen brightness. Press
ENTER to accept the change. The Navigator module will
keep this setting as long as it is plugged in to the LEN bus.

NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configuration
DISPLANG), variable is changed, all appropriate display
expansions will immediately change to the new language. No
power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring
languages.
When a specific item is located, the item name appears on the
left of the display, the value will appear near the middle of the
display and the units (if any) will appear on the far right of the
display. Press the ENTER key at a changeable item and the value will begin to flash. Use the up and down arrow keys to change
the value, and confirm the value by pressing the ENTER key.
Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in
the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press
ENTER so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to
change the value or state and press the ENTER key to accept
it. Press the ESCAPE key to return to the next higher level of
structure. Repeat the process as required for other items.

Com

fortL

Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are password protected. The words Enter Password will be displayed
when required, with 1111 also being displayed. The default
password is 1111. Use the arrow keys to change the number
and press ENTER to enter the digit. Continue with the remaining digits of the password. The password can only be
changed through CCN operator interface software such as
ComfortWORKS, ComfortVIEW and Service Tool.

MOD
Run

ink

E
Alarm

Status

Servic
e Tes
t
Tem
peratu
res
Pressu
res
Setpo
ints
Inputs
Outpu
ts
Config
uration
Time
Clock
Opera
ting
Modes
Alarm
s

ENTE

Adjusting the Contrast — The contrast of the display can be
adjusted to suit ambient conditions. To adjust the contrast of

ESC

Fig. 2 — Accessory Navigator™ Display Module

Table 2 — Scrolling Marquee Display Menu Structure*
MODE

RUN
STATUS
Auto
View of
Run Status
(VIEW)
Unit Run
Hour and
Start
(RUN)

SERVICE
TEST

TEMPERATURES PRESSURES

SET
POINTS

INPUTS

OUTPUTS

CONFIGURATION

TIME
CLOCK

OPERATING
MODES

ALARMS

Service
Test Mode
(TEST)

Ent and Leave Unit
Temps
(UNIT)

Pressures
Ckt A
(PRC.A)

Cooling
Setpoints
(COOL)

General
Inputs
(GEN.I)

General
Outputs
(GEN.O)

Display
Configuration
(DISP)

Time of
Day
(TIME)

Modes
(MODE)

Current
(CRNT)

Outputs
and Pumps
(OUTS)

Temperatures
Ckt A
(CIR.A)

Pressures
Ckt B
(PRC.B)

Compressor Ciruit A Comp
Run Hours
Test
(HOUR)
(CMPA)

SUB-MODE

Temperatures
Ckt B
(CIR.B)

Head
Pressure
Setpoint
(HEAD)
Brine
Freeze
Setpoint
(FRZ)

Circuit
Inputs
(CRCT)
4-20mA
Inputs
(4-20)

Outputs
Circuit A
EXV
(A.EXV)
Outputs
Circuit B
EXV
(B.EXV)

Unit
Configuration
(UNIT)
Unit Options 1
Hardware
(OPT1)

Compressor Ciruit B Comp
Starts
Test
(STRT)
(CMPB)

Outputs
Circuit A
(CIR.A)

Unit Options 2
Controls
(OPT2)

Preventive
Maintenance
(PM)

Outputs
Circuit B
(CIR.B)

CCN Network
Configuration
(CCN)

Software
Version
(VERS)

Head Pressure
Comp. Delta
(HP.A)
Head Pressure
Comp. Delta
(HP.B)
Cir. A EXV
Configuration
(EXV.A)
Cir. B EXV
Configuration
(EXV.B)
Motormaster
Configuration
(MM)
Reset Cool Temp
(RSET)
Set Point and
Ramp Load
(SLCT)
Service
Configuration
(SERV)
Broadcast
Configuration
(BCST)

LEGEND
Ckt — Circuit
*Throughout this text, the location of items in the menu structure will be
described in the following format:
Item Expansion (Mode NameSub-mode NameITEM)
For example, using the language selection item:
Language Selection (ConfigurationDISPLANG)

Month,
Date, Day,
and Year
(DATE)
Daylight
Savings
Time
(DST)
Local
Holiday
Schedules
(HOL.L)
Local
Occupancy
Schedule
(SCH.L)
Schedule
Override
(OVR)

Reset
Alarms
(RCRN)
Alarm
History
(HIST)

Table 3 — Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

VIEW

ENTER

EWT

XXX.X F

ENTERING FLUID TEMP

LWT

XXX.X F

LEAVING FLUID TEMP

SETP

XXX.X F

ACTIVE SETPOINT

CTPT

XXX.X F

CONTROL POINT

LOD.F

XXX

LOAD/UNLOAD FACTOR

STAT

CONTROL MODE

SUB-ITEM

DISPLAY

SUB-ITEM DISPLAY

LD.PM

RUN

HOUR

STRT

ENTER

ITEM
EXPANSION

COMMENT

0 = Service Test
1 = Off Local
2 = Off CCN
3 = Off Time
4 = Off Emrgcy
5 = On Local
6 = On CCN
7 = On Time
8 = Ht Enabled
9 = Pump Delay

LEAD PUMP

OCC

YES/NO

OCCUPIED

LS.AC

YES/NO

LOW SOUND ACTIVE

MODE

YES/NO

OVERRIDE MODES IN EFFECT

CAP

XXX %

PERCENT TOTAL CAPACITY

STGE

REQUESTED STAGE

ALRM

XXX

CURRENT ALARMS & ALERTS

TIME

XX.XX

TIME OF DAY

00.00-23.59

MNTH

MONTH OF YEAR

1 = January, 2 = February, etc.

DATE

DAY OF MONTH

01-31

YEAR

YEAR OF CENTURY

HRS.U XXXX HRS

MACHINE OPERATING HOURS

STR.U

XXXX

MACHINE STARTS

HR.P1

XXXX.X

PUMP 1 RUN HOURS

HR.P2

XXXX.X

PUMP 2 RUN HOURS

HRS.A XXXX HRS

CIRCUIT A RUN HOURS

HRS.B XXXX HRS

CIRCUIT B RUN HOURS

HR.A1 XXXX HRS

COMPRESSOR A1 RUN HOURS

HR.A2 XXXX HRS

COMPRESSOR A2 RUN HOURS

HR.B1 XXXX HRS

COMPRESSOR B1 RUN HOURS

See Note

HR.B2 XXXX HRS

COMPRESSOR B2 RUN HOURS

See Note

ST.A1

XXXX

COMPRESSOR A1 STARTS

ST.A2

XXXX

COMPRESSOR A2 STARTS

ST.B1

XXXX

COMPRESSOR B1 STARTS

See Note

ST.B2

XXXX

COMPRESSOR B2 STARTS

See Note

PUMP

PUMP MAINTENANCE
SI.PM

XXXX HRS

PUMP SERVICE INTERVAL

P.1.DN

XXXX HRS

PUMP 1 SERVICE COUNTDOWN

P.2.DN

XXXX HRS

PUMP 2 SERVICE COUNTDOWN

P.1.MN

YES/NO

PUMP 1 MAINTENANCE DONE

User Entry

P.2.MN

YES/NO

PUMP 2 MAINTENANCE DONE

User Entry

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Default: 8760

Table 3 — Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

PM (cont)

DISPLAY

SUB-ITEM

DISPLAY

SUB-ITEM DISPLAY

PMDT
P.1.M0

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.1.M1

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.1.M2

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.1.M3

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.1.M4

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M0

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M1

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M2

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M3

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M4

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

STRN

ENTER

STRAINER MAINTENANCE
SI.ST

XXXX HRS

STRAINER SRVC INTERVAL

S.T.DN

XXXX HRS

STRAINER SRVC COUNTDOWN

S.T.MN

YES/NO

STRAINER MAINT. DONE

ST.DT
S.T.M0

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

S.T.M1

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

S.T.M2

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

S.T.M3

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

S.T.M4

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

COIL

ENTER

SI.CL

XXXX HRS

COIL SRVC INTER

C.L.DN

XXXX HRS

COIL SERVICE COUNTDOWN

C.L.MN

YES/NO

COIL MAINT. DONE

ENTER

*Press

ENTER

Default: 8760

User Entry

COIL MAINTENANCE DATES
C.L.M0

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

C.L.M1

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

C.L.M2

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

C.L.M3

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

C.L.M4

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

MBB

CESR131460-xx-xx

xx-xx is Version number*

EXV

CESR131172-xx-xx

xx-xx is Version number*

AUX1

CESR131333-xx-xx

xx-xx is Version number*

EMM

CESR131174-xx-xx

xx-xx is Version number*

MARQ

CESR131171-xx-xx

xx-xx is Version number*

NAVI

CESR130227-xx-xx

xx-xx is Version number*

ENTER

and

User Entry

COIL MAINTENANCE

CL.DT

VERS

Default: 8760

STRAINER MAINT. DATES

ENTER

COMMENT

PUMP MAINTENANCE DATES

ENTER

ITEM
EXPANSION

ESCAPE

simultaneously to obtain version number.

Table 4 — Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE
TEST

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

ITEM
EXPANSION
SERVICE TEST MODE

DISPLAY
ON/OFF

ENTER

OUTS

COMMENT
To Enable Service Test Mode,
move Enable/Off/Remote
Contact switch to OFF. Change
TEST to ON. Move switch to
ENABLE.

OUTPUTS AND PUMPS
ENTER

EXV.A

0 to 100%

EXV A % OPEN

EXV.B

0 to 100%

EXV B % OPEN

FAN1

ON/OFF

FAN 1 RELAY

FAN2

ON/OFF

FAN 2 RELAY

FAN3

ON/OFF

FAN 3 RELAY

FAN4

ON/OFF

FAN 4 RELAY

FAN5

ON/OFF

FAN 5 RELAY

FAN6

ON/OFF

FAN 6 RELAY

V.HPA

0 to 100%

VAR HEAD PRESS %

V.HPB

0 to 100%

VAR HEAD PRESS %

CLP.1

ON/OFF

COOLER PUMP 1 RELAY

CLP.2

ON/OFF

COOLER PUMP 2 RELAY

UL.TM

0 to 15

COMP A1 UNLOAD TIME

CL.HT

ON/OFF

COOLER/PUMP HEATER

RMT.A

ON/OFF

REMOTE ALARM RELAY

CMPA

CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR TEST
ENTER

CC.A1

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY

UL.TM

0 to 15

COMP A1 UNLOAD TIME

CC.A2

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY

CC.A3

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR A3 RELAY

CC.A4

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR A4 RELAY

MLV

ON/OFF

MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY

CMPB

CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR TEST
ENTER

CC.B1

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY

CC.B2

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY

CC.B3

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR B3 RELAY

CC.B4

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR B4 RELAY

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

See Note

Table 5 — Temperature Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM
EXPANSION
ENT AND LEAVE UNIT TEMPS

ENTER

CEWT

XXX.X F

COOLER ENTERING FLUID

CLWT

XXX.X F

COOLER LEAVING FLUID

OAT

XXX.X F

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE

SPT

XXX.X F

SPACE TEMPERATURE

DLWT

XXX.X F

UNIT

COMMENT

LEAD/LAG LEAVING FLUID

CIR.A

TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT A
ENTER

SCT.A

XXX.X F

SATURATED CONDENSING TMP

SST.A

XXX.X F

SATURATED SUCTION TEMP

RGT.A

XXX.X F

COMPR RETURN GAS TEMP

D.GAS

XXX.X F

DISCHARGE GAS TEMP

SH.A

XXX.X ^F

SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP
TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT B

See Note

SCT.B

XXX.X F

SATURATED CONDENSING TMP

See Note

SST.B

XXX.X F

SATURATED SUCTION TEMP

See Note

RGT.B

XXX.X F

COMPR RETURN GAS TEMP

See Note

SH.B

XXX.X ^F

SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP

See Note

CIR.B
ENTER

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Table 6 — Pressure Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM
EXPANSION
PRESSURES CIRCUIT A

ENTER

DP.A

XXX.X PSIG

DISCHARGE PRESSURE

SP.A

XXX.X PSIG

SUCTION PRESSURE
PRESSURES CIRCUIT B

See Note

DP.B

XXX.X PSIG

DISCHARGE PRESSURE

See Note

SP.B

XXX.X PSIG

SUCTION PRESSURE

See Note

PRC.A

PRC.B
ENTER

COMMENT

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Table 7 — Set Points Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM
EXPANSION
COOLING SETPOINTS

ENTER

CSP.1

XXX.X F

COOLING SETPOINT 1

Default: 44 F

CSP.2

XXX.X F

COOLING SETPOINT 2

Default: 44 F

CSP.3

XXX.X F

ICE SETPOINT

Default: 32 F

COOL

HEAD

COMMENT

HEAD PRESSURE SETPOINTS
ENTER

H.DP

XXX.X F

HEAD SETPOINT

Default: 95 F

F.ON

XXX.X F

FAN ON SETPOINT

Default: 95 F

F.OFF

XXX.X F

FAN OFF SETPOINT

Default: 72 F

B.OFF

XXX.X F

BASE FAN OFF DELTA TEMP

Default: 23 F

F.DLT

XXX.X F

FAN STAGE DELTA

Default: 15 F

BR.FZ

XXX.X F

FRZ

BRINE FREEZE SETPOINT
ENTER

BRINE FREEZE POINT

Default: 34 F

Table 8 — Inputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM
EXPANSION
GENERAL INPUTS

ENTER

STST

STRT/STOP

START/STOP SWITCH

FLOW

ON/OFF

COOLER FLOW SWITCH

PM.F.1

OPEN/CLSE

COOLER PUMP 1 INTERLOCK

PM.F.2

OPEN/CLSE

COOLER PUMP 2 INTERLOCK

HT.RQ

ON/OFF

HEAT REQUEST

DLS1

ON/OFF

DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1

DLS2

ON/OFF

DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2

ICED

ON/OFF

ICE DONE

DUAL

ON/OFF

DUAL SETPOINT SWITCH

FKA1

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR A1 FEEDBACK

FKA2

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR A2 FEEDBACK

FKA3

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR A3 FEEDBACK

FKA4

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR A4 FEEDBACK

FKB1

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR B1 FEEDBACK

See Note

FKB2

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR B2 FEEDBACK

See Note

FKB3

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR B3 FEEDBACK

See Note

FKB4

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR B4 FEEDBACK

See Note

DMND

XX.X MA

4-20 MA DEMAND SIGNAL

RSET

XX.X MA

4-20 MA RESET SIGNAL

CSP

XX.X MA

4-20 MA COOLING SETPOINT

GEN.I

CRCT

COMMENT

CIRCUITS INPUTS
ENTER

4-20

4-20 MA INPUTS
ENTER

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Table 9 — Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM
EXPANSION
GENERAL OUTPUTS

ENTER

FAN1

ON/OFF

FAN 1 RELAY

FAN2

ON/OFF

FAN 2 RELAY

FAN3

ON/OFF

FAN 3 RELAY

FAN4

ON/OFF

FAN 4 RELAY

FAN5

ON/OFF

FAN 5 RELAY

FAN6

ON/OFF

FAN 6 RELAY

V.HPA

ON/OFF

FAN SPEED CIRCUIT A

V.HPB

ON/OFF

FAN SPEED CIRCUIT B

C.WP1

ON/OFF

COOLER PUMP RELAY 1

C.WP2

ON/OFF

COOLER PUMP RELAY 2

CLHT

ON/OFF

COOLER/PUMP HEATER

MLV.R

ON/OFF

MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY

GEN.O

COMMENT

Table 9 — Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM
EXPANSION
OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A EXV

ENTER

EXV.A

0 to 100%

EXV % OPEN

APPR

ON/OFF

CIRCUIT A APPROACH

A.EXV

AP.SP

APPROACH SETPOINT

X.SH.R

SH RESET AT MAX UNL-DIG

S.SH.R

DIGLOAD TO START SH RST

SH_R

AMOUNT OF SH RESET

OVR.A

EXVA OVERRIDE

SPH.A

SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP

ASH.S

ACTIVE SUPERHEAT SETPT

AMP.S

ACTIVE MOP SETPT

PLM.A

CIR A EXV POSITION LIMIT

SPR.1

COMMENT

SPARE 1 TEMPERATURE

B.EXV

OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B EXV
ENTER

EXV.B

0 to 100%

EXV % OPEN

APPR

ON/OFF

CIRCUIT B APPROACH

AP.SP

APPROACH SETPOINT

OVR.B

EXVB OVERRIDE

SPH.B

SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP

ASH.S

ACTIVE SUPERHEAT SETPT

AMP.S

ACTIVE MOP SETPT

PLM.B

CIR B EXV POSITION LIMIT

SPR.2

SPARE 2 TEMPERATURE

CIR.A

OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A
ENTER

CC.A1

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY

DPE.R

ON/OFF

COMP A1 LOAD PERCENT

CC.A2

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY

CC.A3

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR A3 RELAY

CC.A4

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR A4 RELAY

CC.B1

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY

CC.B2

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY

CC.B3

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR B3 RELAY

CC.B4

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR B4 RELAY

CIR.B

OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B (See Note)
ENTER

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM
EXPANSION
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

ENTER

TEST

ON/OFF

TEST DISPLAY LEDS

METR

ON/OFF

METRIC DISPLAY

LANG

LANGUAGE SELECTION

DISP

COMMENT

Off = English; On = Metric
Default: 0
0 = English
1 = Espanol
2 = Francais
3 = Portuguese

PAS.E

ENBL/DSBL

PASSWORD ENABLE

Default: Enable

PASS

xxxx

SERVICE PASSWORD

Default: 1111

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

UNIT

ENTER

ITEM
EXPANSION

ITEM

DISPLAY

COMMENT

SIZE

UNIT SIZE

SZA.1

COMPRESSOR A1 SIZE

Unit Dependent

SZA.2

COMPRESSOR A2 SIZE

Unit Dependent

SZA.3

COMPRESSOR A3 SIZE

Unit Dependent

SZA.4

COMPRESSOR A4 SIZE

Unit Dependent

SZB.1

COMPRESSOR B1 SIZE

Unit Dependent

SZB.2

COMPRESSOR B2 SIZE

Unit Dependent

SZB.3

COMPRESSOR B3 SIZE

Unit Dependent

SZB.4

COMPRESSOR B4 SIZE

Unit Dependent

SH.SP

XX.X F

SUPERHEAT SETPOINT

Default: 9 F

UNIT CONFIGURATION

FAN.S

NUMBER OF FANS

1 = One Fan
2 = Two Fans
3 = Three Fans
4 = Four Fans

EXV

YES/NO

EXV MODULE INSTALLED?

Default: Yes

A1.TY

YES/NO

COMPRESSOR A1 DIGITAL?

Default: No
Yes = A1 Compressor is Digital
Scroll

MAX.T

0 to 12

MAXIMUM A1 UNLOAD TIME

Default: 7
Max 12 010,015
Max 10 018-060

OPT1

UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE
ENTER

Default: Water
1 = Water
2 = Medium Temperature
Brine

FLUD

COOLER FLUID

MLV.S

YES/NO

MINIMUM LOAD VALVE SELECT

D.G.EN

ENBL/DSBL

DISCHARGE GAS TEMP ENABLE

CSB.E

ENBL/DSBL

CSB BOARDS ENABLE

CPC

ON/OFF

COOLER PUMP CONTROL

PM1E

YES/NO

COOLER PUMP 1 ENABLE

PM2E

YES/NO

COOLER PUMP 2 ENABLE

PM.P.S

YES/NO

COOLER PMP PERIODIC STRT

PM.SL

COOLER PUMP SELECT

PM.DY

XX MIN

COOLER PUMP SHUTDOWN DLY

PM.DT

XXXX HRS

PUMP CHANGEOVER HOURS

ROT.P

YES/NO

ROTATE COOLER PUMPS NOW

EMM

YES/NO

EMM MODULE INSTALLED

CND.T

0,1

COND HX

0 = RTPF
1 = MCHX Default MCHX

MOPS

EXV MOP SET POINT

Range: 40 - 80 Default: 50

APPR

CONFIG APPROACH SETPOINT

Range: 5 - 40 Default: 9.0

Default: No

Default: Off

Default: No
Default: Automatic
0 = Automatic
1 = Pump 1 Starts first
2 = Pump 2 Starts first
0 to 10 minutes, Default: 1
min.
Default: 500 hours
User Entry

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

CTRL

ITEM
EXPANSION
UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS
CONTROL METHOD

LOAD

LOADING SEQUENCE SELECT

LLCS

LEAD/LAG CIRCUIT SELECT

LCWT

XX.X F

HIGH LCW ALERT LIMIT

DELY

MINUTES OFF TIME

Default: 0 Minutes
Range: 0 to 15 Minutes

ICE.M

ENBL/DSBL

ICE MODE ENABLE

Default: Disable

LS.MD

LOW SOUND MODE SELECT

LS.ST

00:00

LOW SOUND START TIME

Default: 00:00

LS.ND

00:00

LOW SOUND END TIME

Default: 00:00

LS.LT

XXX %

LOW SOUND CAPACITY LIMIT

CCNA

XXX

CCN ADDRESS

Default: 1
Range: 1 to 239

CCNB

XXX

CCN BUS NUMBER

Default: 0
Range: 0 to 239

BAUD

CCN BAUD RATE

OPT2
ENTER

CCN

COMMENT

Default: Switch
0 = Enable/Off/Remote Switch
2 = Occupancy
3 = CCN Control
Default: Equal
1 = Equal
2 = Staged
Default: Automatic
1 = Automatic
2 = Circuit A Leads
3 = Circuit B Leads
Default: 60
Range: 2 to 60 F

Default: 0
0 = Mode Disable
1 = Fan Noise Only
2 = Fan/Compressor Noise

Default: 100%
Range: 0 to 100%

CCN NETWORK CONFIGURATION
ENTER

HP.A

Default: 9600
1 = 2400
2 = 4800
3 = 9600
4 = 19,200
5 = 38,400

HEAD PRESSURE CMP DELTA
ENTER

A1.DT

A2.DT

HP.B

SCT DELTA FOR COMP A1

Range: 0 - 50 Default: 12

SCT DELTA FOR COMP A2

Range: 0 - 50 Default: 12

HEAD PRESSURE CMP DELTA
ENTER

B1.DT

SCT DELTA FOR COMP B1

Range: 0 - 50 Default: 12

B2.DT

SCT DELTA FOR COMP B2

Range: 0 - 50 Default: 12

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM
EXPANSION
CIR A EXV CONFIGURATION

ENTER

STR.A

XXX

EXV CIRC.A START POS

Range: 0 - 100 Default: 30

MIN.A

XXX

EXV CIRC.A MIN POSITION

Range: 0 - 100 Default: 8

RNG.A

XXXXX

EXVA STEPS IN RANGE

SPD.A

XXXXX

EXVA STEPS PER SECOND

POF.A

XXX

EXVA FAIL POSITION IN %

MIN.A

XXXXX

EXVA MINIMUM STEPS

Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 0

MAX.A

XXXXX

EXVA MAXIMUM STEPS

Range: 0 - 65535 Default: *

OVR.A

XXX

EXVA OVERRUN STEPS

Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 167

TYP.A

0,1

EXVA STEPPER TYPE

H.SCT

XXX

HIGH SCT THRESHOLD

X.PCT

OPEN EXV X% ON 2ND COMP

Range: 0 - 30 Default: 10

X.PER

MOVE EXV X% ON DISCRSOL

Range: 0 - 30 Default: 5

A.PCT

XXX

PRE-OPEN EXV - FAN ADDING

Range: 0 - 100 Default: 10

M.PCT

XXX

PRE-CLOSE EXV - FAN SUB

Range: 0 - 100 Default: 10

S.PCT

XXX

PRE-CLOSE EXV - LAG SHUT

Range: 0 - 100 Default: 10

DELY

XXX

LAG START DELAY

Range: 0 - 100 Default: 10

STR.B

XXX

EXV CIRC.B START POS

Range: 0 - 100 Default: 50

MIN.B

XXX

EXV CIRC.B MIN POSITION

Range: 0 - 100 Default: 8

RNG.B

XXXXX

EXVB STEPS IN RANGE

SPD.B

XXXXX

EXVB STEPS PER SECOND

POF.B

XXX

EXVB FAIL POSITION IN %

MIN.B

XXXXX

EXVB MINIMUM STEPS

Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 0

MAX.B

XXXXX

EXVB MAXIMUM STEPS

Range: 0 - 65535 Default: *

OVR.B

XXX

EXVB OVERRUN STEPS

Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 167

TYP.B

0,1

EXVB STEPPER TYPE

MMR.S

YES/NO

MOTORMASTER SELECT

P.GAN

HEAD PRESSURE P GAIN

Range: -20 - 20 Default: 1.0

I.GAN

HEAD PRESSURE I GAIN

Range: -20 - 20 Default: 0.1

D.GAN

HEAD PRESSURE D GAIN

Range: -20 - 20 Default: 0.0

MIN.S

XXX

MINIMUM FAN SPEED

Range: 0 - 100 Default: 5.0

EXV.A

EXV.B

COMMENT

Range: 0 - 65535 Default: *
Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 200
Range: 0 - 100 Default: 0

0 = UNIPOLAR
1 = BIPOLAR Default: 1
Range: 50 - 140 Default: 115

CIR B EXV CONFIGURATION
ENTER

Range: 0 - 65535 Default: *
Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 200
Range: 0 - 100 Default: 0

0 = UNIPOLAR
1 = BIPOLAR Default: 1

MOTORMASTER CONFIGURATION
ENTER

* Sizes 010-020 and 035-045, default is 1596. Sizes 025,030, and 050-060, default is 2500.

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

CRST

ITEM
EXPANSION
RESET COOL TEMP
COOLING RESET TYPE

MA.DG

XX.X F

4-20 - DEGREES RESET

RM.NO

XXX.X F

REMOTE - NO RESET TEMP

Default: 125F (51.7C)
Range: 0° to 125F

RM.F

XXX.X F

REMOTE - FULL RESET TEMP

Default: 0.0F (-17.8C)
Range: 0 to 125F

RM.DG

XX.X F

REMOTE - DEGREES RESET

Default: 0.0F
Range: –30 to 30F

RT.NO

XXX.X F

RETURN - NO RESET TEMP

Default: 10.0F (5.6C)
Range: 0 to 125F COOLER T

RT.F

XXX.X F

RETURN - FULL RESET TEMP

Default: 0.0F (0.0C)
Range: 0 to 125F COOLER T

RT.DG

XX.X F

RETURN - DEGREES RESET

DMDC

DEMAND LIMIT SELECT

DM20

XXX %

DEMAND LIMIT AT 20 MA

SHNM

XXX

LOADSHED GROUP NUMBER

SHDL

XXX %

LOADSHED DEMAND DELTA

Default: 0%
Range: 0 to 60%

SHTM

XXX

MAXIMUM LOADSHED TIME

Default: 60 minutes
Range: 0 to 120 minutes

DLS1

XXX %

DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1

Default: 80%
Range: 0 to 100%

DLS2

XXX %

DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2

Default: 50%
Range: 0 to 100%

LLEN

ENBL/DSBL

LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE

Default: Disable

MSSL

SLVE/MAST

MASTER/SLAVE SELECT

Default: Master

SLVA

XXX

SLAVE ADDRESS

Default: 0
Range: 0 to 239

LLBL

LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT

LLBD

XXX

LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA

LLDY

XXX

LAG START DELAY

PARA

YES

PARALLEL CONFIGURATION

CLSP

SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD
COOLING SETPOINT SELECT

RL.S

ENBL/DSBL

RAMP LOAD SELECT

CRMP

X.X

COOLING RAMP LOADING

SCHD

SCHEDULE NUMBER

Z.GN

X.X

DEADBAND MULTIPLIER

EN.A1

ENBL/DSBL

ENABLE COMPRESSOR A1

Unit dependent

EN.A2

ENBL/DSBL

ENABLE COMPRESSOR A2

Unit dependent

EN.B1

ENBL/DSBL

ENABLE COMPRESSOR B1

Unit dependent

EN.B2

ENBL/DSBL

ENABLE COMPRESSOR B2

Unit dependent

RSET
ENTER

ENTER

SLCT
ENTER

SERV

COMMENT

Default: No Reset
0 = No Reset
1 = 4 to 20 mA Input
2 = Outdoor Air Temperature
3 = Return Fluid
4 = Space Temperature
Default: 0.0F
Range: –30 to 30F

Default: 0.0F
Range: –30 to 30F (–34.4 to -1.1 C)
Default: None
0 = None
1 = Switch
2 = 4 to 20 mA Input
3 = CCN Loadshed
Default: 100%
Range: 0 to 100%
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99

Default: Master Leads
0 = Master Leads
1 = Slave Leads
2 = Automatic
Default: 168 hours
Range: 40 to 400 hours
Default: 5 minutes
Range: 0 to 30 minutes
Default: YES (CANNOT BE CHANGED)

Default: Single
0 = Single
1 = Dual Switch
2 = Dual CCN Occupied
3 = 4 to 20 mA Input (requires
EMM)
Default: Enable
Default: 1.0
Range: 0.2 to 2.0
Default: 1
Range: 1 to 99
Default: 1.0
Range: 1.0 to 4.0

SERVICE CONFIGURATION
ENTER

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

ENTER

T.D.BC

ON/OFF

CCN TIME/DATE BROADCAST

OAT.B

ON/OFF

CCN OAT BROADCAST

G.S.BC

ON/OFF

GLOBAL SCHEDULE BROADCAST

BC.AK

ON/OFF

CCN BROADCAST ACK’ER

BCST

ITEM
EXPANSION
BROADCAST CONFIGURATION

COMMENT

Table 11 — Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

ENTER

HH.MM

XX.XX

SUB-ITEM

ITEM
EXPANSION
TIME OF DAY

DISPLAY

TIME

HOUR AND MINUTE

DATE

COMMENT

Military (00:00 – 23:59)

MONTH,DATE,DAY AND YEAR
ENTER

MNTH

MONTH OF YEAR

1-12 (1 = January, 2 = February, etc)

DOM

DAY OF MONTH

Range: 01-31

DAY

DAY OF WEEK

1-7 (1 = Sunday, 2 = Monday, etc)

YEAR

XXXX

YEAR OF CENTURY

STR.M

MONTH

Default: 4, Range 1 – 12

STR.W

WEEK

Default: 1, Range 1 – 5

STR.D

DAY

Default: 7, Range 1 – 7

MIN.A

MINUTES TO ADD

Default: 60, Range 0 – 99

STP.M

MONTH

Default: 10, Range 1 – 12

STP.W

WEEK

Default: 5, Range 1 – 5

STP.D

DAY

Default: 7, Range 1 – 7

MIN.S

DST

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME
ENTER

HOL.L
ENTER

MINUTES TO SUBTRACT

Default: 60, Range 0 – 99

LOCAL HOLIDAY SCHEDULES

HD.01 through HD.30

MON

HOLIDAY START MONTH

Range 0 – 12

DAY

START DAY

Range 0 – 31

LEN

DURATION (DAYS)

Range 0 - 99

SCHEDULE NUMBER

Default: 1, Range 1 – 99

SCH.N

SCH.L

LOCAL OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE
ENTER

PER.1

ENTER

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 1*
OCC.1

XX:XX

PERIOD OCCUPIED TIME

Military (00:00 – 23:59)

UNC.1

XX.XX

PERIOD UNOCCUPIED TIME

Military (00:00 – 23:59)

MON.1

YES/NO

MONDAY IN PERIOD

TUE.1

YES/NO

TUESDAY IN PERIOD

WED.1

YES/NO

WEDNESDAY IN PERIOD

THU.1

YES/NO

THURSDAY IN PERIOD

FRI.1

YES/NO

FRIDAY IN PERIOD

SAT.1

YES/NO

SATURDAY IN PERIOD

SUN.1

YES/NO

SUNDAY IN PERIOD

HOL.1

YES/NO

HOLIDAY IN PERIOD

* Repeats for Occupancy Periods 2 through 8.

Table 11 — Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

ENTER

OVR.T

TIMED OVERRIDE HOURS

Default: 0, Range 0-4 hours

OVR.L

OVERRIDE TIME LIMIT

Default: 0, Range 0-4 hours

T.OVR

YES/NO

TIMED OVERRIDE

User Entry

SUB-ITEM

ITEM
EXPANSION
SCHEDULE OVERRIDE

DISPLAY

OVR

COMMENT

Table 12 — Operating Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM
EXPANSION
MODES CONTROLLING UNIT

ENTER

MD01

ON/OFF

CSM CONTROLLING CHILLER

MD02

ON/OFF

WSM CONTROLLING CHILLER

MD03

ON/OFF

MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL

MD05

ON/OFF

RAMP LOAD LIMITED

MD06

ON/OFF

TIMED OVERRIDE IN EFFECT

MD07

ON/OFF

LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPA

MD08

ON/OFF

LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPB

MD09

ON/OFF

SLOW CHANGE OVERRIDE

MD10

ON/OFF

MINIMUM OFF TIME ACTIVE

MD13

ON/OFF

DUAL SETPOINT

MD14

ON/OFF

TEMPERATURE RESET

MD15

ON/OFF

DEMAND/SOUND LIMITED

MD16

ON/OFF

COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION

MD17

ON/OFF

LOW TEMPERATURE COOLING

MD18

ON/OFF

HIGH TEMPERATURE COOLING

MD19

ON/OFF

MAKING ICE

MD20

ON/OFF

STORING ICE

MD21

ON/OFF

HIGH SCT CIRCUIT A

MD22

ON/OFF

HIGH SCT CIRCUIT B

MD23

ON/OFF

MINIMUM COMP ON TIME

MD24

ON/OFF

PUMP OFF DELAY TIME

MD25

ON/OFF

LOW SOUND MODE

MODE

CSM
SCT
WSM

—
—
—

COMMENT

LEGEND
Chillervisor System Manager
Saturated Condensing Temperature
Water System Manager

Table 13 — Alarms Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM
EXPANSION

ITEM

CRNT

ENTER

AXXX OR TXXX

CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARMS

RCRN

ENTER

YES/NO

RESET ALL CURRENT ALARMS

HIST

ENTER

AXXX OR TXXX

ALARM HISTORY

COMMENT
Alarms are shown as AXXX.
Alerts are shown as TXXX.

Alarms are shown as AXXX.
Alerts are shown as TXXX.

Table 14 — Operating Modes
MODE
NO.

ITEM EXPANSION

DESCRIPTION

CSM CONTROLLING CHILLER

Chillervisor System Manager (CSM) is controlling the chiller.

WSM CONTROLLING CHILLER

Water System Manager (WSM) is controlling the chiller.

MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL

Ramp load (pull-down) limiting in effect. In this mode, the rate at which leaving fluid temperature
is dropped is limited to a predetermined value to prevent compressor overloading. See Cooling
Ramp Loading (ConfigurationSLCTCRMP). The pull-down limit can be modified, if
desired, to any rate from 0.2° F to 2° F (0.1° to 1° C)/minute.

TIMED OVERRIDE IN EFFECT

Timed override is in effect. This is a 1 to 4 hour temporary override of the programmed
schedule, forcing unit to Occupied mode. Override can be implemented with unit under
Local (Enable) or CCN (Carrier Comfort Network®) control. Override expires after each use.

LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPA

Circuit A cooler Freeze Protection mode. At least one compressor must be on, and the Saturated Suction Temperature is not increasing greater than 1.1° F (0.6° C) in 10 seconds. If
the saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point (Set PointsFRZ
BR.FZ) minus 6° F (3.4° C) and less than the leaving fluid temperature minus 14° F
(7.8° C) for 2 minutes, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. Or, If the saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point minus 14° F (7.8° C), for
90 seconds, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. The control will continue to
decrease capacity as long as either condition exists.

LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPB

Circuit B cooler Freeze Protection mode. At least one compressor must be on, and the Saturated Suction Temperature is not increasing greater than 1.1° F (0.6° C) in 10 seconds. If
the saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point (Set PointsFRZ
BR.FZ) minus 6° F (3.4° C) and less than the leaving fluid temperature minus 14° F
(7.8° C) for 2 minutes, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. Or, If the saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point minus 14° F (7.8° C), for
90 seconds, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. The control will continue to
decrease capacity as long as either condition exists.

09
10

SLOW CHANGE OVERRIDE
MINIMUM OFF TIME ACTIVE
DUAL SETPOINT

DEMAND/SOUND LIMITED

Demand limit is in effect. This indicates that the capacity of the chiller is being limited by
demand limit control option. Because of this limitation, the chiller may not be able to produce the desired leaving fluid temperature. Demand limit can be controlled by switch inputs
or a 4 to 20 mA signal.

COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION

Cooler fluid temperatures are approaching the Freeze point (see Alarms and Alerts section
for definition). The chiller will be shut down when either fluid temperature falls below the
Freeze point.

LOW TEMPERATURE COOLING

Chiller is in Cooling mode and the rate of change of the leaving fluid is negative and
decreasing faster than -0.5° F per minute. Error between leaving fluid and control point
exceeds fixed amount. Control will automatically unload the chiller if necessary.

HIGH TEMPERATURE COOLING

Chiller is in Cooling mode and the rate of change of the leaving fluid is positive and increasing.
Error between leaving fluid and control point exceeds fixed amount. Control will automatically
load the chiller if necessary to better match the increasing load.

18
MAKING ICE
STORING ICE

Chiller is in an unoccupied mode and is using Cooling Set Point 3 (Set PointsCOOL
CSP.3) to make ice. The ice done input to the Energy Management Module (EMM) is open.

Chiller is in an unoccupied mode and is controlling to Cooling Set Point 2 (Set PointsCOOL
CSP.2). The ice done input to the Energy Management Module (EMM) is closed.

HIGH SCT CIRCUIT A

Chiller is in a Cooling mode and the Saturated Condensing Temperature (SCT) is greater than
the calculated maximum limit. No additional stages of capacity will be added. Chiller capacity
may be reduced if SCT continues to rise to avoid high-pressure switch trips by reducing condensing temperature.

HIGH SCT CIRCUIT B

MINIMUM COMP ON TIME

Cooling load may be satisfied, however control continues to operate compressor to ensure
proper oil return. May be an indication of oversized application, low fluid flow rate or low loop
volume.

PUMP OFF DELAY TIME

Cooling load is satisfied, however cooler pump continues to run for the number of minutes set
by the configuration variable Cooler Pump Shutdown Delay (ConfigurationOPT1
PM.DY).

24
25

Chiller is being held off by Minutes Off Time (ConfigurationOPT2DELY).

Dual Set Point mode is in effect. Chiller controls to Cooling Set Point 1 (Set PointsCOOL
CSP.1) during occupied periods and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set PointsCOOLCSP.2)
during unoccupied periods.
Temperature reset is in effect. In this mode, chiller is using temperature reset to adjust leaving fluid set point upward and is currently controlling to the modified set point. The set point
can be modified based on return fluid, outdoor-air-temperature, space temperature, or 4 to
20 mA signal.

Slow change override is in effect. The leaving fluid temperature is close to and moving
towards the control point.

TEMPERATURE RESET
14

Dual Chiller control is enabled.

RAMP LOAD LIMITED

LOW SOUND MODE

Chiller operates at higher condensing temperature and/or reduced capacity to minimize
overall unit noise during evening/night hours (ConfigurationOPT2LS.MD).

set to ‘On’ for these boards. The auxiliary board (AUX) has an
8-position DIP switch. Switches 2, 5, and 7 are set to ‘On.’

CONTROLS
General — The 30RAP air-cooled scroll chillers contain
the ComfortLink™ electronic control system that controls and
monitors all operations of the chiller.
The control system is composed of several components as
listed in the sections below. See Fig. 3-5 for typical control box
drawings. See Fig. 6 and 7 for control schematics.

Control Module Communication
RED LED — Proper operation of the control boards can be
visually checked by looking at the red status LEDs
(light-emitting diodes). When operating correctly, the red status
LEDs should be blinking in unison at a rate of once every
2 seconds. If the red LEDs are not blinking in unison, verify
that correct power is being supplied to all modules. Be sure that
the main base board (MBB) is supplied with the current software. If necessary, reload current software. If the problem still
persists, replace the MBB. A red LED that is lit continuously or
blinking at a rate of once per second or faster indicates that the
board should be replaced.
GREEN LED — The MBB has one green LED. The Local
Equipment Network (LEN) LED should always be blinking
whenever power is on. All other boards have a LEN LED
which should be blinking whenever power is on. Check LEN
connections for potential communication errors at the board J3
and/or J4 connectors. Communication between modules is
accomplished by a 3-wire sensor bus. These 3 wires run in
parallel from module to module. The J4 connector on the MBB
provides both power and communication directly to the
marquee display only.
YELLOW LED — The MBB has one yellow LED. The
Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) LED will blink during times
of network communication.

Main Base Board (MBB) — See Fig. 8. The MBB is
the heart of the ComfortLink control system. It contains the
major portion of operating software and controls the operation
of the machine. The MBB continuously monitors input/output
channel information received from its inputs and from all other
modules. The MBB receives inputs from the discharge and
suction pressure transducers and thermistors. See Table 15. The
MBB also receives the feedback inputs from each compressor
current sensor board and other status switches. See Table 16.
The MBB also controls several outputs. Relay outputs controlled by the MBB are shown in Table 17. Information is
transmitted between modules via a 3-wire communication bus
or LEN (Local Equipment Network). The CCN (Carrier Comfort Network) bus is also supported. Connections to both LEN
and CCN buses are made at the LVT (low voltage terminal).
See Fig. 8.
Energy Management Module (EMM) — The EMM

module is available as a factory-installed option or as a fieldinstalled accessory. The EMM module receives 4 to 20 mA
inputs for the leaving fluid temperature reset, cooling set point
and demand limit functions. The EMM module also receives
the switch inputs for the field-installed 2-stage demand limit
and ice done functions. The EMM module communicates the
status of all inputs with the MBB, and the MBB adjusts the
control point, capacity limit, and other functions according to
the inputs received.

Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) Interface —

The 30RAP chiller units can be connected to the CCN if
desired. The communication bus wiring is a shielded,
3-conductor cable with drain wire and is supplied and installed
in the field. See Table 18. The system elements are connected
to the communication bus in a daisy chain arrangement. The
positive pin of each system element communication connector
must be wired to the positive pins of the system elements on
either side of it. This is also required for the negative and
signal ground pins of each system element. Wiring connections
for CCN should be made at LVT. Consult the CCN Contractor’s Manual for further information.
NOTE: Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG (American Wire Gage) minimum stranded, tinned copper. Individual
conductors must be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon, vinyl,
Teflon, or polyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil
shield and an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl,
or Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of
–20 C to 60 C is required. Wire manufactured by Alpha (2413
or 5463), American (A22503), Belden (8772), or Columbia
(02525) meets the above mentioned requirements.
It is important when connecting to a CCN communication
bus that a color coding scheme be used for the entire network
to simplify the installation. It is recommended that red be used
for the signal positive, black for the signal negative, and white
for the signal ground. Use a similar scheme for cables containing different colored wires.
At each system element, the shields of its communication
bus cables must be tied together. If the communication bus is
entirely within one building, the resulting continuous shield
must be connected to a ground at one point only. If the communication bus cable exits from one building and enters another,
the shields must be connected to grounds at the lightning
suppressor in each building where the cable enters or exits the
building (one point per building only). To connect the unit to
the network:
1. Turn off power to the control box.
2. Cut the CCN wire and strip the ends of the red (+), white
(ground), and black (–) conductors. (Substitute appropriate colors for different colored cables.)

Current Sensor Board (CSB) — The CSB is used to

monitor the status of the compressors by measuring current and
providing an analog input to the main base board (MBB) or
compressor expansion module (CXB).

AUX Board (AUX) — The AUX is used with the digital

scroll option and the low ambient head pressure option. It provides additional inputs and outputs for digital scroll control
along with analog outputs to control head pressure control fan
speeds.

Expansion Valve Board (EXV) — The EXV board
communicates with the MBB and directly controls the expansion valves to maintain the correct compressor superheat.
Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch — The Enable/
Off/Remote Contact switch is a 3-position switch used to
control the chiller. When switched to the Enable position the
chiller is under its own control. Move the switch to the Off
position to shut the chiller down. Move the switch to the
Remote Contact position and a field-installed dry contact can
be used to start the chiller. The contacts must be capable of
handling a 24 vac, 50-mA load. In the Enable and Remote
Contact (dry contacts closed) positions, the chiller is allowed to
operate and respond to the scheduling configuration, CCN
configuration and set point data. See Fig. 9.
Emergency On/Off Switch — The Emergency On/Off
switch should only be used when it is required to shut the
chiller off immediately. Power to the MBB, EMM, and
marquee display is interrupted when this switch is off and all
outputs from these modules will be turned off.
Board Addresses — The main base board (MBB) has a
3-position instance jumper that must be set to ‘1.’ The electronic expansion valve board (EXV) and energy management
board (EMM) have 4-position DIP switches. All switches are
19

3. Connect the red wire to (+) terminal on LVT of the plug,
the white wire to COM terminal, and the black wire to the
(–) terminal.
4. The RJ14 CCN connector on LVT can also be used, but is
only intended for temporary connection (for example, a
laptop computer running Service Tool).

Table 18 — CCN Communication Bus Wiring
MANUFACTURER
Alpha
American
Belden
Columbia
Manhattan
Quabik

IMPORTANT: A shorted CCN bus cable will prevent some
routines from running and may prevent the unit from starting. If abnormal conditions occur, unplug the connector. If
conditions return to normal, check the CCN connector and
cable. Run new cable if necessary. A short in one section of
the bus can cause problems with all system elements on the
bus.

Sensors — The electronic control uses 4 to 7 thermistors to

sense temperatures for controlling chiller operation. See
Table 15. These sensors are outlined below. Thermistors RGTA, RGTB, EWT, LWT, and OAT are identical in temperature
versus resistance and voltage drop performance. The dual chiller thermistor is 5 kat 77 F (25 C)thermistor. Space temperature thermistor is a 10 kat 77 F (25 C). The DTT thermistor
is an 86 kat 77 F (25 C)thermistor. See Thermistors section
for temperature-resistance-voltage drop characteristics.
COOLER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR — The thermistor is
installed in a well in the factory-installed leaving fluid piping
coming from the bottom of the brazed-plate heat exchanger.
COOLER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR — The thermistor is
installed in a well in the factory-installed entering fluid piping
coming from the top of the brazed-plate heat exchanger.
COMPRESSOR RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR — These thermistors are installed in a well located in the
suction line of each circuit.
OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (OAT) —
This sensor is factory installed on a bracket which is inserted
through the base pan of the unit.
DISCHARGE
TEMPERATURE
THERMISTOR
(DTT) — This sensor is only used on units with a digital
compressor. The sensor is mounted on the discharge line close
to the discharge of the digital compressor. It attaches to the discharge line using a spring clip and protects the system from
high discharge gas temperature when the digital compressor is
used. This sensor is a connected to the AUX board.
REMOTE SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR OR DUAL
LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR — One of
two inputs can be connected to the LVT. See appropriate sensor below.
Remote Space Temperature Sensor — Sensor (part no.
33ZCT55SPT) is an accessory sensor that is remotely mounted
in the controlled space and used for space temperature reset.
The sensor should be installed as a wall-mounted thermostat
would be (in the conditioned space where it will not be subjected to either a cooling or heating source or direct exposure
to sunlight, and 4 to 5 ft above the floor).
Space temperature sensor wires are to be connected to
terminals in the unit main control box. The space temperature
sensor includes a terminal block (SEN) and a RJ11 female
connector. The RJ11 connector is used access into the Carrier
Comfort Network® (CCN) at the sensor.
To connect the space temperature sensor (Fig. 10):
1. Using a 20 AWG twisted pair conductor cable rated for
the application, connect 1 wire of the twisted pair to one
SEN terminal and connect the other wire to the other
SEN terminal located under the cover of the space
temperature sensor.
2. Connect the other ends of the wires to terminals 5 and 6
on TB5 located in the unit control box.

Table 15 — Thermistor Designations
THERMISTOR
LWT
EWT
RGTA
RGTB
OAT
SPT
DTT

PIN
CONNECTION
THERMISTOR INPUT
POINT
J8-13,14 (MBB) Cooler Leaving Fluid
J8-11,12 (MBB) Cooler Entering Fluid
J8-1,2 (MBB)
Circuit A Return Gas
Temperature
J8-3,4 (MBB)
Circuit B (035-060 only)
Return Gas Temperature
J8-7,8 (MBB)
Outdoor-Air Temperature
Sensor
J8-5,6 (MBB)
Accessory Remote Space
TB5-5,6
Temperature Sensor or
Dual LWT Sensor
J6-1,2 (AUX)
Discharge Temperature
Thermistor

LEGEND
LWT — Leaving Water Temperature
MBB — Main Base Board

Table 16 — Status Inputs
STATUS SWITCH
Chilled Water Pump 1
Chilled Water Pump 2
Remote On/Off
Cooler Flow Switch
Compressor Fault Signal, A1
Compressor Fault Signal, A2
Compressor Fault Signal, B1
Compressor Fault Signal, B2

PIN CONNECTION POINT
J7-1,2
J7-3,4
LVT-13,14
J7-9,10
J9-11,12
J9-5,6
J9-8,9
J9-2,3

Table 17 — Output Relays
RELAY
NO.
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
K9
K10
K11

PART NO.
Regular Wiring
Plenum Wiring
1895
—
A21451
A48301
8205
884421
D6451
—
M13402
M64430
6130
—

DESCRIPTION
Energize Compressor A1 (010-030)
Energize Compressor A1 and Condenser Fan Contactor 3 (055,060)
Energize Compressor A2 (all but 010, 015 60 Hz)
Energize Chilled Water Pump 1 Output
Energize Chilled Water Pump 2 Output
Energize Compressor B1 (035-050)
Energize Compressor B1 and Condenser Fan Contactor 3 (055,060)
Energize Compressor B2 (035-060)
Alarm Relay
Cooler/Pump Heater
Energize Condenser Fan Contactor 1 (018-060)
Energize Condenser Fan Contactor 2 (018-060)
Minimum Load Valve

3. Insert and secure the white (ground) wire to terminal 4 of
the space temperature sensor.
4. Insert and secure the black (–) wire to terminal 2 of the
space temperature sensor.
5. Connect the other end of the communication bus cable to
the remainder of the CCN communication bus.
Dual Leaving Water Temperature Sensor — For dual chiller
applications (parallel only are supported), connect the dual
chiller leaving fluid temperature sensor (refer to Configuring
and Operating Dual Chiller Control section on page 36) to the
space temperature input of the Master chiller. If space temperature is required for reset applications, connect the sensor to the
Slave chiller and configure the slave chiller to broadcast the
value to the Master chiller.

Units on the CCN can be monitored from the space at the
sensor through the RJ11 connector, if desired. To wire the RJ11
connector into the CCN (Fig. 11):
IMPORTANT: The cable selected for the RJ11 connector
wiring MUST be identical to the CCN communication bus
wire used for the entire network. Refer to Table 18 for
acceptable wiring.
1. Cut the CCN wire and strip ends of the red (+), white
(ground), and black (–) conductors. (If another wire color
scheme is used, strip ends of appropriate wires.)
2. Insert and secure the red (+) wire to terminal 5 of the
space temperature sensor terminal block.

LEGEND FOR FIG. 3-7
ALMR
AUX
BR
C
CB
CCB
CH
CHC
COMP
CSB
CWFS
CWP
DGS
DPT
DTT
DUS
EMM
EXV
FB
FC
FCB
FIOP
FR
GND
HPS
LON
LVT
MBB
MLV
MM
MP
MS
NEC
OAT
OFM
RGT
SCCR
SPT
SW
TB
TNKR
TRAN
UPC

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

Alarm Relay
Auxilliary
Boiler Relay
Contactor, Compressor
Circuit Breaker
Compressor Circuit Breaker
Crankcase Heater
Cooler/Pump Heater Contactor
Compressor
Current Sensor Board
Chilled Water Flow Switch
Chilled Water Pump
Digital Scroll Compressor
Discharge Pressure Transducer
Discharge Temperature Thermistor
Digital Unloader Solenoid
Energy Management
Electronic Expansion Valve
Fuse Block
Fan Contactor
Fan Circuit Breaker
factory Installed Option
Fan Relay
Ground
High-Pressure Switch
Local Operating Network
Low Voltage Terminal Block
Main Base Board
Minimum Load Valve
Motormaster
Motor Protector
Manual Starter
National Electrical Code
Outdoor-Air Thermistor
Outdoor Fan Motor
Return Gas Thermistor
Short Circuit Current Rating
Suction Pressure Transducer
Switch
Terminal Block
Storage Tank Heater Relay
Transformer
Unitary Protocol Converter
Terminal Block
Terminal (Unmarked)
Terminal (Marked)
Splice
Factory Wiring
Field Wiring
Accessory or Option Wiring
To indicate common potential only; not to represent wiring.

LOCATED OVER EMM AND EXV

EMM

EXV

FB-1

CHC

TRAN

CCB

AUX

CSB-A1

LON

UPC

DISCONNECT
OPTION/TB

TB1

TB4

FAN
1

C-A1

MBB
COMPRESSOR

MS- MSCWP1 CWP2
CWP1 CWP2

CONTROL BOX

a30-4962
Fig. 3 — Typical Control Box for 30RAP010,015

FB-1

EXV

EMM

AUX
LON

CHC

CCB-1

FB-3

TRAN

TB1 CSB-A1

CCB-2

CSB-A2

UPC
TB4

MBB

DISCONNECT
OPTION/TB

MS- MSCWP1 CWP2

C-A1

FC1/MM

CWP1 CWP2

FC2

Fig. 4 — Typical Control Box for 30RAP018-030
a30-4963

C-A2

TRAN-2

FR-1

CB-1

C-A1

CSB-A1

TRAN-1

FR-2

C-A2

CSB-A2

CB-2

FC-1
MM

23
FC-3

AUX

MBB

UPC
TB4

TB1

LOCATED OVER EMM AND EXV

LON

EXV
CHC

B1 B2
CONTROL BOX END

A1 A2

COMPRESSORS

FAN
2
FAN
1

FR-4

CSB-B2

CB-4

C-B2

055,060 UNIT ONLY

CWP1 CWP2

FAN
4

FR-3

MS- MSCWP1 CWP2

FAN
3

C-B1

CSB-B1

CB-3

Fig. 5 — Typical Control Box for 30RAP035-060

FC-2

FCB-1/2/3

EMM

DISCONNECT
OPTION/TB

a30-4964

STANDARD
TERMINAL
BLOCK

OPTIONAL
DISCONNECT
CB1A

TB1A

PER NEC

TO FUSED
DISCONNECT
PER NEC

TO FUSED DISCONNECT

CCB-1

BLK
BLK
BLK

YEL
YEL
YEL

11
12

BLU

YEL
BLU BLK

CCB-2
BLK

YEL

BLU

TRAN3

SECONDARY
115V

YEL
BLU

GRN/YEL

GFI-CO
FIOP/ACCESSORY
2

BLK

YEL

BLU

COMP A1

GRN/YEL

CH-A2

BLK

YEL

BLU

COMP A2

CHILLED WATER PUMP FIOP
CWP1

GRN/YEL

BLK

YEL

BLK

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLK

BLU

BLK

MS-CWP2

FU4

CA2

CSB-A2

MS-CWP1

BLU
BLK

BLK

FU6
BLK

RED

BLU

208/230V ONLY

FU5

YEL

BLU
BLU
BLU

CA1

BLK

BLK BLU

EQUIP GND

WHT

BLK
YEL

CH-A1

BLU
BLK

380V,460V,575V
ONLY
CSB-A1

CWP2

CWP1
WATER
PUMP
GRN/YEL

CWP2
WATER
PUMP
GRN/YEL

LINE

BRASS SCREW
SILVER SCREW

RESET
TEST

GRN-YEL

LOAD

VOLTAGE

SERIES

TERMINAL
CONNECTIONS
FOR PRIMARY SIDE

TERMINAL
CONNECTIONS FOR
SECONDARY SIDE

575-3-60

100

H1-H2

XF-X2

230-3-60

400,500

H2-H4

FB3

XF-X2

208-3-60

500

H3-H4

XF-X2

460-3-60

600

H1-H4

XF-X2

FB1

BLK 11

BLK

BLK-1

YEL

YEL 12

YEL

BLK-2

BLU

BLU 13

BLU

BLK-3

BLK

BLK-1

YEL

BLK-2

BLU

BLK-3

HIGH SCCR
ONLY

FUSE
NUMBER

TRAN
SIZE

UNIT VOLTAGE
208/230-3-60

200VA

575-3-60
FU3 (24V)

460-3-60,575-3-60

FU5 & FU6

500VA

208/230-3-60,230-3-60

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

FB1
(WITH MM)

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

FNM-6

NONE

LP-CC-20

NONE

KTK-R-15
KTK-R-20

208/230-3-60
380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

FB2

208/230-3-60
380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

FB3

FNQ-R-3.5

208/230-3-60

NONE

LP-CC-20

NONE

LP-CC-20

LOW AMBIENT OPERATION (MOTORMASTER V)

BLK

BLK-1

YEL

BLK-2

BLU 13

BLU

BLK-3

YEL
VIO 11
240

FB2

1/4W

BLK

BLK-1

YEL

BLK-2

BLU

BLK-3

BLK
WHT

COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(380,460,575V)

BLK

VOLTAGE

208/230/460/575

380

1
2

OFM2

3
1

GRN/YEL

3
2

BLK

BLK
COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(208/230,230V)

~
~

CHC

YEL

TB
13A

~
~

* MM SIGNAL CONNECTION

FROM
AUX-J4

CHC

GRN/YEL

MMR
14

RED

YEL

WHT

OFM1

BLK

BLK
COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(208/230,230V)

BLK

FC2

BLK

YEL 12

GRN/YEL

FIOP/ACCESSORY

BLK 11

HIGH SCCR
ONLY

OFM2

MM-A

FB1

FB3

GRN/YEL

COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(380,460,575V)

CHC

YEL

OFM1

WHT

FNQ-R-2.5

500VA

208/230-3-60

1
2

208/230-3-60

FB1
(NO MM)

~
~

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

FU4 (115V)

BLK

BLK BLU

FNM-10

200VA

208/230-3-60

CHC

YEL

FNQ-R-2
FNQ-R-1.5

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

FC2

~
~

380-3-60
460-3-60

FU1 & FU2

REPLACE
WITH
FNQ-R-3.5
FNQ-R-2.5

FC1

BLK

WHT

TABLE 1
VOLTAGE

SERIES

TERMINAL
CONNECTIONS
FOR PRIMARY SIDE

575-3-60

100

H1 & H2

380-3-60

200

H1 & H2

230-3-60

500

H2 & H4

208-3-60

500

H3 & H4

460-3-60

600

H1 & H4

CONNECT FOR
APPROPRIATE
PRIMARY VOLTAGE
SEE TABLE 1

TB4
7 RED

BLK

FU2

YEL

3. ALL FIELD INTERLOCK CONTACTS MUST HAVE A MIN RATING OF
2 AMPS @ 24VAC SEALED. SEE FIELD INTERLOCK WIRING.
4. COMPRESSOR AND FAN MOTORS ARE THERMALLY PROTECTED-THREE PHASE MOTORS PROTECTED AGAINST PRIMARY SINGLE
PHASE CONDITIONS.
5. TERMINALS 13 & 14 OF LVT ARE FOR FIELD CONNECTION
OF REMOTE ON-OFF. THE CONTACT MUST BE RATED FOR DRY
CIRCUIT APPLICATION CAPABLE OF HANDLING A 5VDC
1 MA TO 20 MA LOAD.

SECONDARY 24V
XF

FU3

8. IF CHILLED WATER PUMP INTERLOCK IS USED,
REMOVE JUMPER FROM TERMINAL 11 TO 17 AND
WIRE INTERLOCK CONTACT ACROSS TERMINALS 11 & 17.
9. MP-A1 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:
018,020: ALL UNITS
025,030: 460V UNITS WITHOUT DIGITAL SCROLL
10. MP-A2 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:
018-020: ALL UNITS
025,030: 460V UNITS
11. JUMPER PLUG REQUIRED WHEN MP NOT USED

6. FOR 500 SERIES UNIT OPERATION AT 208-3-60V LINE VOLTAGE,
TRAN1 PRIMARY CONNECTIONS MUST BE MOVED TO TERMINALS H3
& H4.

GRN/YEL

RED

1. FACTORY WIRING IS IN ACCORDANCE WITH UL 1995 STANDARDS.
ANY FIELD MODIFICATIONS OR ADDITIONS MUST BE IN
COMPLIANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES.
C MIN WIRE FOR FIELD POWER SUPPLY.

FU1

TRAN1
PRIMARY
H3
H2

NOTES:

TB4
5

TB1
C

RED

BRN

7. FOR UNITS WITH LOW AMBIENT MOTOR MASTER V FIOP/ACCESSORY,
FAN CONTACTOR FC1 IS REPLACED WITH MOTORMASTER RELAY MMR.

BRN

SW2
C1

C TB1

BRN

UPC FIOP

VIO

BRN

24VAC

CB3
3.2 AMPS

VIO

TB4
6

BRN

2 GND

VIO

1 HOT

RED

UPC

2
1

3
2
1

FIOP/ACCESSORY
VIO

3
BRN
VIO

J1
MBB
J2

3
2
1

BRN
RED

3
2
1

J1
EMM
J2

3
2
1

DGS FIOP

3
2

J1
EXV
J2

BRN
RED

2
1

12
11

AUX
J1

a30-4965
BRN
1
VIO

BRN

CWFS

BLU

BRN

Fig. 6A — Typical Wiring Schematic, 30RAP018-030 Units — Power Wiring
24

CB1
3.2 AMPS

RED

TRAN1

MBB

TB4
5 ORN

J10A

RLY 11

BRN

GRA

ORN

FC1

23
24

RED

BLK

ORN

SEE NOTE 7

BRN

FC2

BRN

FC1

BRN

FC3

BRN

TB1

GRA

VIO

SEE NOTE 11

VIO

TNK
R

CHC

BRN

ORN

CA1

BRN

TB1

BRN

CA2

CA1

TB1

GRA

VIO

LVT

VIO

J12

RED

6
5

GRA

ALMR

VIO

BRN

HEAT/BOILER FIELD
INSTALLED WIRING

CA2

BRN

CWP
1

BRN

RED

CWP2

BRN

CWP1

CWP
2

J11

CWFS

BLK

2
1

WHT

6
5
4
3

SEE NOTES ON
PAGE 24.

FIELD INSTALLED
MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED
10VA INRUSH

2
1

10
4

CWPI

2
3
4

ORN

1
2

3
4
5

RED

SW1
A1 ENABLE
RED
C1
B1

OFF

MAIN
BASE
BOARD

1
2
3
4
5

RED
RED

GRA

7
9

GRA

13
14
CWP2

RED

13
14
CWP1

VIO

11
12

LEN
(+)

CCN
(COM)
(-)

WHT
BLK

SHIELD

BLK

WHT

RED

BRN

RED

BLK

WHT

RED

BRN
RED
BLK
WHT
RED
BLK
WHT
RED

UPC
RED

PORT 2
1 NET +

BLK

2 NET 3 N/C
4 N/C
5 SIGNAL
PORT 1A
1 NET +

1
2

3
4

5
6

7
8

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

11
10

9
8

5
4

13
14

7
6

15
16

19
20

LON
OPTION

J3 GND

NET
J4
1
2

23
24
25

2 NET 2
3 SHIELD

UPC OPT

3
4

1
2
3
4
5
6

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

RED

BLK

WHT

BLK

RED

3
2
1

3
2

EXV

1
2

3
4
5

RED

WHT

BLK

BRN

RED

BRN

RED

ORN

BRN

RED

ORN

BRN

RED

ORN

BRN

RED

ORN

BRN

3
4
5

MARQUEE
DISPLAY

BLK

WHT

RED

3
2
1

4
1

3
2

3
4
5

CSB
B2
6

CSB
A2

5
4

CSB
B1

BLK
WHT
RED

CSB
A1

3
2
1

AUX J2

DGS OR
MM
FIOP
OFF

J13

1
2

CH1

1
2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

RGTA

RED

DARK = SWITCH LOCATION

1
2
3
4
5

7
8

PL-EXVA

BLK

YEL

WHT

EXV-A
GRY

GRN

RED

PL50-1
VIO

DUS

RED

BRN

BLK

PL50-2
CH11
-

1
2

PL50-3
RED

DTT

RED

BLK

PL50-4

CH9

CH10

LVT

WHT

6
8

RED

J12

VIO

GRA

BRN

PL1-6

MP-A2
VIO

LVT
21

VIO

PL1-5

ALM
R

ORN

J12
6

MP-A2 T1

PL1-8

BRN

FIOP OR
FIELD INSTALLED
OPTION

RED

BRN

PL1-2

MP-A1

VIO
SEE NOTE 11

DUAL
SETPOINT

A2 CWP1

PL1-4

MP-A1 T1
SEE NOTE 10

BLK

PL1-1

BRN

CA2

RED

ORN

A2 CA1

ACCESSORY
STORAGE TANK
HEATER RELAY

HPS-A

REMOTE
ON-OFF
SWITCH
(SEE NOTE
5)

A2 CHC

BRN

MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED
10VA INRUSH

LVT

J11

RED

LVT J12-5

BRN

RED
PL1-7

TB4
4

RED

10 RED

EXV J1-2

ORN

SEE
NOTE 8

BRN

SEE NOTE 9

PL1-3
RED

MLV ACCSY
A1

PNK

LVT

GRA

PNK

7 RED

CWFS 3

RED

MLV-A

LVT

BRN
BRN

HEAT

UPC GND

RLY 4

BRN

RLY 3

BRN

MBB J1-2

RLY 2

GRN/YEL

RLY 1

GRA

RLY 8

SECONDARY 24V

FU3

BRN

RLY 7

RLY 6

RED

BLK

6 RED

RLY 5

RED

RLY 10

TB4
4

TB1

RED

TB4
7

J10B

ORN

SW2

RED

3 RED

RLY 9

ORN

CB2
5.2 AMPS

1
2

RED
BLK

TO MM-A

1
2

BLK

LVT

4
5
6
1
2

J12

T55

BLU

OAT

RED

LVT

SEN

T-55
ACCSY

SPACE TEMPERATURE
ACCESSORY OR
DUAL CHILLER LWT

BLK

4
BLK
WHT
RED

3
2
1

4
3
2

EMM

2
3
4

5
6

4
1
2
3
4

EVAPORATOR ENTERING
FLUID TEMP

RED

4
BLK

BLK

EVAPORATOR LEAVING
FLUID TEMP

RED

WHT
RED

3
2
1

4
3
2

7
8
9
10
11

BLK

FIOP/
ACCESSORY

3
4

6
7
8
9
10
11
12

RED
GRN
BLK
RED
GRN
BLK

B
C
A

DPTA

6
7
8
9

B
C

10
11

SPTA

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

J10
17

GRA

RED

BLU

ICE DONE
DLS STEP 1
DLS STEP 2

9
10
11
12
13
14
10
1
2
3
4
5
6

BRN

6
5

ORN

+ DEMAND
LIMIT
- 4-20mA

+ TEMP
RESET
- 4-20mA

+ COOLING
SETPOINT
- 4-20mA

4
3

7
8

9
VIO

2
PNK

10
11
12

Fig. 6B — Typical Wiring Schematic, 30RAP018-030 Units — Control Wiring
25

GRA

a30-4966

STANDARD
TERMINAL
BLOCK

OPTIONAL
DISCONNECT
CB1A

CCB-1

TB1A

PER NEC

TO FUSED
DISCONNECT
PER NEC

TO FUSED DISCONNECT

BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK

YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL

BLU
YEL
BLU BLK

CCB-2
BLK

YEL

BLU

CCB-3

FU6
BLK

RED

1
H2

TRAN3

YEL

BLU

YEL
BLU

BLK

LINE

SERIES

TERMINAL
CONNECTIONS
FOR PRIMARY SIDE

575-3-60

100

H1-H2

XF-X2

230-3-60

400,500

H2-H4

XF-X2

208-3-60

500

H3-H4

XF-X2

460-3-60

600

H1-H4

XF-X2

VOLTAGE

TEST

GRN-YEL

LOAD

BLU

YEL

TRAN
SIZE

UNIT VOLTAGE
208/230-3-60
380-3-60
460-3-60

200VA

575-3-60

BLU

TERMINAL
CONNECTIONS FOR
SECONDARY SIDE

500VA

FB1
(NO MM)

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

FB1
(WITH MM)

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

208/230-3-60
208/230-3-60
575-3-60

BLK

YEL

BLU

YEL
BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

NONE

LP-CC-20

NONE

KTK-R-15
KTK-R-20

NONE

LP-CC-20

NONE

LP-CC-20

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLK

BLU

BLK

CWP2

FB1

FC1

BLK 11

BLK-1

YEL 12

BLK-2

BLU 13

BLK-3
CHC

BLK

TABLE 1

BLK

YEL

BLU

SERIES

575-3-60

100

H1 & H2

575-3-60

100

COM & 575

380-3-60

200

H1 & H2

380-3-60

200

COM & 380

230-3-60

500

H2 & H4

230-3-60

500

COM & 230

208-3-60

500

H3 & H4

208-3-60

500

COM & 208

460-3-60

600

H1 & H4

460-3-60

600

COM & 460

FU1

BLK

FU2

YEL

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

BLK BLU
11

BLK-1

YEL

BLK-2

BLU

BLK-3

RED

UPC

2
1

3
2
1

2
1

BRN
RED

3
2
1

J1
EMM
J2

BRN

BLU 13

BLU

BLK-3

2
1

BRN
RED

2
1

12
11

240

1
OFM4
(055,060 ONLY)

GRN/YEL

OFM3 (035-050)
OFM4 (055,060)

1/4W

RED

GRN/YEL
* MM SIGNAL CONNECTION

FROM
AUX-J4

BLK

SEE NOTE 7

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

FC2

BLK

COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(380,460,575V)

BLK

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

FC1

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLU

BLK-3

380

BLK
COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(208/230,230V)

WHT

OFM1

GRN/YEL

1
OFM2

GRN/YEL

1
2
3

OFM3
(055,060 ONLY)

GRN/YEL

BRN

Fig. 7A — Typical Wiring Schematic, 30RAP035-060 Units — Power Wiring
26

BLK

BLK-3

YEL

208/230/460/575

BLK-2

BLK

VOLTAGE

BLK-1

AUX
J1

TB
13A

(055,060 ONLY)
BLU

GRN/YEL

MMR
VIO 11
14

CHC

OFM2

YEL

CWFS

BLK-2

DGS FIOP

1
2

WHT

J1
EXV
J2

GRN/YEL

VIO

BLK-1

CHC

BRN
1

BLK

BRN

OFM1

YEL

~
~

BLK

FCB2/FB2

FIOP/ACCESSORY

YEL 12

GRN/YEL

J1
MBB
J2

BLK 11

SECONDARY 24V

RED

YEL 12

575
460
400
380
230

FIOP/ACCESSORY

BLK 11

2
TRAN2
PRIMARY
208

WHT

MM-A

FB1

24VAC

FC3

BLK

(055,060 ONLY)

C TB1

1 HOT

BLK-3

UPC FIOP
2 GND

BLK-2

BLK

COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(208/230,230V)

BLK-3

RED

BRN

VIO

YEL

FB3

GRN/YEL

BRN

~
~

BRN

BLK-1

OFM3

GRN/YEL

BLK

YEL

COM

SECONDARY 24V

SW2

FC2

BLK

CB4
3.2 AMPS

HIGH SCCR
ONLY

RED

VIO

GRN/YEL

BLK-2

TERMINAL
CONNECTIONS
FOR PRIMARY SIDE

CONNECT FOR
APPROPRIATE
PRIMARY VOLTAGE
SEE TABLE 2

TRAN1
PRIMARY
H3
H2

BRN

CWP2
WATER
PUMP

COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(380,460,575V)

LOW AMBIENT OPERATION (MOTORMASTER V)

VOLTAGE

GRN/YEL

BLK-1

TABLE 2

TERMINAL
CONNECTIONS
FOR PRIMARY SIDE

CWP1
WATER
PUMP

SEE NOTE 7

BLK

SERIES

VIO

GRN/YEL

~
~

10. MP-A1 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:
035-045: ALL UNITS
050-060: 460V UNITS WITHOUT DIGITAL SCROLL
11. MP-A2 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:
035-045: ALL UNITS
050-060: 460V UNITS
12. MP-B1 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:
035,040: ALL UNITS
045-060: 460V UNITS
13. MP-B2 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:
035,040: ALL UNITS
045-060: 460V UNITS
14. JUMPER PLUG REQUIRED WHEN MP NOT USED

VOLTAGE

TB4
6

YEL

VIO

COMP B2

YEL

FCB2/FB2

9. IF CHILLED WATER PUMP INTERLOCK IS USED,
REMOVE JUMPER FROM TERMINAL 11 TO 17 AND
WIRE INTERLOCK CONTACT ACROSS TERMINALS 11 & 17.

8. FOR UNITS WITH LOW AMBIENT MOTOR MASTER V FIOP/ACCESSORY,
030-050: FAN CONTACTOR FC1 IS REPLACED WITH MOTORMASTER RELAY MMR.
055,060: FAN CONTACTOR FC3 IS REPLACED WITH MOTORMASTER RELAY MMR..

VIO

HIGH SCCR
ONLY

6. FOR 500 SERIES UNIT OPERATION AT 208-3-60V LINE VOLTAGE,
TRAN1 PRIMARY CONNECTIONS MUST BE MOVED TO TERMINALS H3
& H4.
7. FOR 575-3-60V UNITS, FAN CIRCUIT BREAKER FCB2
IS REPLACED WITH FUSE BLOCK FB2.

CB3
3.2 AMPS

GRN/YEL

CH-B2

FNM-6

BLK

FB3

FNQ-R-3.5

1. FACTORY WIRING IS IN ACCORDANCE WITH UL 1995 STANDARDS.
ANY FIELD MODIFICATIONS OR ADDITIONS MUST BE IN
COMPLIANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES.
2. USE 75 C MIN WIRE FOR FIELD POWER SUPPLY.

COMP B1

CHC

GRN/YEL

CHILLED WATER PUMP FIOP
CWP1

YEL

FU3

FNM-10
FNQ-R-2.5

NOTES:

COMP A2

WHT

TB4
7 RED

208/230-3-60

GRN/YEL

CH-B1

~
~

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

CONNECT FOR
APPROPRIATE
PRIMARY VOLTAGE
SEE TABLE 1

FNQ-R-2

500VA

208/230-3-60

FB3

COMP A1

CB2

CSB-B2

MS-CWP1

REPLACE
WITH
FNQ-R-3.5
FNQ-R-2.5

200VA

208/230-3-60
460-3-60,575-3-60
208/230-3-60,230-3-60
380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

FB2

FNQ-R-1.5

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

FU4 (115V)

CH-A2

BLU
BLK

BLK

MS-CWP2

FU3 (24V)

BLU

CB1

BLK

208/230V ONLY

BRASS SCREW
RESET

FU5 & FU6

BLU
BLK

YEL

CCB-4

GFI-CO
FIOP/ACCESSORY

FU1 & FU2

FU4

GRN/YEL

FUSE
NUMBER

YEL

YEL
X1

SILVER SCREW

BLK

CA2

CSB-A2

BLK

BLU
BLK

380V,460V,575V
ONLY
CSB-B1

BLK

BLU BLK

SECONDARY
115V

BLU

CA1

BLK

YEL

208/230V ONLY

FU5

WHT

YEL

EQUIP GND

11
12

BLK BLU

BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU

BLK
YEL

CH-A1

BLU
BLK

380V,460V,575V
ONLY
CSB-A1

a305283

CB1
3.2 AMPS

a30-5284

RED

TRAN1

MBB

TB4
5 ORN

J10A

RLY 11

4
5

ORN

BLU

BLK

PL2-1

VIO

SEE NOTE 14

23
24

PNK

LVT
18

HPS-A

BLK

VIO

SEE NOTE 14

PL1-5

VIO
SEE NOTE 14

VIO

GRA

LVT

VIO

J12

TAN

GRA

VIO

RED

GRA

4
3

ALMR

VIO

BRN

HEAT/BOILER FIELD
INSTALLED WIRING

LVT

(055,060 ONLY) PNK

TAN

CWFS

BLK

WHT

CB1

FR3

CB2

FR4

2
3
4

ORN

1
2

3
4
5

REMOTE
ON-OFF
SWITCH
(SEE NOTE
5)

SW1
A1 ENABLE
RED
C1
B1

OFF

MAIN
BASE
BOARD

1
2
3
4
5

RED
RED

GRA

7
9

GRA

13
14
CWP2

RED

13
14
CWP1

VIO

11
12

LEN
(+)

CCN

WHT

(COM)

BLK

(-)

RED

SHIELD

BRN

BLK

WHT

RED

BRN

RED

BLK

WHT

RED

RED
BLK
WHT
RED
BLK
WHT
RED

UPC
RED

PORT 2
1 NET +

BLK

2 NET 3 N/C
4 N/C
5 SIGNAL
PORT 1A
1 NET +

1
2

3
4

5
6

7
8

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

11
10

9
8
6
5
4

12
13
14

15
16

19
20

LON
OPTION

J3 GND

NET
J4
1
2

23
24
25

2 NET 2
3 SHIELD

UPC OPT

FC3

BRN

TB1

BRN

CB2

BRN

CB1

BRN

TB1

BRN

TB1

BRN

TB1

BRN

CA2

BRN

CA1

BRN

TB1

BRN

CWP2

BRN

CWP1

BRN

FC2

ACCSY
ALMR
AUX
BR
C
CB
CCB
CH
CHC
CO
COMP
CSB
CWFS
CWP
CWPI
DGS
DLS
DPT
DTT
DUS
EMM
EWT
EXV
FB
FC
FCB
FIOP
FR
FU
GND
HPS
HR
LVT
LWT
MBB
MLV
MM
MMR
MP
MS
OAT
OFM
PL
R
RGT
RLY
SAT
SCCR
SPT
SW
TB
TNKR
TRAN
UPC

BRN
(055,060 ONLY)

LVT

J12
5

TNK
R

FR1

CA2

FR2

CWP
1

BRN
(055,060 ONLY)

PNK

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4
5
6

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2

FC3

RED

BLK

WHT

BLK

RED

3
2
1

3
2

EXV

1
2

3
4
5

RED

WHT

BLK

BRN

RED

BRN

RED

ORN

BRN

RED

ORN

BRN

RED

ORN

BRN

RED

ORN

BRN

3
4
5

MARQUEE
DISPLAY

BLK

WHT

RED

3
2
1

4
1

3
2

3
4
5

CSB
B2
6

CSB
A2

5
4

CSB
B1

BLK
WHT
RED

CSB
A1

3
2
1

AUX J2

DGS OR
MM
FIOP

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

RGTA

RED

DARK = SWITCH LOCATION

3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

BRN

PL2-8
BRN

BRN

TERMINAL BLOCK
TERMINAL (UNMARKED)
TERMINAL (MARKED)
SPLICE
FACTORY WIRING
FIELD WIRING
ACCESSORY OR OPTION WIRING
TO INDICATE COMMON POTENTIAL
ONLY,NOT TO REPRESENT WIRING
ACCESSORY
ALARM RELAY
AUXILIARY
BOILER RELAY
CONTACTOR, COMPRESSOR
CIRCUIT BREAKER
COMPRESSOR CIRCUIT BREAKER
CRANKCASE HEATER
COOLER/PUMP HEATER CONTACTOR
CONVENIENCE OUTLET
COMPRESSOR
CURRENT SENSOR BOARD
CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH
CHILLED WATER PUMP
CHILLED WATER PUMP INTERLOCK
DIGITAL SCROLL
DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH
DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR
DIGITAL UNLOADER SOLENOID
ENERGY MANAGEMENT
ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE
EXPANSION VALVE CONTROL BOARD
FUSE BLOCK
FAN CONTACTOR
FAN CIRCUIT BREAKER
FACTORY INSTALLED OPTION
FAN RELAY
FUSE
GROUND
HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH
HEAT RELAY
LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL
LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE
MAIN BASE BOARD
MINIMUM LOAD VALVE
MOTORMASTER
MOTORMASTER RELAY
MODULAR MOTOR PROTECTOR
MANUAL STARTER
OUTDOOR AIR THERMISTOR
OUTDOOR FAN MOTOR
PLUG
RELAY
RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE
RELAY
SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE
SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING
SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
SWITCH
TERMINAL BLOCK
STORAGE TANK HEATER RELAY
TRANSFORMER
UNITARY PROTOCOL CONVERTER

CH1

1
2
3
4
5

7
8

PL-EXVB

BLK

YEL

WHT

EXV-B
GRY

GRN

RED

RED
PL-EXVA

BLK

YEL

WHT

EXV-A
GRY

GRN

RED

PL50-1
VIO

DUS

RED

BRN

BLK

PL50-2
CH11
-

1
2

PL50-3
RED

DTT

RED

BLK

PL50-4
CH9

CH10
-

1
2

RED
BLK

TO MM-A

1
2

RGTB

RED

LVT

BLK

J12

T55

BLU

OAT

RED

LVT

SEN

T-55
ACCSY

SPACE TEMPERATURE
ACCESSORY OR
DUAL CHILLER LWT

BLK

4
BLK
WHT
RED

3
2
1

4
3
2

EMM

2
3
4

5
6

MP-B2 T1

BRN

PL2-4
BRN

BLK

SEE NOTE 13

RED

BRN

(055,060 ONLY)
SEE NOTE 8

OFF

J13

FC1

LVT

WHT

6
8

10
15

DUAL
SETPOINT

RED

BRN

(055,060 ONLY)

SEE
NOTE 9

BRN

(055,060 ONLY)

MP-B1 T1

BRN

PL1-8

FR1

CWPI

MP-A2 T1
SEE NOTE 12

RED

PL1-4
BRN

LEGEND
X

BRN

ALM
R

CWP
2

RED

PL2-7

(055,060 ONLY) PNK

TAN

MP-A1 T1
SEE NOTE 11

PL2-3

FR2

4
J11
2

FC2

CA1

RED

FIELD INSTALLED
MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED
10VA INRUSH

FR3

5
4

(055,060 ONLY) PNK

TAN

J12
6

CHC

RED
PL1-7

FIOP OR
FIELD INSTALLED
OPTION

FR4
LVT

A2 CWP1

FC2

PL1-6

MP-A2

GRA

ORN

BRN

CA2

ORN

VIO

A2 CA1

PL1-2

MP-A1

ORN

A2 CHC

BRN

SEE NOTE 10

PL1-3
RED

LVT J12-5

BRN

BLK

PL1-1

RED

A2 CB1

BRN

ORN

CWFS 3

BRN

RED

ORN

BRN

ACCESSORY
STORAGE TANK
HEATER RELAY

ORN

FC1

MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED
10VA INRUSH

J11

PNK

VIO

RED

UPC GND

SEE NOTE 8

PL2-6

MP-B2

PNK

TB4
4

VIO

PL2-5

RED

VIO

BRN

PL2-2

MP-B1

VIO
SEE NOTE 14

10 RED

MBB J1-2

RED

BLU

VIO

HEAT

PNK

HPS-B

7 RED

RLY 4

MLV ACCSY
PNK

BRN

GRA

RLY 3

GRA

MLV-A

RLY 2

BRN

GRA

RLY 1

GRN/YEL

RLY 8

BLU

RLY 7

SECONDARY 24V

FU3

RLY 6

BLK

RLY 5

RED

J10B

RED

RLY 10

TB4
4

TB1

RED

TB4
7

RED

6 RED

ORN

SW2

BRN

3 RED

RLY 9

ORN

CB2
5.2 AMPS

EVAPORATOR ENTERING
FLUID TEMP

RED

4
BLK

BLK

EVAPORATOR LEAVING
FLUID TEMP

RED

WHT
RED

3
2
1

4
3
2

GRN
BLK
RED
GRN
BLK
RED
GRN
BLK
RED
GRN
BLK

8
9
10
11

BLK
RED

B
C
A

FIOP/
ACCESSORY

DPTB

B
C

2
3

SPTB

4
5

B
C
A

DPTA

6
7
8
9

B
C

10
11

SPTA

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

J10
17

GRA

RED

BLU

ICE DONE
DLS STEP 1
DLS STEP 2

9
10
11
12
13
14
10
1
2
3
4
5
6

BRN

6
5

ORN

+ DEMAND
LIMIT
- 4-20mA

+ TEMP
RESET
- 4-20mA

+ COOLING
SETPOINT
- 4-20mA

4
3

7
8

9
VIO

2
PNK

10
11
12

Fig. 7B — Typical Wiring Schematic, 30RAP035-060 Units — Control Wiring
27

GRA

RED LED - STATUS

GREEN LED LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK)

YELLOW LED CCN (CARRIER COMFORT NETWORK)
INSTANCE JUMPER

CEPL130346-01
K11

STATUS

K10

J10

LEN

CCN

J5
J6

Fig. 8 — Main Base Board

a30-4967

Fig. 9 — Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch, and Emergency On/Off Switch Locations
T-55 SPACE
SENSOR

a30-4968
SPT (T10) PART NO. 33ZCT55SPT

SENSOR
SEN

SEN

LVT

TO CCN
COMM 1
BUS (PLUG)
AT UNIT

CCN+

CCN GND

4
3

CCN-

2
1

Fig. 10 — Typical Space Temperature
Sensor Wiring
Fig. 11 — CCN Communications Bus Wiring
to Optional Space Sensor RJ11 Connector
28

compressor to start next. If no compressors have been running
for more than 30 minutes and the leaving fluid temperature is
greater than the saturated condensing temperature, the wear
factor is still used to determine which compressor to start next.
If the leaving fluid temperature is less than the saturated condensing temperature, then the control will start either compressor A1 or compressor B1 first, depending on the user-configurable circuit lead-lag value. For units with the minimum load
control valve, the A circuit with the minimum load valve is always the lead circuit. The A circuit is also always the lead for
units with the digital compressor option. On units with the digital scroll option, the A1 compressor operates continuously,
providing close leaving chilled water control. For this reason,
on/off cycling of the unit’s compressors is dramatically reduced, which in turn reduces wear associated with compressor
start/stop cycles.
The EXVs will provide a controlled start-up. During startup, the low pressure logic will be bypassed for 21/2 minutes to
allow for the transient changes during start-up. As additional
stages of compression are required, the processor control will
add them. See Table 19.
If a circuit is to be stopped, the compressor with the lowest
wear factor will be shut off first except when a digital compressor is used. The digital compressor is always the last compressor to shut off.
The capacity control algorithm runs every 30 seconds. The
algorithm attempts to maintain the Control Point at the desired
set point. Each time it runs, the control reads the entering and
leaving fluid temperatures. The control determines the rate at
which conditions are changing and calculates 2 variables based
on these conditions. Next, a capacity ratio is calculated using
the 2 variables to determine whether or not to make any
changes to the current stages of capacity. This ratio value
ranges from –100 to +100%. If the next stage of capacity is a
compressor, the control starts (stops) a compressor when the
ratio reaches +100% (–100%). If installed, the minimum load
valve solenoid will be energized with the first stage of capacity.
Minimum load valve value is a fixed 30% in the total capacity
calculation. The control will also use the minimum load valve
solenoid as the last stage of capacity before turning off the last
compressor. A delay of 90 seconds occurs after each capacity
step change. Refer to Table 19.
MINUTES LEFT FOR START — This value is displayed
only in the network display tables (using Service Tool,
ComfortVIEW™ or ComfortWORKS® software) and
represents the amount of time to elapse before the unit will start
its initialization routine. This value can be zero without the
machine running in many situations. This can include being
unoccupied, ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch in
the OFF position, CCN not allowing unit to start, Demand
Limit in effect, no call for cooling due to no load, and alarm or
alert conditions present. If the machine should be running and
none of the above are true, a minimum off time (DELY, see
below) may be in effect. The machine should start normally
once the time limit has expired.
MINUTES
OFF
TIME
(ConfigurationOPT2
DELY) — This user-configurable time period is used by the
control to determine how long unit operation is delayed after
power is applied/restored to the unit. Typically, this time period
is configured when multiple machines are located on a single
site. For example, this gives the user the ability to prevent all
the units from restarting at once after a power failure. A value
of zero for this variable does not mean that the unit should be
running.

This
factory-installed option (FIOP) or field-installed accessory is
used for the following types of temperature reset, demand
limit, and/or ice features:
• 4 to 20 mA leaving fluid temperature reset (requires
field-supplied 4 to 20 mA generator)
• 4 to 20 mA cooling set point reset (requires fieldsupplied 4 to 20 mA generator)
• Discrete inputs for 2-step demand limit (requires fieldsupplied dry contacts capable of handling a 24 vac,
50 mA load)
• 4 to 20 mA demand limit (requires field-supplied 4 to
20 mA generator)
• Discrete input for Ice Done switch (requires fieldsupplied dry contacts capable of handling a 24 vac,
50 mA load)
See Demand Limit and Temperature Reset sections on
pages 41 and 37 for further details.

Energy Management Module (Fig. 12) —

CAUTION
Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufacturer’s control systems due to possible power supply
differences, full wave bridge versus half wave rectification.
The two different power supplies cannot be mixed.
ComfortLink™ controls use half wave rectification. A
signal isolation device should be utilized if a full wave
bridge signal generating device is used.
A proof-ofcooler flow device is factory installed in all chillers. It is recommended that proper operation of the switch be verified on a regular basis.

Loss-of-Cooler Flow Protection —

Electronic Expansion Valves (EXV) — All units are

equipped from the factory with EXVs. Each refrigeration circuit is also supplied with a factory-installed liquid line filter
drier and sight glass.
The EXV is set at the factory to maintain 9° F (5.0° C) suction superheat leaving the cooler by metering the proper
amount of refrigerant into the cooler. The superheat set point is
adjustable, but should not be adjusted unless absolutely
necessary.
The EXV is designed to limit the cooler saturated suction
temperature to 50 F (12.8 C). This makes it possible for unit to
start at high cooler fluid temperatures without overloading the
compressor.

Capacity Control — The control system cycles compressors, digital scroll modulting solenoid (if equipped), and
minimum load valve solenoids (if equipped) to maintain the
user-configured leaving chilled fluid temperature set point. Entering fluid temperature is used by the main base board (MBB)
to determine the temperature drop across the cooler and is used
in determining the optimum time to add or subtract capacity
stages. The chilled fluid temperature set point can be automatically reset by the return fluid temperature, space, or outdoor-air
temperature reset features. It can also be reset from an external
4 to 20-mA signal (requires energy management module FIOP
or accessory).
The standard control has an automatic lead-lag feature built
in which determines the wear factor (combination of starts and
run hours) for each compressor. If all compressors are off and
less than 30 minutes has elapsed since the last compressor was
turned off, the wear factor is used to determine which

LEN

TEST 1

PWR

STATUS

CEPL130351-01

CEBD430351-0396-01C

J7
J6

RED LED - STATUS

TEST 2

GREEN LED LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK)

ADDRESS
DIP SWITCH

Fig. 12 — Energy Management Module
when the control is attempting to remove the last stage of
capacity.
Slow Change Override — The control prevents the capacity
stages from being changed when the leaving fluid temperature
is close to the set point (within an adjustable deadband) and
moving towards the set point.
Ramp Loading
—
Ramp
loading
(ConfigurationSLCTCRMP) limits the rate of change of leaving
fluid temperature. If the unit is in a Cooling mode and configured for Ramp Loading, the control makes 2 comparisons before deciding to change stages of capacity. The control calculates a temperature difference between the control point and
leaving fluid temperature. If the difference is greater than 4° F
(2.2° C) and the rate of change (°F or °C per minute) is more
than the configured Cooling Ramp Loading value (CRMP),
the control does not allow any changes to the current stage of
capacity.
Low Entering Fluid Temperature Unloading — When the
entering fluid temperature is below the control point, the
control will attempt to remove 25% of the current stages being
used. If exactly 25% cannot be removed, the control removes
an amount greater than 25% but no more than necessary. The
lowest stage will not be removed.
Minimum Load Control — If equipped, the minimum load
control valve is energized only when one compressor is running on circuit A. If the close control feature is enabled the
minimum load control valve may be used as needed to obtain
leaving fluid temperature close to set point.

LEAD/LAG DETERMINATION — This is a configurable
choice and is factory set to be automatic for all units unless the
unit is equipped with a digital scroll compressor or minimum
load, then circuit A is lead (ConfigurationOPT2 LLCS).
The value can be changed to Circuit A or Circuit B leading as
desired. Set at automatic, the control will sum the current number of logged circuit starts and one-quarter of the current operating hours for each circuit. The circuit with the lowest sum is
started first. Changes to which circuit is the lead circuit and
which is the lag are also made when total machine capacity is
at 100% or when there is a change in the direction of capacity
(increase or decrease) and each circuit’s capacity is equal.
CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES — The following overrides will modify the normal operation of the routine.
Deadband Multiplier — The user configurable Deadband
Multiplier (ConfigurationSLCTZ.GN) has a default value of 1.0. The range is from 1.0 to 4.0. When set to other than
1.0, this factor is applied to the capacity Load/Unload Factor.
The larger this value is set, the longer the control will delay between adding or removing stages of capacity. Figure 13 shows
how compressor starts can be reduced over time if the leaving
water temperature is allowed to drift a larger amount above and
below the set point. This value should be set in the range of 3.0
to 4.0 for systems with small loop volumes.
First Stage Override — If the current capacity stage is zero,
the control will modify the routine with a 1.2 factor on adding
the first stage to reduce cycling. This factor is also applied
30

Table 19 — Part Load Data Percent Displacement, Standard Units with Minimum Load Valve
CONTROL
STEPS

30RAP UNIT SIZE
010
015

1
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5

018
020
025
030

035

040

045

050

055

060

CAPACITY STEPS
% Displacement
100
100
100
50
20*
100
50
24*
100
50
29*
100
50
32*
100
77
50
23
9*
100
73
50
23
11*
100
74
50
24
12*
100
75
50
25
14*
100
73
50
23
13*
100
75
50
25
16*

*Minimum Load Valve energized.

CAPACITY %
Circuit A
100
100

Circuit B
—
—

100

—

100

—

100

—

100

—

NOTE: These capacity steps may vary due to different capacity
staging sequences.

2 STARTS

DEADBAND EXAMPLE
47

46
45

LWT (F)

LWT (C)

44
43
42

41
0

200

400

600

TIME (SECONDS)

LEGEND
LWT — Leaving Water Temperature

800

1000
3 STARTS

STANDARD
DEADBAND
MODIFIED
DEADBAND

Fig. 13 — Deadband Multiplier

be added to the current fan stage. Fan On Set Point (F.ON)
equals Head Set Point (Set PointsHEADH.DP) except
after a fan stage increase when the Head Set Point is increased
by Fan Stage Delta (Set PointsHEADF.DLT). A fan
stage is decreased when the SCTs of both circuits are less than
the Fan Off Set Point (Set PointsHEAD F.OFF) for
two minutes. Table 20 shows the number of fan stages, contactors energized and the fans that are on during the fan stage.
Unit sizes 035 to 060 have common fan control. Figure 14
shows the location of each fan and compressor within the unit.
MOTORMASTER® V OPTION — Motormaster V is standard on 30RAP010 and 015 size units. For all other units that
need low-ambient operation, the lead fan on a circuit can be
equipped with the Motormaster V head pressure controller option or accessory. The controller is energized with the first fan
stage and adjusts fan speed to maintain a SCT of 72 F (22.2 C).
The first stage of fan operation is controlled by the Motormaster V controller. Refer to Fig. 15 for condenser fan layout information. The Motormaster is configured in the Motormaster Select (ConfigurationMMMMR.S)

Cooler Freeze Protection — The control will try to prevent
shutting the chiller down on a Cooler Freeze Protection alarm
by removing stages of capacity. If the cooler fluid selected
is Water, the freeze point is 34 F (1.1 C). If the cooler fluid
selected is Brine, the freeze point is the Brine Freeze Point (Set
PointsFRZBR.FZ). This alarm condition (A207) only
references leaving fluid temperature and NOT Brine Freeze
point. If the cooler leaving fluid temperature is less than the
freeze point plus 2.0° F (1.1° C), the control will immediately
remove one stage of capacity. This can be repeated once every
30 seconds.
Low Saturated Suction Protection — The control will try to
prevent shutting a circuit down due to low saturated suction
conditions by removing stages of capacity. These circuit alert
conditions (T116, T117) compare saturated suction temperature to the configured Brine Freeze Point (Set
PointsFRZBR.FZ). The Brine Freeze point is a userconfigurable value that must be left at 34 F (1.1 C) for 100%
water systems. A lower value may be entered for systems with
brine solutions, but this value should be set according to the
freeze protection level of the brine mixture. Failure to properly
set this brine freeze point value may permanently damage the
brazed plate heat exchanger. The control will initiate Mode 7
(Circuit A) or Mode 8 (Circuit B) to indicate a circuit’s capacity is limited and that eventually the circuit may shut down.

Operation of Machine Based on Control
Method and Cooling Set Point Selection Settings — Machine On/Off control is determined by the

configuration of the Control Method
(ConfigurationOPT2CTRL) and Cooling Set Point Select (ConfigurationSLCTCLSP) variables. All units are factory
configured with Cooling Set Point Select set to 0 (single set
point). With the control method set to 0, simply switching the
Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Enable or Remote
Contact position (external contacts closed) will put the chiller
in an occupied state. The control mode (Operating
ModesMODE) will be 1 (OFF LOCAL) when the switch is
Off and will be 5 (ON LOCAL) when in the Enable position or
Remote Contact position with external contacts closed.

Head Pressure Control — The main base board
(MBB) controls the condenser fans to maintain the lowest
condensing temperature possible, and thus the highest unit
efficiency. The MBB uses the saturated condensing temperature input from the discharge pressure transducer and outside
air temperature sensor to control the fans. If OAT is greater
than 70 F before a circuit is starting, then all condenser fan
stages will be energized. A fan stage is increased based on
SCT (saturated condensing temperature). When the highest
SCT is greater than the Fan On Set Point (Set
PointsHEADF.ON), then an additional stage of fan will
170
160
150
140
130
120
110

SCT (F)

100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
-30

-20

-10

SST (F)
LEGEND
SCT
SST

a30-4969

— Saturated Condensing Temperature
— Saturated Suction Temperature

Fig. 14 — Operating Envelope for R-410A Compressor
32

OFM1
CONTROL BOX

CONTROL BOX

a30-4970
OFM1

Top View
Sizes 018-030

OFM1

CONTROL BOX

Top View
Sizes 010,015

OFM2

OFM3
OFM2

Top View
Sizes 035-050

OFM1

OFM3

OFM2

OFM4

Top View
Sizes 055,060

Fig. 15 — 30RAP Condenser Fan Layout
Table 20 — Fan Stages
30RAP UNIT SIZE
010,015
018-030
035-050

055,060

FAN STAGES
Contactor Energized
—
FC1
FC1,2
FC1
FC2
FC1,2
FC3
FC1,3
FC3,2
FC1,2,3

Fan Stage
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 4

Fans Operating
OFM1
OFM1
OFM1,2
OFM3
OFM1,2
OFM1,2,3
OFM4
OFM4,3
OFM4,1,2
OFM1,2,3,4

the CHIL_S_S variable is ‘Stop.’ Similarly, the control mode
will be 6 when the CHIL_S_S variable is ‘Start.’
Table 20 illustrates how the control method and cooling set
point select variables direct the operation of the chiller and the
set point to which it controls. The illustration also shows the
ON/OFF state of the machine for the given combinations.

Two other control methods are available for Machine On/
Off control:
OCCUPANCY
SCHEDULE
(ConfigurationOPT2
CTRL = 2) — The main base board will use the operating
schedules as defined under the Time Clock mode in the scrolling marquee display. These schedules are identical. The schedule number must be set to 1 for local schedule.
The schedule number can be set anywhere from 65 to 99
for operation under a CCN global schedule. The Enable/Off/
Remote Contact must be in the Enable or Remote Contact position. The control mode (Operating ModesMODE) will be
1 when the switch is Off. The control mode will be 3 when the
Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch input is On and the time of
day is during an unoccupied period. Similarly, the control
mode will be 7 when the time of day is during an occupied
period.
CCN CONTROL (ConfigurationOPT2CTRL = 3) —
An external CCN device such as Chillervisor System Manager
controls the On/Off state of the machine. This CCN device
forces the variable ‘CHIL_S_S’ between Start/Stop to control
the chiller. The control mode (Operating ModesMODE)
will be 1 when the switch is Off. The control mode will be 2
when the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch input is On and

Cooling Set Point Select
SINGLE — Unit operation is based on Cooling Set Point 1
(Set PointsCOOLCSP.1).
DUAL SWITCH — Unit operation is based on Cooling Set
Point 1 (Set PointsCOOLCSP.1) when the Dual Set
Point switch contacts are open and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set
PointsCOOLCSP.2) when they are closed.
DUAL CCN OCCUPIED — Unit operation is based on
Cooling Set Point 1 (Set PointsCOOLCSP.1) during the
Occupied mode and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set
PointsCOOLCSP.2) during the Unoccupied mode as
configured under the local occupancy schedule accessible only
from CCN. Schedule Number in Table SCHEDOVR (See Appendix B) must be configured to 1. If the Schedule Number is
set to 0, the unit will operate in a continuous 24-hr Occupied
mode. Control method must be configured to 0 (switch). See
Table 21.
33

Table 21 — Control Methods and Cooling Set Points
CONTROL
TYPE
(CTRL)
0 (switch)
2 (Occupancy)
3 (CCN)

OCCUPANCY
STATE
Occupied
Unoccupied
Occupied
Unoccupied
Occupied
Unoccupied

0
(single)
ON,CSP1
ON,CSP1
ON,CSP1
OFF
ON,CSP1
ON,CSP1

COOLING SET POINT SELECT (CLSP)
1
2
(dual, switch)
(dual, occ)
ON*
ON,CSP1
ON*
ON,CSP2
ON*
Illegal
OFF
Illegal
ON*
ON,CSP1
ON*
ON,CSP2

3
(4 to 20 mA)
ON†
ON
ON†
OFF
ON†
ON†

*Dual set point switch input used. CSP1 used when switch input is open. CSP2 used when switch input is closed.
†Cooling set point determined from 4 to 20 mA input to energy management module (EMM) to terminals TB6-3,5.

under the COMP mode will stay on for 10 minutes if there is
no keypad activity. Compressors will stay on until they are
turned off by the operator. The Service Test mode will remain
enabled for as long as there is one or more compressors running. All safeties are monitored during this test and will turn a
compressor, circuit or the machine off if required. Any other
mode or sub-mode can be accessed, viewed, or changed during
the TEST mode. The MODE item (Run StatusVIEW) will
display “0” as long as the Service mode is enabled. The TEST
sub-mode value must be changed back to OFF before the chiller can be switched to Enable or Remote contact for normal
operation.

4 TO 20 mA INPUT — Unit operation is based on an external
4 to 20 mA signal input to the Energy Management Module
(EMM).

Low Sound Mode Operation — All models are factory configured with the Low Sound Mode disabled. In the
Configuration mode under sub-mode OPT2, items for Low
Sound Mode Select (ConfigurationOPT2LS.MD), Low
Sound Start Time (ConfigurationOPT2LS.ST), Low
Sound End Time (ConfigurationOPT2LS.ND) and Low
Sound Capacity Limit (ConfigurationOPT2LS.LT) are
factory configured so that the chiller always runs as quietly as
possible. This results in operation at increased saturated condensing temperature. As a result, some models may not be able
to achieve rated efficiency. For chiller operation at rated efficiency, disable the low sound mode or adjust the low sound
mode start and stop times accordingly or set both times to
00:00 for rated efficiency operation 24 hours per day. In addition, the low sound capacity limit can be used to reduce overall
chiller capacity, if required, by limiting the maximum to a userconfigured percentage.

Optional Factory-Installed Hydronic Package — If the chiller has factory-installed chilled fluid pumps,

specific steps should be followed for proper operation.
The pump(s) in the hydronic package come factory
pre-wired into the main unit power supply/starter. In order to
check proper pump rotation, use the Service Test function to
test the condenser fans and observe them for proper rotation. If
fans turn correctly, the pumps will rotate correctly. Clockwise
rotation of the pump motor cooling fans can also be used to determine that pumps are rotating correctly.

Heating Operation — The chiller can be used for pump

outputs or optional factory-installed hydronic system operation
can be utilized for heating applications. The heating mode is
activated when the control sees a field-supplied closed switch
input to terminal block LVT-19,20. The control locks out cooling when the heat relay input is seen. A field-supplied boiler relay connection is made using heat relay and alarm relay contacts. Factory-installed ‘BOILER’ connections exist in the control panel near LVT for these applications. Alarms and alerts
A189 through A202 are active during heating operation.

CAUTION
Operation of pump in wrong direction, even for a few
seconds, can cause irreversible damage to pump impeller
and housing. Always verify correct wiring/pump rotation
before operation.
Use Service Test function to test operation of pumps. Verify
that the flow switch input is made when the pump is running.
For dual pump hydronic systems, the control only uses one
pump at a time. Consult the Installation Instructions supplied
with this chiller and use the circuit setter balancing valve
installed in hydronic package to adjust fluid flow rate.
Cooler Pump Control — The AquaSnap® 30RAP machines equipped with a factory-installed pump package are
configured with the Cooler Pump Control (ConfigurationOPT1CPC) = ON.
Machines not equipped with a pump package are configured with the cooler pump control OFF. It is recommended that
the machine control the chilled water pump. If not, a 5-minute
time delay is required after the command to shut the machine
down is sent before the chilled water pump is turned off. This is
required to maintain water flow during the shutdown period of
the machine.
With or without this option enabled, the cooler pump relay
will be energized when the machine enters an ON status (i.e.,
On Local, On CCN, On Time). An A207 - Cooler Freeze
Protection Alarm, will energize the cooler pump relay also, as
an override. The cooler pump relay will remain energized if the
machine is in MODE 10 – Minimum Off Time.

Service Test (See Table 4) — Both main power and

control circuit power must be on.
The Service Test function should be used to verify proper
operation of condenser fan(s), compressors, minimum load
valve solenoid (if installed), cooler pump(s), EXVs, and remote alarm relay. To use the Service Test mode, the Enable/
Off/Remote Contact switch must be in the OFF position. Use
the display keys and Table 4 to enter the mode and display
TEST. Press ENTER twice so that OFF flashes. Enter the
password if required. Use either arrow key to change the TEST
value to the ON position and press ENTER . Press ESCAPE
and the
button to enter the OUTS or COMP sub-mode.
Test the condenser fans, cooler pump(s) and alarm relay by
changing the item values from OFF to ON. These discrete
outputs are then turned off if there is no keypad activity for
10 minutes. Use the arrow keys to select the desired percentage
when testing expansion valves and Motormaster® V controller.
When testing compressors, lead compressor must be started
first. All compressor outputs can be turned on, but the control
will limit the rate by staging one compressor per minute. Compressor unloaders and hot gas bypass relays/solenoids (if installed) can be tested with the compressors on or off. The relays
34

interlock contacts should be rated for dry circuit application
capable of handling 5 vdc at 2 mA.
SINGLE INTEGRAL PUMP CONTROL — With a single
pump, the following options must be configured:
• Cooler Pump Control (ConfigurationOPT1CPC) =
ON.
• Cooler Pump 1 Enable (ConfigurationOPT1
PM1E) = YES.
• Cooler Pump 2 Enable (ConfigurationOPT1
PM2E) = NO.
With a single integral pump, the Cooler Pump Starter will
be energized when the machine is occupied. As part of the
factory-installed package, an auxiliary set of contacts is wired
to the MBB to serve as Chilled Water Pump Interlock. When
the mechanical cooling is called for, the pump interlock and
flow switch is checked. If the circuits are closed, the machine
starts its capacity routine. If the auxiliary contact interlock does
not close within 25 seconds of the ON command, a T190 —
Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts Failed to Close at Start-Up Alert
will be generated and the pump shut down. The unit will not
be allowed to start. If the chilled water flow switch does not
close within one (1) minute, two alarms will be generated. A
T192 — Cooler Pump 1 Failed to Provide Flow at Start-Up
Alert and an A200 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Failed to Close at
Start-Up Alarm will be generated and chiller will not be allowed to start.
If the chilled water flow switch opens for at least 3 seconds
after initially being closed, a T196 — Flow Lost While Pump 1
Running Alert and an A201 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts
Opened During Normal Operation Alarm will be generated
and the machine will stop.
If the control detects the chilled water pump interlock open
for 25 seconds after
initially being closed, a T194 — Cooler
a30-4979
Pump 1 Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alert is
generated and the unit is shut down.
If the control detects the chilled water flow switch circuit
closed for at least 5 minutes with the pump output OFF, an
A202 — Cooler Pump Interlock Closed When Pump is Off
Alarm will be generated and the unit will not be allowed to
start.
If the control detects that the chilled water pump auxiliary
contacts are closed for at least 25 seconds while the pump is
OFF, a T198 — Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts Closed While
Pump Off Alert is generated. The chiller will not be allowed to
start.
If the control starts a pump and the wrong interlock circuit
closes for at least 20 seconds, an A189 — Cooler Pump and
Aux Contact Input Miswire Alarm will be generated. The unit
will be prevented from starting.
As part of a pump maintenance routine, the pump can be
started to maintain lubrication of the pump seal. To utilize this
function, Cooler Pmp Periodic Start (ConfigurationOPT1
PM.P.S) must be set to YES. This option is set to NO as the
factory default. With this feature enabled, if the pump is not operating, it will be started and operated for 2 seconds starting at
14:00 hours. If the pump is operating, this routine is skipped. If
the pump has failed and an Alarm/Alert condition is active, the
pump will not start that day.
DUAL INTEGRAL PUMP CONTROL — With a dual integral pump package, the following options must be configured:
• Cooler Pump Control (ConfigurationOPT1CPC) =
ON.
• Cooler Pump 1 Enable (ConfigurationOPT1
PM1E) = YES.
• Cooler Pump 2 Enable (ConfigurationOPT1
PM2E) = YES.
Pump Start Selection is a field-configurable choice. Cooler
Pump Select (ConfigurationOPT1PM.SL) is factory
defaulted to 0 (Automatic). This value can be changed to 1

Cooler Pump Sequence of Operation — At anytime the unit is in an ON status, as defined by the one of the
following conditions, the cooler pump relay will be enabled.
1. The Enable-Off-Remote Switch in ENABLE,
(CTRL=0).
2. Enable-Off-Remote Switch in REMOTE with a
Start-Stop remote contact closure (CTRL=0).
3. An Occupied Time Period from an Occupancy Schedule
in combination with items 1 or 2 (CTRL=2).
4. A CCN Start-Stop Command to Start in combination
with items 1 or 2 (CTRL=3).
As stated before, there are certain alarm conditions and
Operating Modes that will turn the cooler pump relay ON. This
sequence will describe the normal operation of the pump
control algorithm.
When the unit cycles from an “On” state to an “Off” state,
the cooler pump output will remain energized for the Cooler
Pump Shutdown Delay (ConfigurationOPT1PM.DY).
This is configurable from 0 to 10 minutes. The factory default
is 1 minute.
NO INTEGRAL PUMP — SINGLE EXTERNAL PUMP
CONTROL — With a single external pump, the following
options must be configured:
• Cooler Pump Control (ConfigurationOPT1CPC) =
OFF.
• Cooler Pump 1 Enable (ConfigurationOPT1
PM1E) = NO.
• Cooler Pump 2 Enable (ConfigurationOPT1
PM2E) = NO.
The maximum load allowed for the Chilled Water Pump
Starter is 5 VA sealed, 10 VA inrush at 24 volts. The starter coil
is powered from the chiller control system. The starter should
be wired between LVT-25 and LVT-21. If equipped, the fieldinstalled chilled water pump starter auxiliary contacts should
be connected in series with the chilled water flow switch.
The Cooler Pump Relay will be energized when the
machine is “On.” The chilled water pump interlock circuit
consists of a chilled water flow switch and a field-installed
chilled water pump interlock. If the chilled water pump interlock circuit does not close within five (5) minutes of starting,
an A200 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Failed to Close at Start-Up
Alarm will be generated and chiller will not be allowed to start.
If the chilled water pump interlock or chilled water flow
switch opens for at least three (3) seconds after initially being
closed, an A201 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts Opened
During Normal Operation Alarm will be generated and the machine will stop.
NO INTEGRAL PUMP — DUAL EXTERNAL PUMP
CONTROL — With two external pumps, the following
options must be configured:
• Cooler Pump Control (ConfigurationOPT1CPC) =
ON.
• Cooler Pump 1 Enable (ConfigurationOPT1
PM1E) = YES.
• Cooler Pump 2 Enable (ConfigurationOPT1
PM2E) = YES.
The maximum load allowed for the Chilled Water Pump
Starters is 5 VA sealed, 10 VA inrush at 24 volts. The starter
coil is powered from the chiller control system. The starter for
Chilled Water Pump 1 should be wired between LVT-25 and
LVT-21. The starter for Chilled Water Pump 2 should be wired
between LVT-24 and LVT-21. A field-installed chilled water
pump interlock for each pump must be connected to each
pump’s interlock points on the main base board. The chilled
water pump 1 interlock, CWP1, must be connected to MBBJ7-1 and –2. The chilled water pump 2 interlock, CWP2, must
be connected to MBB-J7-3 and –4. The chilled water pump
35

If the control starts a pump and the wrong interlock circuit
closes for at least 20 seconds, an A189 – Cooler Pump and Aux
Contact Input Miswire Alarm will be generated. The unit will
be prevented from starting.
The control will allow for pump changeover. Two methods
will change the pump sequence. Before the changeover can
occur, the unit must be at Capacity Stage 0. During changeover
the chilled water flow switch input is ignored for 10 seconds to
avoid a nuisance alarm.
With Cooler Pump Select (ConfigurationOPT1
PM.SL) set to 0 (Automatic) and when the differential time
limit Pump Changeover Hours (ConfigurationOPT1
PM.DT) is reached, the lead pump will be turned OFF. Approximately one (1) second later, the lag pump will start. Manual changeover can be accomplished by changing Rotate Cooler
Pump Now (ConfigurationOPT1ROT.P) to YES only if
the machine is at Capacity Stage 0 and the differential time limit
Pump Changeover Hours (PM.DT) is reached. If the PM.DT is
not satisfied, the changeover will not occur. With the machine at
Capacity Stage 0, the pumps would rotate automatically as part
of the normal routine.
With Cooler Pump Select (PM.SL) set to 1 (Pump 1 Starts
First) or 2 (Pump 2 Starts First), a manual changeover can be accomplished by changing PM.SL only. The machine RemoteOff-Enable Switch must be in the OFF position to change this
variable. The Rotate Cooler Pump Now (ROT.P) feature does
not work for these configuration options.
As part of a pump maintenance routine, the pumps can be
started to maintain lubrication to the pump seal. To utilize this
function, Cooler Pmp Periodic Start (ConfigurationOPT1
PM.PS) must be set to YES. This option is set to NO as the
factory default. If feature is enabled and the pump(s) are not
operating, then the pumps will be operated every other day for
2 seconds starting at 14:00 hours. If a pump has failed and has
an active Alert condition, it will not be started that day.

(Pump 1 Starts First) or 2 (Pump 2 Starts First). If PM.SL is 0
(Automatic), the pump selection is based on two criteria: the
alert status of a pump and the operational hours on the pump. If
a pump has an active Alert condition, it will not be considered
for the lead pump. The pump with the lowest operational hours
will be the lead pump. A pump is selected by the control to start
and continues to be the lead pump until the Pump Changeover
Hours (ConfigurationOPT1PM.DT) is reached. The
Lead Pump (Run StatusVIEWLD.PM) indicates the
pump that has been selected as the lead pump: 1 (Pump 1), 2
(Pump 2), 3 (No Pump). The Pump Changeover Hours is factory defaulted to 500 hours. Regardless of the Cooler Pump Selection, any pump that has an active alert will not be allowed to
start.
With the dual integral pump package, the Cooler Pump
Starter will be energized when the machine is in an occupied
period. As part of the factory-installed package, an auxiliary set
of contacts is wired to the MBB to serve as Chilled Water Pump
Interlock, one set for each pump to individual channels on the
MBB. With a call for mechanical cooling, the specific pump
interlock and flow switch are checked. If the circuits are closed,
the machine starts its capacity routine. If Pump 1 starts and the
auxiliary contact interlock does not close within 25 seconds of
the ON command, a T190 — Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts
Failed to Close at Start-Up Alert will be generated and the
pump shut down. The unit will not be allowed to start. If the
chilled water flow switch does not close within 1 minute, two
alarms will be generated. A T192 — Cooler Pump 1 Failed to
Provide Flow at Start-Up Alert and an A200 — Cooler Flow/
Interlock Failed to Close at Start-Up Alarm will be generated
and chiller will not be allowed to start. In either fault case listed
above, Pump 2 will be commanded to start once Pump 1 has
failed.
If Pump 2 starts and the auxiliary contact interlock does
not close within 25 seconds of the ON command, a T191 —
Cooler Pump 2 Aux Contacts Failed to Close at Start-Up Alert
will be generated and the pump shut down. The unit will not be
allowed to start. If the chilled water flow switch does not close
within one (1) minute, two alarms will be generated. A T193
— Cooler Pump 2 Failed to Provide Flow at Start-Up Alert and
an A200 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Failed to Close at Start-Up
Alarm will be generated and chiller will not be allowed to start.
In either fault case listed above, Pump 1 will be commanded to
start once Pump 2 has failed.
If the chilled water flow switch opens for at least 3 seconds
after initially being closed, a T196 — Flow Lost While Pump 1
Running Alert or T197 — Flow Lost While Pump 2 Running
Alert for the appropriate pump and an A201 — Cooler Flow/
Interlock Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alarm
will be generated and the machine will stop. If available, the
other pump will be started. If flow is proven, the machine will
be allowed to restart.
If the chilled water pump interlock opens for 25 seconds
after initially being closed is detected by the control, the appropriate T194 — Cooler Pump 1 Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alert or T195 — Cooler Pump 2 Contacts
Opened During Normal Operation Alert is generated and the
unit is shut down. If available, the other pump will be started. If
flow is proven, the machine will be allowed to restart.
If the control detects that the chilled water flow switch
circuit is closed for at least 5 minutes with the pump output
OFF, an A202 — Cooler Pump Interlock Closed When Pump
is Off Alarm will be generated and the unit will not be allowed
to start.
If the control detects that the chilled water pump auxiliary
contacts are closed for at least 25 seconds while the pump is
OFF, the appropriate T198 — Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts
Closed While Pump Off or Alert T199 — Cooler Pump 2 Aux
Contacts Closed While Pump Off Alert is generated. The
chiller will not be allowed to start.

Configuring and Operating Dual Chiller Control — The dual chiller routine is available for the control of

two units supplying chilled fluid on a common loop. This
control algorithm is designed for parallel fluid flow arrangement
only. One chiller must be configured as the master chiller, the
other as the slave. An additional leaving fluid temperature
thermistor (Dual Chiller LWT) must be installed as shown in
Fig. 16 and 17 and connected to the master chiller. Refer to Sensors section, page 20, for wiring. The CCN communication bus
must be connected between the two chillers. Connections can be
made to the CCN screw terminals on LVT. Refer to Carrier
Comfort Network® Interface section, page 19, for wiring information. Configuration examples are shown in Tables 22 and 23.
Refer to Table 22 for dual chiller configuration. In this
example the master chiller will be configured at address 1 and
the slave chiller at address 2. The master and slave chillers
must reside on the same CCN bus (ConfigurationCCN
CCNB) but cannot have the same CCN address (ConfigurationCCNCCNA). Both master and slave chillers must
have Lead/Lag Chiller Enable (ConfigurationRSET
LLEN) configured to ENBL. Master/Slave Select (ConfigurationRSET MSSL) must be configured to MAST for
the master chiller and SLVE for the slave. Also in this example,
the master chiller will be configured to use Lead/Lag Balance
Select (ConfigurationRSETLLBL) and Lead/Lag Balance Delta (ConfigurationRSETLLBD) to even out the
chiller run-times weekly. The Lag Start Delay (ConfigurationRSETLLDY) feature will be set to 10 minutes. This
will prevent the lag chiller from starting until the lead chiller
has been at 100% capacity for the length of the delay time. Parallel configuration (ConfigurationRSETPARA) can
only be configured to YES. The variables LLBL, LLBD and
LLDY are not used by the slave chiller.

Table 22 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Master Chiller Example)
SUB-MODE

ITEM

KEYPAD ENTRY

DISPLAY

ITEM EXPANSION

COMMENTS

ENTER

CTRL

CONTROL METHOD

ENTER

SWITCH

DEFAULT 0

ESCAPE

OPT2

CCN ADDRESS

DEFAULT 1

CCN BUS NUMBER

DEFAULT 0

DISP
UNIT
OPT1

OPT2

CTRL

CCN
CCNA

ENTER

1
CCNB

CCN
CCNB

ENTER

ESCAPE

CCN
PROCEED TO
SUBMODE RESET

RSET
ENTER

LLEN

MSSL

CRST

COOLING RESET TYPE

LLEN

LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE

15 ITEMS

ENTER

DSBL

SCROLLING STOPS

ENTER

DSBL

VALUE FLASHES

ENBL

SELECT ENBL

ENTER

ENBL

ESCAPE

LLEN

LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE

MSSL

MASTER /SLAVE SELECT

ENTER

MAST

MASTER /SLAVE SELECT

ESCAPE

MSSL

CHANGE ACCEPTED

DEFAULT MAST

RSET
SLVA
SLVA

SLVA

SLAVE ADDRESS

ENTER

SCROLLING STOPS

ENTER

VALUE FLASHES

SELECT 2

ENTER

ESCAPE

SLVA

SLAVE ADDRESS

LLBL
LLBL

CHANGE ACCEPTED

LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT

ENTER

SCROLLING STOPS

ENTER

VALUE FLASHES

SELECT 2 - Automatic

Table 22 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Master Chiller Example) (cont)
SUB-MODE

ITEM

KEYPAD ENTRY

DISPLAY

ITEM EXPANSION

COMMENTS

LLBL

ENTER

LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT

CHANGE ACCEPTED

ESCAPE

LLBL

LLBD

LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA

ENTER

168

LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA

ESCAPE

LLBD
LLDY

RSET

LLDY

PARA

DEFAULT 168

LAG START DELAY

ENTER

SCROLLING STOPS

ENTER

VALUE FLASHES

SELECT 10

ENTER

ESCAPE

LLDY

ESCAPE

RSET

ENTER

YES

LAG START DELAY

CHANGE ACCEPTED

MASTER COMPLETE

NOTES:
1. Master Control Method (CTRL) can be configured as 0-Switch, 2-Occupancy or 3-CCN.
2. Parallel Configuration (PARA) cannot be changed.

Dual chiller start/stop control is determined by configuration of Control Method (ConfigurationOPT1CTRL) of
the Master chiller. The Slave chiller should always be configured for CTRL=0 (Switch). If the chillers are to be controlled
by Remote Contacts, both Master and Slave chillers should be
enabled together. Two separate relays or one relay with
two sets of contacts may control the chillers. The Enable/Off/
Remote Contact switch should be in the Remote Contact
position on both the Master and Slave chillers. The Enable/Off/
Remote Contact switch should be in the Enable position for
CTRL=2 (Occupancy) or CTRL=3 (CCN Control).
Both chillers will stop if the Master chiller Enable/Off/
Remote Contact switch is in the Off position. If the Emergency
Stop switch is turned off or an alarm is generated on the Master
chiller the Slave chiller will operate in a Stand-Alone mode.
If the Emergency Stop switch is turned off or an alarm is
generated on the Slave chiller the Master chiller will operate in
a Stand-Alone mode.
The master chiller controls the slave chiller by changing its
Control Mode (Run StatusVIEWSTAT) and its operating setpoint or Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCT.PT).

RETURN
FLUID

MASTER
CHILLER
SLAVE
CHILLER

DIMENSIONS in. (mm)
A
B
3.10 (78.7)
1.55 (39.4)
4.10 (104.1)
1.28 (32.5)

PART
NUMBER
10HB50106801
10HB50106802
A

0.505/0.495
0.61
DIA

1/4 N.P.T.

6” MINIMUM
CLEARANCE FOR
THERMISTOR
REMOVAL

Fig. 17 — Dual Leaving Water Thermistor Well

Temperature Reset — The control system is capable of
handling leaving-fluid temperature reset based on return cooler
fluid temperature. Because the change in temperature through
the cooler is a measure of the building load, the return temperature reset is in effect an average building load reset method.
The control system is also capable of temperature reset based
on outdoor-air temperature (OAT), space temperature (SPT), or
from an externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal. Accessory sensors must be used for SPT reset (33ZCT55SPT). The energy
management module (EMM) must be used for temperature
reset using a 4 to 20 mA signal. See Tables 24 and 25.

THERMISTOR
WIRING*
LEAVING
FLUID

INSTALL DUAL CHILLER LWT
LEAVING FLUID TEMPERATURE
THERMISTOR (T10) HERE

*Depending on piping sizes, use either:
• HH79NZ014 sensor/10HB50106801 well (3-in. sensor/well)
• HH79NZ029 sensor/10HB50106802 well (4-in. sensor/well)

Fig. 16 — Dual Chiller Thermistor Location

Table 23 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Slave Chiller Example)
SUB-MODE

ITEM

KEYPAD ENTRY

DISPLAY

ITEM EXPANSION

COMMENTS

ENTER

CTRL

CONTROL METHOD

SWITCH

DEFAULT 0

CCN ADDRESS

SCROLLING STOPS

DISP
UNIT
OPT1

OPT2

CTRL
ESCAPE

OPT2
CCN
CCNA

CCNA

ENTER

VALUE FLASHES

SELECT 2
(SEE NOTE 1)

CCN
CCNA

CCNB

ENTER

ESCAPE

CCN

ENTER

ESCAPE

CCN

CCN ADDRESS

CHANGE ACCEPTED

CCN BUS NUMBER

DEFAULT 0
(SEE NOTE 2)

PROCEED TO
SUBMODE RSET

RSET
ENTER

LLEN

CRST

COOLING RESET TYPE

LLEN

LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE

15 ITEMS

ENTER

DSBL

SCROLLING STOPS

ENTER

DSBL

VALUE FLASHES

ENBL

SELECT ENBL

ENTER

ENBL

ESCAPE

LLEN

LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE

CHANGE ACCEPTED

RSET
MSSL
MSSL

MSSL

MASTER /SLAVE SELECT

ENTER

MAST

SCROLLING STOPS

ENTER

MAST

VALUE FLASHES

SLVE

SELECT SLVE

ENTER

SLVE

ESCAPE

MSSL

ESCAPE

RSET

MASTER /SLAVE SELECT

CHANGE ACCEPTED

SLAVE COMPLETE

NOTES:
1. Slave Control Method (CTRL) must be configured for 0.
2. Slave CCN Address (CCNA) must be different than Master.
3. Slave CCN Bus Number (CCNB) must be the same as Master
4. Slave does not require SLVA, LLBL, LLBD, or LLDY to be configured.

Table 24 — 4 to 20 mA Reset
SUB-MODE

DISPLAY

ITEM
EXPANSION

CRST

COOLING RESET
TYPE

MA.DG

5.0 F
(2.8 C)

DEGREES COOL
RESET

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

ENTER

RSET

COMMENT
0 = no reset
1 = 4 to 20 mA input
2 = Outdoor air temp
3 = Return Fluid
4 = Space Temperature
Default: 0° F (0° C) Reset at 20 mA
Range: –30 to 30 F (–16.7 to 16.7 C)

NOTE: The example above shows how to configure the chiller for 4 to 20 mA reset. No reset will
occur at 4.0 mA input, and a 5.0 F reset will occur at 20.0 mA. An EMM is required.

Table 25 — Menu Configuration of 4 to 20 mA Cooling Set Point Control
MODE
(RED LED)

KEYPAD SUB-MODE KEYPAD
ENTRY
ENTRY
ENTER

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM
EXPANSION

CLSP

COOLING SETPOINT SELECT

COMMENT

DISP
UNIT
OPT1
OPT2
HP.A
HP.B
EXV.A
EXV.B

CONFIGURATION
M.MST
RSET
DMDC
SLCT

ENTER

Scrolling Stops

ENTER

Flashing ‘0’

Select ‘4’

Change Accepted

ENTER

be configured for the type of reset desired. The variable
RM.NO should be set to the temperature that no reset should
occur. The variable RM.F should be set to the temperature that
maximum reset is to occur. The variable RM.DG should be set
to the maximum amount of reset desired. Figures 18 and 19 are
examples of outdoor air and space temperature resets.
To use return reset, four variables must be configured. In the
Configuration mode under the sub-mode RSET, items CRST,
RT.NO, RT.F and RT.DG must be properly set. See Table 26B
— Configuring Return Temperature Reset. This example provides 5.0 F (2.8 C) chilled water set point reset at 2.0 F (1.1 C)
cooler T and 0° F (0° C) reset at 10.0 F (5.6 C) cooler T. The
variable RT.NO should be set to the cooler temperature difference (T) where no chilled water temperature reset should occur. The variable RT.F should be set to the cooler temperature
difference where the maximum chilled water temperature reset
should occur. The variable RM.DG should be set to the maximum amount of reset desired.
To verify that reset is functioning correctly proceed to Run
Status mode, sub-mode VIEW, and subtract the active set point
(Run StatusVIEWSETP) from the control point (Run
StatusVIEWCTPT) to determine the degrees reset.

IMPORTANT: Care should be taken when interfacing with
other control systems due to possible power supply differences: full wave bridge versus half wave rectification. Connection of control devices with different power supplies
may result in permanent damage. ComfortLink™ controls
incorporate power supplies with half wave rectification. A
signal isolation device should be utilized if the signal generator incorporates a full wave bridge rectifier.
To use outdoor air or space temperature reset, four variables
must be configured. In the Configuration mode under the submode RSET, items (ConfigurationOPT1CRST), (ConfigurationOPT1RM.NO),
(ConfigurationOPT1
RM.F), and (ConfigurationOPT1RT.DG) must be
properly set. See Table 26A — Configuring Outdoor Air and
Space Temperature Reset. The outdoor air reset example provides 0° F (0° C) chilled water set point reset at 85.0 F (29.4 C)
outdoor-air temperature and 15.0 F (8.3 C) reset at 55.0 F
(12.8 C) outdoor-air temperature. The space temperature reset
example provides 0° F (0° C) chilled water set point reset at
72.0 F (22.2 C) space temperature and 6.0 F (3.3 C) reset at
68.0 F (20.0 C) space temperature. The variable CRST should
40

Table 26A — Configuring Outdoor Air and Space Temperature Reset
MODE
(RED LED)

KEYPAD
ENTRY

SUBMODE

ENTER

DISP

KEYPAD
ENTRY

DISPLAY

ITEM
EXPANSION

COMMENT

COOLING RESET
TYPE

2 = Outdoor-Air Temperature
4 = Space Temperature
(Connect to TB5-5,6)

85 °F

72 °F

REMOTE - NO
RESET TEMP

Default: 125.0 F (51.7 C)
Range: 0° to125 F

RM.F

55 °F

68 °F

REMOTE - FULL
RESET TEMP

Default: 0.0° F (-17.7 C)
Range: 0° to 125 F

RM.DG

15 °F

6 °F

REMOTE - DEGREES
RESET

ITEM

Outdoor
Air

Space

CRST

RM.NO*

UNIT
OPT1
OPT2
HP.A
HP.B
EXV.A
CONFIGURATION

EXV.B
M.MST
RSET

ENTER

Default: 0° F (0° C)
Range: –30 to 30 F
(–34.4 to -1.1 °C)

*4 items skipped in this example.

Table 26B — Configuring Return Temperature Reset
MODE
(RED LED)

KEYPAD
KEYPAD
SUB-MODE
ENTRY
ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM
EXPANSION

DISP

ENTER

TEST

ON/OFF

TEST DISPLAY LEDs

UNIT

ENTER

TYPE

UNIT TYPE

OPT1

ENTER

FLUD

COOLER FLUID

OPT2

ENTER

CTRL

CONTROL METHOD

ENTER

COMMENT

HP.A
HP.B
EXV.A
CONFIGURATION

EXV.B
M.MST

RSET

ENTER

0 = No Reset
1 = 4 to 20 mA Input (EMM required)
(Connect to EMM TB6-2,3)
COOLING RESET TYPE 2 = Outdoor-Air Temperature
3 = Return Fluid
4 = Space Temperature
(Connect to TB5-5,6)

CRST

RT.NO*

10.0 F

RETURN FLUID - NO
RESET TEMP

Default: 10.0 F (5.6 C)
Range: 0° to10 F COOLER T

RT.F

0.0 F

RETURN FLUID - FULL
RESET TEMP

Default: 0 F (–17.8 C)
Range: 0° to 30 F COOLER T

RT.DG

10.0 F

RETURN - DEGREES
RESET

*4 items skipped in this example.

Default: 0 F (0 C)
Range: –30 to 30°F (–16.7 to 16.7 C)

Under normal operation, the chiller will maintain a constant
leaving fluid temperature approximately equal to the chilled
fluid set point. As the cooler load varies, the entering cooler
fluid will change in proportion to the load as shown in Fig. 20.
Usually the chiller size and leaving-fluid temperature set point
are selected based on a full-load condition. At part load, the fluid temperature set point may be colder than required. If the
leaving fluid temperature was allowed to increase at part load,
the efficiency of the machine would increase.
Return temperature reset allows for the leaving temperature
set point to be reset upward as a function of the return fluid
temperature or, in effect, the building load.

Demand Limit — Demand limit is a feature that allows

the unit capacity to be limited during periods of peak energy usage. There are 3 types of demand limiting that can be configured. The first type is through 2-stage switch control, which will
reduce the maximum capacity to 2 user-configurable percentages. The second type is by 4 to 20 mA signal input which will reduce the maximum capacity linearly between 100% at a 4 mA
input signal (no reduction) down to the user-configurable level
at a 20 mA input signal. The third type uses the CCN Loadshed
module and has the ability to limit the current operating capacity to maximum and further reduce the capacity if required.
NOTE: The 2-stage switch control and 4 to 20-mA input signal types of demand limiting require the energy management
module (EMM).

LEGEND
EWT
LWT

— Entering Water (Fluid) Temperature
— Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature

Fig. 20 — Standard Chilled Fluid
Temperature Control — No Reset
To use demand limit, select the type of demand limiting to
use. Then configure the demand limit set points based on the
type selected.
DEMAND LIMIT (2-Stage Switch Controlled) — To configure demand limit for 2-stage switch control set the Demand
Limit Select (ConfigurationRSETDMDC) to 1. Then
configure the 2 Demand Limit Switch points (ConfigurationRSETDLS1) and (ConfigurationRSETDLS2)
to the desired capacity limit. See Table 27. Capacity steps are
controlled by 2 relay switch inputs field wired to TB6 as shown
in Fig. 6 and 7.
For demand limit by 2-stage switch control, closing the first
stage demand limit contact will put the unit on the first demand
limit level. The unit will not exceed the percentage of capacity
entered as Demand Limit Switch 1 set point (DLS1). Closing
contacts on the second demand limit switch prevents the unit
from exceeding the capacity entered as Demand Limit Switch
2 set point. The demand limit stage that is set to the lowest demand takes priority if both demand limit inputs are closed. If
the demand limit percentage does not match unit staging, the
unit will limit capacity to the closest capacity stage.
To disable demand limit configure DMDC to 0. See
Table 27.
EXTERNALLY POWERED DEMAND LIMIT (4 to
20 mA Controlled) — To configure demand limit for 4 to 20
mA control set the Demand Limit Select (ConfigurationRSETDMDC) to 2. Then configure the Demand
Limit at 20 mA (ConfigurationRSETDM20) to the
maximum loadshed value desired. Connect the output from an
externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal to terminal block TB6,
terminals 1 and 5. Refer to the unit wiring diagram for these
connections to the optional/accessory energy management
module and terminal block. The control will reduce allowable
capacity to this level for the 20 mA signal. See Table 27 and
Fig. 21.

LEGEND
LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature

Fig. 18 — Outdoor-Air Temperature Reset

CAUTION
Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufacturer’s control systems, due to possible power supply
differences, full wave bridge versus half wave rectification.
The two different power supplies cannot be mixed.
ComfortLink™ controls use half wave rectification. A signal isolation device should be utilized if a full wave bridge
signal generating device is used.

LEGEND
LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature

Fig. 19 — Space Temperature Reset

length of time that a loadshed condition is allowed to exist. The
control will disable the Redline/Loadshed command if no
Cancel command has been received within the configured
maximum loadshed time limit.

DEMAND LIMIT (CCN Loadshed Controlled) — To configure Demand Limit for CCN Loadshed control set the Demand Limit Select (ConfigurationRSETDMDC) to 3.
Then configure the Loadshed Group Number (ConfigurationRSETSHNM), Loadshed Demand Delta (ConfigurationRSETSHDL), and Maximum Loadshed Time
(ConfigurationRSETSHTM). See Table 27.
The Loadshed Group number is established by the CCN
system designer. The ComfortLink controls will respond to a
Redline command from the Loadshed control. When the
Redline command is received, the current stage of capacity is
set to the maximum stages available. Should the loadshed control send a Loadshed command, the ComfortLink controls will
reduce the current stages by the value entered for Loadshed
Demand delta. The Maximum Loadshed Time is the maximum

Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA) — A field supplied

and generated, externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal can be
used to provide the leaving fluid temperature set point. Connect
the signal to LVT7,8 (+,–). See Table 27 for instructions to
enable the function. Figure 22 shows how the 4 to 20 mA signal is linearly calculated on an overall 10 F to 80 F range for
fluid types (ConfigurationOPT1FLUD) 1 or 2. The set
point will be limited by the fluid (FLUD) type. Be sure that the
chilled water loop is protected at the lowest temperature.

MAX. ALLOWABLE LOAD (%)

100

50% CAPACITY AT 20 mA

80
60
40 100% CAPACITY AT 4 mA
75% CAPACITY AT 12 mA
20

12
8
10
14
DEMAND LIMIT SIGNAL – 4 - 20 mA INPUT

Fig. 21 — 4 to 20-mA Demand Limiting

100
(38)
90
(32)
80
(27)

SET POINT, F (C)

70
(21)

MAXIMUM
SET POINT
70 F (21.1 C)

60
(15)
50
(10)
40
(4.4)
(FLUD = 1) MINIMUM
SET POINT 38 F (3.3 C)

30
(-1)
20
(-7)
(FLUD = 2) MINIMUM
SET POINT 14 F (-10 C)

10
(-12)
0
(-17)
4

6.3

8.6

10.9

13.1

4 TO 20 mA SIGNAL TO EMM

EMM — Energy Management Module

Fig. 22 — Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA)

15.4

17.7

Table 27 — Configuring Demand Limit
MODE
CONFIGURATION

KEYPAD
ENTRY

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM EXPANSION

ENTER

DISP

ENTER

TEST

ON/OFF

Test Display LEDs

UNIT

ENTER

TYPE

Unit Type

OPT1

ENTER

FLUD

Cooler Fluid

OPT2

ENTER

CTRL

Control Method

ENTER

CRST

Cooling Reset Type

COMMENT

HP.A
HP.B
EXV.A
EXV.B
M.MST
RSET

Default: 0
0 = None
1 = Switch
2 = 4 to 20 mA Input
3 = CCN Loadshed

DMDC*

Demand Limit Select

DM20

XXX %

Demand Limit at 20 mA

Default: 100%
Range: 0 to 100

SHNM

XXX

Loadshed Group
Number

Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99

SHDL

XXX%

Loadshed Demand
Delta

Default: 0%
Range: 0 to 60%

SHTM

XXX MIN

Maximum Loadshed
Time

Default: 60 min.
Range: 0 to 120 min.

DLS1

XXX %

Demand Limit
Switch 1

Default: 80%
Range: 0 to 100%

DLS2

XXX %

Demand Limit
Switch 2

Default: 50%
Range: 0 to 100%

*Seven items skipped in this example.

(DTT) is installed along with the AUX board for control of the
DUS.
DIGITAL COMPRESSOR CONFIGURATION — When a
digital compressor is installed, the configuration parameter
(ConfigurationUNITA1TY) is configured to YES.
There is also a maximum unload time configuration, (ConfigurationUNITMAX.T) that is set to 7 seconds, which indicates the maximum unloading for the digital compressor is
47%. This is done to optimize efficiency of the system.

Digital Scroll Option — The 30RAP units have a
factory-installed option for a digital scroll compressor which
provides additional stages of unloading for the unit. The digital
compressor is always installed in the A1 compressor location.
When a digital compressor is installed, a digital unloader solenoid (DUS) is used on the digital compressor.
DIGITAL SCROLL OPERATION — A digital scroll operates in two stages - the "loaded state" when the solenoid valve
is normally closed and the "unloaded state" when the solenoid
valve is open. During the loaded state, the compressor operates
like a standard scroll and delivers full capacity and mass flow.
However, during the unloaded state, there is no capacity
and no mass flow through the compressor. The capacity of the
system is varied by varying the time the compressor operates
in an unloaded and loaded state during a 15-second period. If
the DUS is energized for 7 seconds, the compressor will be
operating at 47% capacity. If the DUS is energized for 10 seconds, the compressor will be operating at approximately 33%
of its capacity. Capacity is the time averaged summation of
loaded and unloaded states, and its range is continuous from
the minimum configured capacity to 100%. Regardless of
capacity, the compressor always rotates with constant speed.
As the compressor transitions from a loaded to unloaded state,
the discharge and suction pressures will fluctuate and the compressor sound will change.
The ComfortLink controller controls and integrates the operation of the DUS into the compressor staging routine to
maintain temperature control. When a digital compressor is installed, an additional discharge gas temperature thermistor

PRE-START-UP
IMPORTANT: Before beginning Pre-Start-Up or Start-Up,
complete Start-Up Checklist for 30RAP Liquid Chiller at
end of this publication (pages CL-1 to CL-10). The checklist assures proper start-up of a unit, and provides a record
of unit condition, application requirements, system information, and operation at initial start-up.
Do not attempt to start the chiller until following checks
have been completed.

System Check
1. Check all auxiliary components, such as chilled fluid
pumps, air-handling equipment, or other equipment to
which the chiller supplies liquid. Consult manufacturer's
instructions. Verify that any pump interlock contacts have
been properly installed. If the unit If the unit has
field-installed accessories, be sure all are properly installed and wired correctly. Refer to unit wiring diagrams.
44

2. Use the scrolling marquee display to adjust the Cooling
Set Point.
3. Fill chilled fluid circuit with clean water (with recommended inhibitor added) or other non-corrosive fluid to
be cooled. Bleed all air out of the high points of the system. If chilled water is to be maintained at a temperature
below 40 F (4.4 C) or outdoor temperatures are expected
to be below 32 F (0° C), a brine of sufficient concentration must be used to prevent freeze-up at anticipated
suction temperatures. See Table 28.
4. Check tightness of all electrical connections.
5. Oil should be visible in the compressor sightglass(es).
See Fig. 23. An acceptable oil level in the compressors is
from 1/8 to 3/8 of sight glass. Adjust the oil level as required. See Oil Charge section on page 50 for Carrier approved oils.
6. Electrical power source must agree with unit nameplate.
7. All condenser fan and factory installed hydronic package
pump motors are three phase. Check for proper rotation
of condenser fans first BEFORE attempting to start
pumps or compressors. To reverse rotation, interchange
any two of the main incoming power leads.
8. Be sure system is fully charged with refrigerant (see
Check Refrigerant Charge section on this page).
9. If unit is a brine unit, check to ensure proper brine concentration is used to prevent freezing.
10. Verify proper operation of cooler and hydronic package
heaters (if installed). Heaters operate at the same voltage
as the main incoming power supply and are single phase.
Heater current is approximately 0.4 amps for 460 and
575 v units. Heater current is approximately 0.8 amps for
230 v units.

START-UP AND OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to Start-Up Checklist on pages CL-1 to CL-10.

Actual Start-Up — Actual start-up should be done only
under supervision of a qualified refrigeration mechanic.
1. Be sure all service valves are open.
2. Using the scrolling marquee display, set leaving-fluid set
point (Set PointsCOOLCSP.1). No cooling range
adjustment is necessary.
3. Start chilled fluid pump (if not configured for cooler
pump control).
4. Turn ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch to
ENABLE position.
5. Allow unit to operate and confirm that everything is functioning properly. Check to see that leaving fluid temperature agrees with leaving set point (Set PointsCOOL
CSP.1) or (Set PointsCOOLCSP.2), or if reset is
used, with the control point (Run StatusVIEW
CTPT).
6. Check the cooler leaving chilled water temperature to see
that it remains well above 32 F (0° C), or the brine freezing point if the unit is a medium temperature brine unit.
7. Recheck compressor oil level (see Oil Charge section).
Check Refrigerant Charge — All 30RAP units are

shipped with a complete operating charge of R-410A and
should be under sufficient pressure to conduct a leak test after
installation. If there is no system pressure, admit nitrogen until
a pressure is observed and then proceed to test for leaks. After
leaks are repaired, the system must be dehydrated.
All refrigerant charging should be done through the ¼-in.
Schraeder connection on the liquid line. Do NOT add refrigerant charge through the low-pressure side of the system. If complete charging is required, weigh in the appropriate charge for
the circuit as shown on the unit nameplate. If partial charging is
required, operate circuit at full load and use an accurate temperature sensor on the liquid line as it enters the EXV. Use the
Temperatures mode on the scrolling marquee display to show
the circuit saturated condensing temperature (TemperaturesCIR.ASCT.A)
or
(TemperaturesCIR.B
SCT.B). Charging is most accurate at saturated discharge
temperatures of 120 to 125 F (49 to 52 C). Block condenser airflow as required to reach this temperature range. Add refrigerant until the system subcooling (SCT.A or SCT.B minus liquid
line temperature entering EXV) is approximately 15 to 17 F
(–9.4 to –8.3 C). Refrigerant VAPOR only may be added to a
circuit through the 1/4-in. suction Schraeder connection on the
suction line.

a30-4978

OIL SIGHTGLASS

Fig. 23 — Sight Glass Location
Table 28 — Minimum Cooler Flow Rates and Minimum Loop Volume
30RAP
SIZE
010
015
018
020
025
030
035
040
045
050
055
060

MINIMUM COOLER FLOW
RATE (gpm)
13
17
20
23
28
33
41
47
53
57
63
68

MAXIMUM COOLER FLOW
RATE (gpm)
50
66
78
91
112
133
164
186
209
228
251
270

MINIMUM COOLER FLOW
RATE (l/s)
0.8
1.1
1.3
1.5
1.8
2.1
2.6
3.0
3.3
3.6
4.0
4.3

MAXIMUM COOLER FLOW
RATE (l/s)
3.2
4.2
4.9
5.7
7.1
8.4
10.3
11.7
13.2
14.4
15.8
17.0

Unbalanced 3-Phase Supply Voltage — Never operate a motor
where a phase imbalance between phases is greater than 2%.
To determine percent voltage imbalance:
max voltage deviation
from avg voltage
% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x
average voltage
The maximum voltage deviation is the largest difference
between a voltage measurement across 2 legs and the average
across all 3 legs.
Example: Supply voltage is 240-3-60.
AB = 243 v
BC = 236 v
AC = 238 v

CAUTION
Never charge liquid into low-pressure side of system. Do
not overcharge. Overcharging results in higher discharge
pressure, possible compressor damage, and higher power
consumption. During charging or removal of refrigerant, be
sure water is continuously circulating through the cooler to
prevent freezing.

Operating Limitations
TEMPERATURES (See Table 29 for 30RAP standard temperature limits).

CAUTION
1. Determine average voltage:

Do not operate with cooler leaving chiller water (fluid)
temperature (LCWT) below 40 F (4.4 C) for the standard
units, or below 15 F (–9.4 C) for units factory built for
medium temperature brine.

Average voltage =
=

High Cooler Leaving Chilled Water (Fluid) Temperatures
(LCWT) — During start-up with cooler LCWT above approximately 60 F (16 C), the unit expansion valve will limit suction
pressure to approximately 90 psig (620 kPa) to avoid overloading the compressor.
Low Cooler LCWT — For standard units, the LCWT must be
no lower than 40 F (4.4 C). If the unit is the factory-installed
optional medium temperature brine unit, the cooler LCWT can
go down to 15 F (–9.4 C).

010-030
F
C

717
3

= 239
2. Determine maximum deviation from average voltage:
(AB) 243 – 239 = 4 v
(BC) 239 – 236 = 3 v
(AC) 239 – 238 = 1 v
Maximum deviation is 4 v.
3. Determine percent voltage imbalance:

Table 29 — Temperature Limits for
Standard 30RAP Units
UNIT SIZE 30RA
Temperature
Maximum Ambient
Temperature
Minimum Ambient
Temperature
Maximum Cooler EWT*
Maximum Cooler LWT
Minimum Cooler LWT†

243 + 236 + 238
3

% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x
= 1.7%

035-060
F
C

120

95
70
40

35
21
4.4

95
70
40

35
21
4.4

4
239

This voltage imbalance is satisfactory as it is below the
maximum allowable of 2%.
IMPORTANT: If the supply voltage phase imbalance is
more than 2%, contact your local electric utility company
immediately. Do not operate unit until imbalance condition
is corrected.

LEGEND

Control Circuit Power — Power for the control circuit is
supplied from the main incoming power through a factoryinstalled control power transformer (TRAN1) for all models.
Field wiring connections are made to the LVT.

EWT — Entering Fluid (Water) Temperature
LWT — Leaving Fluid (Water) Temperature

*For sustained operation, EWT should not exceed 85 F (29.4 C).
†Unit requires modification below this temperature.

LOW-AMBIENT OPERATION — If operating temperatures
below 45 F (7 C) on size 018-030 units, and 32 F (0° C) on size
035-060 units are expected, accessory Motormaster® V control must be installed. Operating temperatures can go as low as
–20 F (–29 C) on size 010 and 015 units, as standard. Installation of wind baffles is also required. Refer to separate installation instructions for operation using this accessory. Contact
your Carrier representative for details.

OPERATION SEQUENCE
During unit off cycle, the control monitors the outdoor air
temperature. If the ambient temperature drops below 40 F
(4.4 C), cooler and hydronic system heaters (if either are factory installed) are energized. If power is maintained to the chiller
and the EMERGENCY ON/OFF switch is left in the OFF position, these heaters are also energized.
The unit is started by putting the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE
CONTACT switch in the ENABLE or REMOTE CONTACT
position. When the unit receives a call for cooling (either from
the internal control or CCN network command or remote contact closure), the unit stages up in capacity to maintain the leaving fluid set point. The first compressor starts 11/2 to 3 minutes
after the call for cooling.
The lead circuit can be specifically designated on all models
or selected based on compressor run hours and starts depending on field configuration. The unit control will override this
selection under certain starting conditions to properly maintain
oil return to the compressors. In general, on dual compressor

CAUTION
Brine duty application (below 40 F [4.4 C] LCWT) for
chiller normally requires factory modification. Contact
your Carrier representative for applicable LCWT range for
standard water-cooled chiller in a specific application.
VOLTAGE — ALL UNITS
Main Power Supply — Minimum and maximum acceptable
supply voltages are listed in the Installation Instructions.
46

determines the saturated temperature of suction gas. The difference between the temperature of the superheated gas and the
saturated suction temperature is the superheat. The EXV board
controls the position of the electronic expansion valve stepper
motor to maintain superheat set point.
The MBB controls the superheat leaving cooler to approximately 9° F (5° C). Because EXV status is communicated to
the main base board (MBB) and is controlled by the EXV
boards, it is possible to track the valve position. The unit is then
protected against loss of charge and a faulty valve. Just prior to
compressor start, the EXV will open. At low ambient temperatures the EXV is closed at start up. After initialization period,
valve position is tracked by the EXV board by constantly monitoring the amount of valve movement.
The EXV is also used to limit cooler saturated suction temperature to 50 F (10 C). This makes it possible for the chiller to
start at higher cooler fluid temperatures without overloading
the compressor. This is commonly referred to as MOP (maximum operating pressure). At ambient temperatures above
110 F, MOP is bypassed at start-up to prevent charge backup in
the condenser.
If it appears that the EXV module is not properly controlling circuit operation to maintain correct superheat, there are a
number of checks that can be made using test functions and
initialization features built into the microprocessor control. See
the EXV Troubleshooting Procedure section to test EXVs.

circuits, the control will most often start the A1 or B1 compressor first, especially after long off periods. The MBB controls
fan stages to maintain the head pressure set point and will automatically adjust unit capacity as required to keep compressors
from operating outside of the specified envelope. There are no
pumpout or pumpdown sequences on these chillers.
For all units, if temperature reset is being used, the unit controls to a higher leaving-fluid temperature as the building load
reduces. If demand limit is used, the unit may temporarily be
unable to maintain the desired leaving-fluid temperature because of imposed power limitations.

SERVICE
WARNING
Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut
off all power to this equipment during service. There may
be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all disconnect
locations to alert others not to restore power until work is
completed.

Electronic Components
CONTROL COMPONENTS — Unit uses an advanced electronic control system that normally does not require service.
For details on controls refer to Operating Data section.
Access to the compressors is through latched panels from
beneath the control box on all models or from opposite the coil
side (sizes 010-030 only). The front door(s) provide access to
the compressor(s) and all components of the refrigeration system. For size 010-030 units, access to the controls is through
the upper latched outer door above the compressor access door.
Similarly, the upper center latched door on sizes 035-060 gives
access to the controls. Inner panels are secured in place and
should not be removed unless all power to the chiller is off.

EXV Troubleshooting Procedure — Follow steps
below to diagnose and correct EXV/economizer problems.
Check EXV motor operation first. Switch the Enable/Off/
Remote Contact (EOR) switch to the Off position. Press ESCAPE
on the Navigator™ display until ‘Select a menu item’ appears
on the display. Use the arrow keys to select the Service Test
mode. Press ENTER . The display will be:
> TEST
OFF
OUTS
COMP

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) — See Fig. 24

for a cutaway view of the EXV. High-pressure liquid refrigerant enters valve through the top. As refrigerant passes through
the orifice, pressure drops and refrigerant changes to a 2-phase
condition (liquid and vapor). The electronic expansion valve
operates through an electronically controlled activation of a
stepper motor. The stepper motor stays in position, unless
power pulses initiate the two discrete sets of motor stator windings for rotation in either direction. The direction depends on
the phase relationship of the power pulses.
The motor directly operates the spindle, which has rotating
movements that are transformed into linear motion by the
transmission in the cage assembly. The valve includes a positive shut-off when closed.
There are two different EXVs. See Table 30 for number of
steps. The EXV motor moves at 200 steps per second. Commanding the valve to either 0% or 100% will add extra steps to
the move, to ensure the value is open or closed completely.

Press ENTER (password entry may be required) and use
to change ‘OFF’ to ‘ON’. Switch the EOR switch to
Enable. The Service Test mode is now enabled. Move the
pointer down to the OUTS sub-mode and press ENTER . Move the
pointer to item EXV.A or EXV.B as needed. Press ENTER and
the valve position will flash. Use
to select 100% valve
position (hold
for quick movement) and press ENTER .
The technician should be able to feel the actuator moving by
placing a hand on the EXV. A sight glass is located on the valve
body to verify that the sleeve is moving to expose/cover slots in
the orifice. A hard knocking should be felt from the actuator
when it reaches the top of its stroke (can be heard if surroundings are relatively quiet). Press ENTER again twice if necessary to
confirm this. To close the valve, press ENTER , select 0% with
and press ENTER . The actuator should knock when it reaches
the bottom of its stroke. If it is believed that the valve is not
working properly, continue with the checkout procedure
below:

Table 30 — EXV Steps
UNIT SIZE 30RAP
010-020
025,030
035-045
050-060

EXV STEPS
1596
2500
1596
2500

Check the EXV output signals at appropriate terminals on
the EXV module (see Fig. 25). Connect positive test lead to red
wire (EXV-J6 terminal 3 for Circuit A, EXV-J7 terminal 3 for
Circuit B). Set meter to approximately 20 vdc. Using the
Service Test procedure above, move the valve output under test
to 100%. DO NOT short meter leads together or pin 3 to any
other pin as board damage will occur.

The EXV board controls the valve. Each circuit has a
thermistor located in a well in the suction manifold before the
compressor. Suction pressure as measured by the suction pressure transducer is converted to a saturated suction temperature.
The thermistor measures the temperature of the superheated
gas entering the compressor and the pressure transducer
47

INCLUDED IN CABLE KIT

CABLE

CABLE RETAINER

MOTOR AND
ADAPTER
ASSEMBLY

MOTOR ADAPTER
ASSEMBLY

CABLE
RETAINER

GASKET
MOTOR ADAPTER
ASSEMBLY

SIGHTGLASS
SPORLAN

FLOW
DIRECTION

NORMAL
FLOW
DIRECTION

a30-4971

Fig. 24 — Electronic Expansion Valve Details
During the next several seconds, carefully connect the negative test lead to pins 1,2,4 and 5 in succession (plug J6 for Circuit A, plug J7 for Circuit B). Digital voltmeters will average
this signal and display approximately 6 vdc. If it remains constant at a voltage other than 6 VDC or shows 0 volts, remove
the connector to the valve and recheck.

FIELD SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS — The EXV valves
on sizes 025, 030, 050-060 can be serviced. The EXV valves
on all other sizes are hermetic and cannot be disassembled for
installation or during service, however, the cable and retainer
may be replaced if necessary. Motor kits for the EXV valve are
available as replacement parts.
To remove the valve from the system, perform the following procedure:
1. Be sure the refrigerant has been recovered from the
circuit.
2. Disconnect the line voltage to the valve controller. Disconnect the valve wires from the controller.
3. If the motor fails to operate properly, check the resistance
of each motor phase. Resistance between black and white
leads or between the red and green leads should be approximately 100 ohms. Differences of more than 10% between phases indicate a defective motor. Resistance between black and red, or any lead and piping, should be infinite or “open”. Any resistance reading will indicate a
shorted winding and the valve will need to be replaced.
4. The output of the controller to the valve can be tested
with the following procedure:
a. Disconnect supply voltage to the controller.

Press ENTER and select 0% to close the valve. Check the 4 position DIP switch on the board (all switches should be set to
On). If a problem still exists, replace the EXV module. If the
reading is correct, the expansion valve and EXV wiring should
be checked. Check the EXV terminal strip and interconnecting
wiring.
1. Check color coding and wire connections. Make sure
they are connected to the correct terminals at the EXV
driver and EXV plug and that the cables are not crossed.
2. Check for continuity and tight connection at all pin
terminals.
3. Check the resistance of the EXV motor windings. Remove the EXV module plug (J6 for Circuit A, J7 for Circuit B) and check the resistance of the two windings between pins 1 and 2 for one winding and pins 4 and 5 for
the other winding (see Fig. 25). The resistance should be
100 ohms ± 10 ohms.
48

CAUTION
BLK
WHT

If the existing motor has been removed for inspection or
cleaning, be sure that the piston is fully retracted into the
motor assembly before installation on the valve. Failure to
do so will permanently damage the drive and motor.
Replacement motor assemblies are shipped in the retracted
position and may be installed as received.

GRN
RED

Compressor Replacement (Refer to Fig. 26
and 27) — All models contain scroll compressors and have

from one to four compressors. The size 010-030 units are a single refrigeration circuit while sizes 035-060 are dual circuit. A
compressor is most easily removed from the front of the unit,
depending on where clearance space was allowed during unit
installation.
Remove the junction box cover bolts and disconnect the
compressor power and ground connections. Remove the cable
from the compressor junction box. Remove the connections
from the high-pressure switch. Knock the same holes out of the
new compressor junction box and install the cable connectors
from the old compressor.
The compressors are bolted to rails, which are in turn bolted
to the unit basepan for all sizes except 010 and 015 which are
directly bolted to the basepan. Remove the 4 bolts holding the
compressor to the rail on the basepan. Save the mounting hardware for use with the new compressor. Carefully cut the compressor suction and discharge lines with a tubing cutter as close
to the compressor as feasible. Remove high-pressure switch
and pressure transducer(s) if required for compressor removal.
Lift one corner of the compressor at a time and remove all the
rubber mounting grommets (single compressor circuits) or
steel spacers (dual compressor circuits). Remove the old compressor from the unit.
Slide the new compressor in place on the basepan. Lifting
one side of the compressor at a time, replace all of the compressor mounting grommets. Using new tubing as required, reconnect compressor suction and discharge lines. Using hardware
saved, reinstall the mounting bolts and washers through the
compressor feet. Using proper techniques, braze suction and
discharge lines and check for leaks. Reconnect oil equalization
line on dual compressor circuit models.
Reconnect the compressor power connections and highpressure switch wiring as on the old compressor. Refer to
Fig. 26 and 27. Following the installation of the new compressor, tighten all hardware to the following specifications. (See
Table 31.)

BLK
WHT
GRN
RED
a30-4972
Fig. 25 — EXV Cable Connections to EXV Module
b. Place a digital voltmeter, on 20-volt AC scale,
across the black and white terminals on the controller. Restore power to the controller. For at least
7 seconds, the voltmeter should read approximately 12 to 14 volts. Significant differences mean
the controller is defective or not properly configured for the EXV valve.
c. Repeat the procedure in Step b above using the red
and green terminals on the controller. If the controller responds properly, then the wiring may be
damaged or the valve may be plugged with debris
or otherwise obstructed.
d. The EXV valves on sizes 025, 030, 050-060 may
be disassembled for cleaning, inspection or motor
assembly replacement.
VALVE REPLACEMENT — The valve may be replaced by
unsoldering or cutting the piping. A tubing cutter must be used
to prevent creating contaminants in the piping.
VALVE REASSEMBLY — Perform the following procedure
to reassemble the EXV valve:
1. Use Service Test to open the EXV to 100%. This will retract the white polyester driver/piston fully into the driver
guide. Remove power from the valve or controller.
2. Lightly oil the threads, and gasket or knife-edge on the
new motor adaptor. Carefully seat the adaptor on the
valve body or engage and tighten the lock nut if used.
Lock nuts should be torqued to approximately 45 ft-lb.
One eighth turn more than hand tight is sufficient to
achieve a leak proof seal on knife-edge joints.
3. After the motor is tightened, the cable should be replaced
on the valve. Care should be taken to ensure engagement
of the alignment key. Snap on the cable retainer.
4. Pressurize the system and check for leaks.
5. Reapply power to the ComfortLink™ controller. Since,
during service, valve position as calculated by the controller will be lost, the controller should be initialized at
least twice. In some instances, cycling power to the controller will accomplish this.

Table 31 — Unit Torque Specification
FASTENER
Compressor Mounting
Bolts
Compressor Power
Connections
Compressor Ground
Terminal Connections

RECOMMENDED TORQUE
7 to 10 ft-lb (9.5 to 13.5 N-m)
24 to 28 in.-lb (2.7- to 3.2 N-m)
14 to 18 in.-lb (1.6 to 2.0 N-m)

Cooler
BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER REPLACEMENT — Brazed-plate heat exchangers cannot be
repaired if they develop a leak. If a leak (refrigerant or water)
develops, the heat exchanger must be replaced. To replace a
brazed-plate heat exchanger:
1. Check that the replacement heat exchanger is the same as
the original heat exchanger. The unit insulation covers the
manufacturer’s part number. Make sure the depths of the
replacement and original cooler heat exchangers are the
same.
49

Mobil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EAL Arctic 32-3MA
Uniqema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RL32-3MAF
Do not reuse oil that has been drained out, or oil that has
been exposed to atmosphere.

2. Disconnect the liquid-in and liquid-out connections at the
heat exchanger.
3. Recover the refrigerant from the system, and unsolder the
refrigerant-in and refrigerant-out connections.
4. Remove the old heat exchanger. The replacement heat exchanger is supplied fully insulated. It also includes a cooler heater. Use of the heater is not required unless the original cooler contained a factory installed heater.
5. Install the replacement heat exchanger in the unit and attach the mounting bracket hardware to the fan uprights
(sizes 010-030) or to the bottom bracket (sizes 035-060)
using the hardware removed in Step 4. Reconnect the
cooler heater if required. For sizes 010-025, torque the
bolts to 7-10 ft-lb. For sizes 030-060, torque the bolts to
30-50 ft-lb.
6. Carefully braze the refrigerant lines to the connections on
the heat exchanger. Lines should be soldered using silver
as the soldering material with a minimum of 45% silver.
Keep the temperature below 1472 F (800 C) under normal soldering conditions (no vacuum) to prevent the copper solder of the brazed plate heat exchanger from changing its structure. Failure to do so can result in internal
or external leakage at the connections which cannot be repaired. Braze the liquid lines with a heat sink around the
expansion valve to protect it from excess heat.
7. Reconnect the water/brine lines.
8. Dehydrate and recharge the unit. Check for leaks.
BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER
CLEANING — Brazed-plate heat exchangers must be
cleaned chemically. A professional cleaning service skilled in
chemical cleaning should be used. Use a weak acid (5% phosphoric acid, or if the heat exchanger is cleaned frequently, 5%
oxalic acid). Pump the cleaning solution through the
exchanger, preferably in a backflush mode. After cleaning,
rinse with large amounts of fresh water to dispose of all the
acid. Cleaning materials must be disposed of properly.
The factory-installed strainer screen in front of the water/
brine inlets of the heat exchangers should be cleaned periodically, depending on condition of the chiller water/brine.

Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX) Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning
Recommendations
CAUTION
Do not apply any chemical cleaners to MCHX condenser
coils. These cleaners can accelerate corrosion and damage
the coil.
Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain
proper operation of the unit. Elimination of contamination and
removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the
coil and extend the life of the unit. The following steps should
be taken to clean MCHX condenser coils:
1. Remove any foreign objects or debris attached to the
coreface or trapped within the mounting frame and
brackets.
2. Put on personal protective equipment including safetyglasses and/or face shield, waterproof clothing and
gloves. It is recommended to use full coverage clothing.
3. Start high pressure water sprayer and purge any soap or
industrial cleaners from sprayer before cleaning condenser coils. Only clean, potable water is authorized for cleaning condenser coils.
4. Clean condenser face by spraying the core steady and
uniformly from top to bottom while directing the spray
straight toward the core. Do not exceed 900 psig or 30 degree angle. The nozzle must be at least 12 in. from the
core face. Reduce pressure and use caution to prevent
damage to air centers.

CAUTION
Excessive water pressure will fracture the braze between
air centers and refrigerant tubes.

Oil Charge

Check Refrigerant Feed Components

CAUTION

FILTER DRIER — The function of the filter drier is to maintain a clean, dry system. The moisture indicator (described
below) indicates any need to change the filter drier. The filter
drier is a sealed-type drier. When the drier needs to be
changed, the entire filter drier must be replaced.
NOTE: Dual circuit (035-060 sizes) units have 1 filter drier per
circuit.
MOISTURE-LIQUID INDICATOR — The indicator is located
immediately ahead of the TXV to provide an indication of the
refrigerant moisture content. It also provides a sight glass for
refrigerant liquid. Clear flow of liquid refrigerant (at full unit
loading) indicates sufficient charge in the system. Bubbles in the
sight glass (at full unit loading) indicate an undercharged system
or the presence of noncondensables. Moisture in the system,
measured in parts per million (ppm), changes the color of the
indicator as follows:
Green (safe) —Moisture is below 75 ppm
Yellow-Green (caution) — 75 to 150 ppm
Yellow (wet) — above 150 ppm
The unit must be in operation at least 12 hours before the
moisture indicator gives an accurate reading, and must be in
contact with liquid refrigerant. At the first sign of moisture in
the system, change the corresponding filter drier.
NOTE: Dual circuit (035-060 sizes) units have one indicator
per circuit.

The compressor in a Puron® refigerant (R-410A) system
uses a polyol ester (POE) oil. This is extremely hygroscopic, meaning it absorbs water readily. POE oils can
absorb 15 times as much water as other oils designed for
HCFC and CFC refrigerants. Take all necessary precautions to avoid exposure of the oil to the atmosphere. Failure
to do so could result in possible equipment damage.
Puron refrigerant systems use a polyol ester (POE) oil. Use
only Carrier approved compressor oil. Oil should be visible in
compressor oil sight glass. An acceptable oil level is from 1/8 to
3/ of sight glass. All compressors must be off when checking
8
oil level. Recommended oil level adjustment method is as
follows:
ADD OIL — Recover charge from the unit. Add oil to suction
line Schrader valve on tandem compressors sets and the compressor Schrader on the trio's and single compressor circuits.
(See Fig. 26 and 27.) When oil can be seen at the bottom of the
sight glass, add oil in 5 oz increments which is approximately
1/ in oil level. Run all compressors for 20 minutes then shut off
8
to check oil level. Repeat procedure until acceptable oil level is
present.
NOTE: Use only Carrier approved compressor oil. Approved
sources are:
Totaline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3MAF POE, P903-1601
50

DPT HPS
SUCTION
ACCESS
VALVE

EWT

SPT
RGT

COMPRESSOR A2

FLOW
SWITCH

LWT

a30-4973

COMPRESSOR A1

DTT

Fig. 26 — Compressor Location — 30RAP010-030

DPT

HPS

SUCTION
RGT SPT ACCESS
VALVE

SPT RGT

a30-4974

DISCHARGE
ACCESS
VALVE

EWT

DTT
A1
A2

B1
B2

OIL
SIGHTGLASS
DISCHARGE
ACCESS
VALVE

LWT
DPT

FLOW
SWITCH

HPS

Fig. 27 — Compressor Location — 30RAP035-060
DPT
DTT
EWT
HPS
LWT
RGT
SPT

—
—
—
—
—
—
—

LEGEND FOR FIG. 26 AND 27
Discharge Pressure Thermostat
Discharge Temperature Thermistor
Entering Water Thermistor
High Pressure Switch
Leaving Water Thermistor
Return Gas Thermistor
Suction Pressure Transducer

HEATER CABLE — Optional factory-installed cooler and/or
hydronic package heaters are cycled based on the input from
the outside-air temperature sensor. These heaters, when installed, are designed to protect the cooler and/or hydronic package from freezing down to –20 F (–29 C). Power for these heaters is supplied from the main unit power.
The input from the low pressure transducer provides a backup cooler freeze protection package. The MBB shuts down the
unit when a low pressure condition exists that could cause the
cooler to freeze up.

MINIMUM LOAD VALVE — On units equipped with the
factory-installed capacity reduction option, a solenoid valve
and discharge bypass valve (minimum load valve) are located
between the discharge line and the cooler entering-refrigerant
line. The MBB cycles the solenoid to perform minimum load
valve function and the discharge bypass valve modulates to the
suction pressure set point and the valve.
The amount of capacity reduction achieved by the minimum load valve is not adjustable. The total unit capacity with
the minimum load valve is shown in Table 19.
PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES — All units have one pressure relief device per circuit located in the liquid line which relieves at 210 F (100 C).

CAUTION
Do not disconnect main unit power when servicing compressor(s) if ambient temperature is below 40 F (4.4 C).
The compressors have either a single circuit breaker or
multiple circuit breakers which can be used to shut off
power to the compressors. If power to the unit must be off
for a prolonged period, drain the cooler, hydronic package
(if installed) and internal piping. Add glycol according to
Winter Shutdown Step 2 below.

Check Unit Safeties
HIGH-PRESSURE SWITCH — A high-pressure switch is
provided to protect each compressor and refrigeration system
from unsafe high pressure conditions. See Table 32 for highpressure switch settings.
The high-pressure switch is mounted in the discharge line of
each circuit. If an unsafe, high-pressure condition should exist,
the switch opens and shuts off the affected circuit. The CSB
senses the compressor feedback signal and generates an appropriate alarm. The MBB prevents the circuit from restarting until the alert condition is reset. The switch should open at the
pressure corresponding to the appropriate switch setting as
shown in Table 32.

WINTER SHUTDOWN — At the end of the cooling season:
1. Drain the fluid from the cooler, hydronic package (if installed) and internal piping.
2. Fill the cooler and hydronic package with at least 2 gallons (7.6 L) of inhibited propylene glycol or other suitable inhibited antifreeze solution to prevent any residual
water in the cooler and hydronic package/piping from
freezing.
3. At the beginning of the next cooling season, refill the
cooler and add the recommended inhibitor.

Table 32 — Factory Settings, High-Pressure
Switch (Fixed)
UNIT
30RA

CUTOUT
Psig
kPa
650
4482

CUT-IN
Psig
500

kPa
3447

Thermistors — Electronic control uses up to five 5 k
thermistors to sense temperatures used to control operation of
the chiller. Thermistors EWT, LWT, RGTA, RGTB, and OAT
are identical in their temperature and voltage drop performance. The SPT space temperature thermistor has a 10 k input channel and it has a different set of temperature vs. resistance and voltage drop performance. Resistance at various temperatures are listed in Tables 33-37. For dual chiller operation,
a dual chiller sensor is required which is a 5 k thermistor.
When a digital compressor is used, a DTT (digital temperature
thermistor) is used. The DTT is an 86 k thermistor.
REPLACING THERMISTORS (EWT, LWT, RGT) — Add
a small amount of thermal conductive grease to the thermistor
well and end of probe. For all probes, tighten the retaining nut
¼ turn past finger tight. See Fig. 28.
THERMISTOR/TEMPERATURE SENSOR CHECK — A
high quality digital volt-ohmmeter is required to perform this
check.
1. Connect the digital voltmeter across the appropriate themistor terminals at the J8 terminal strip on the Main Base
Board (see Fig. 29).
2. Using the voltage reading obtained, read the sensor temperature from Tables 33-37.
3. To check thermistor accuracy, measure temperature at
probe location with an accurate thermocouple-type temperature measuring instrument. Insulate thermocouple to
avoid ambient temperatures from influencing reading.
Temperature measured by thermocouple and temperature
determined from thermistor voltage reading should be
close, ± 5° F (3° C) if care was taken in applying thermocouple and taking readings.
If a more accurate check is required, unit must be shut down
and thermistor removed and checked at a known temperature
(freezing point or boiling point of water) using either voltage
drop measured across thermistor at the J8 terminal, by determining the resistance with chiller shut down and thermistor

Clear the alarm using the scrolling marquee display as described on page 63. The unit should restart after the compressor
anti-short-cycle delay, built into the unit control module,
expires.
PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS — Each refrigerant circuit is
equipped with a suction and discharge pressure transducer.
These inputs to the MBB are not only used to monitor the status of the unit, but to also maintain operation of the chiller
within the compressor manufacturer's specified limits. The input to the MBB from the suction pressure transducer is also
used to protect the compressor from operating at low pressure
conditions and low superheat conditions. In some cases, the
unit may not be able to run at full capacity. The control module
will automatically reduce the capacity of a circuit as needed to
maintain specified maximum/minimum operating pressures.
COOLER FREEZE-UP PROTECTION

WARNING
On medium temperature brine units, the anti-freeze solution must be properly mixed to prevent freezing at a temperature of at least 15 F (8.3 C) below the leaving-fluid
temperature set point. Failure to provide the proper antifreeze solution mixture is considered abuse and may impair
or otherwise negatively impact the Carrier warranty.
The main base board (MBB) monitors leaving fluid temperature at all times. The MBB will rapidly remove stages of capacity as necessary to prevent freezing conditions due to the
rapid loss of load or low cooler fluid flow.
When the cooler is exposed to lower ambient temperatures
(34 F [1° C] or below), freeze-up protection is required using
inhibited ethylene or propylene glycol.

necessary, build-up (e.g., lime) can be removed with a common
vinegar cleansing agent.
The flow sensor cable is provided with (3) LEDs that indicate if 24 vac power is present and also status of the switch
contacts. The LEDs are as follows:
• Green LED ON – 24 vac present
• One Yellow LED ON – Flow sensor switch OPEN
• Two Yellow LED ON – Flow sensor switch CLOSED
If nuisance trips of the sensor are occurring, follow the
steps below to correct the situation:
1. Check to confirm that the factory installed strainer is
clean. Use the blow-down valve provided or remove the
screen and clean it. For the case of VFD controlled
pumps, ensure that the minimum speed setting has not
been changed.
2. Measure the pressure drop across the cooler or cooler/
pump system and compare this to the system requirements.
3. Verify that cable connections at the switch and at the terminal block are secure.
4. For factory-installed hydronic systems, verify that:
• All air has been purged from the system.
• Circuit setter balance valve has been correctly set.
5. Pump impeller has been improperly trimmed and is not
providing sufficient flow.
6. Wrong pump motor rotation. Pump must rotate clockwise
when viewed from motor end of pump.

disconnected from J8. Compare the values determined with the
value read by the control in the Temperatures mode using the
scrolling marquee display.

Pressure Transducers — The suction and discharge

transducers are different part numbers and can be distinguished
by the color of the transducer body, suction (yellow) and discharge (red). No pressure transducer calibration is required.
The transducers operate on a 5 vdc supply, which is generated
by the main base board (MBB). See Fig. 29 for transducer connections to the J8 connector on the MBB.
TROUBLESHOOTING — If a transducer is suspected of being faulty, first check supply voltage to the transducer. Supply
voltage should be 5 vdc ± 0.2 v. If supply voltage is correct,
compare pressure reading displayed on the scrolling marquee
display module against pressure shown on a calibrated pressure
gauge. Pressure readings should be within ± 15 psig. If the
two readings are not reasonably close, replace the pressure
transducer.

Chilled Water Flow Switch — A factory-installed

flow switch is installed in the leaving fluid piping for all units
without the factory-installed hydronic package. See Fig. 30.
Units with the optional hydronic package have the flow switch
installed in the entering fluid piping. This is a thermal-dispersion flow switch with no field adjustments. The switch is set
for approximately 0.5 ft/sec of flow. The sensor tip houses two
thermistors and a heater element. One thermistor is located in
the sensor tip, closest to the flowing fluid. This thermistor is
used to detect changes in the flow velocity of the liquid. The
second thermistor is bonded to the cylindrical wall and is affected only by changes in the temperature of the liquid. The
thermistors are positioned to be in close contact with the wall
of the sensor probe and, at the same time, to be kept separated
from each other within the confines of the probe.
In order to sense flow, it is necessary to heat one of the
thermistors in the probe. When power is applied, the tip of the
probe is heated. As the fluid starts to flow, heat will be carried
away from the sensor tip. Cooling of the first thermistor is a
function of how fast heat is conducted away by the flowing
liquid.
The difference in temperature between the two thermistors
provides a measurement of fluid velocity past the sensor probe.
When fluid velocity is high, more heat will be carried away
from the heated thermistor and the temperature differential will
be small. As fluid velocity decreases, less heat will be taken
from the heated thermistor and there will be an increase in temperature differential.
When unit flow rate is above the minimum flow rate, then
the output is switched on, sending 24 vac to the MBB to prove
flow has been established.
For recommended maintenance, check the sensor tip for
build-up every 6 months. Clean the tip with a soft cloth. If

Strainer — Periodic factory-installed strainer cleaning is

required. Pressure drop across strainer in excess of 3 psi
(21 kPa) indicates the need for cleaning. Normal (clean) pressure drop is approximately 1 psi (6.9 kPa). Open the factoryinstalled blowdown valve to clean the strainer. If required, shut
the chiller down and remove the strainer screen to clean. When
strainer has been cleaned, enter ‘YES’ for Strainer Maintenance Done (Run StatusPMS.T.MN).

Condenser Fans — Each fan is supported by a formed

wire mount bolted to a fan deck and covered with a wire guard.
METAL FANS — The exposed end of fan motor shaft is protected from weather by grease and a rubber boot. If fan motor
must be removed for service or replacement, be sure to regrease fan shaft and reinstall fan guard. For proper performance with the value sound fan option, fan web should be
0.32 in. (8 mm) below top of orifice on the fan deck to top of
the fan hub. (See Fig. 31.) Tighten set screws to 15 ± 1 ft-lb
(20 ± 1.3 N-m).
IMPORTANT: Check for proper fan rotation (clockwise
when viewed from above). If necessary, switch any
2 power leads to reverse fan rotation.

5/8 in. HEX

1/4-18 NPT

6" MINIMUM
CLEARANCE FOR
THERMISTOR
REMOVAL

Fig. 28 — Thermistor Well

Table 33 — 5K Thermistor Temperatures (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop
(Voltage Drop for EWT, LWT, RGT, and OAT)
TEMP
(F)
–25
–24
–23
–22
–21
–20
–19
–18
–17
–16
–15
–14
–13
–12
–11
–10
–9
–8
–7
–6
–5
–4
–3
–2
–1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

VOLTAGE
DROP
(V)
3.699
3.689
3.679
3.668
3.658
3.647
3.636
3.624
3.613
3.601
3.588
3.576
3.563
3.550
3.536
3.523
3.509
3.494
3.480
3.465
3.450
3.434
3.418
3.402
3.386
3.369
3.352
3.335
3.317
3.299
3.281
3.262
3.243
3.224
3.205
3.185
3.165
3.145
3.124
3.103
3.082
3.060
3.038
3.016
2.994
2.972
2.949
2.926
2.903
2.879
2.856
2.832
2.808
2.784
2.759
2.735
2.710
2.685
2.660
2.634
2.609
2.583
2.558
2.532
2.506
2.480
2.454
2.428
2.402
2.376
2.349
2.323
2.296
2.270
2.244
2.217
2.191
2.165
2.138
2.112
2.086
2.060
2.034
2.008

RESISTANCE
(Ohms)

TEMP
(F)

98,010
94,707
91,522
88,449
85,486
82,627
79,871
77,212
74,648
72,175
69,790
67,490
65,272
63,133
61,070
59,081
57,162
55,311
53,526
51,804
50,143
48,541
46,996
45,505
44,066
42,679
41,339
40,047
38,800
37,596
36,435
35,313
34,231
33,185
32,176
31,202
30,260
29,351
28,473
27,624
26,804
26,011
25,245
24,505
23,789
23,096
22,427
21,779
21,153
20,547
19,960
19,393
18,843
18,311
17,796
17,297
16,814
16,346
15,892
15,453
15,027
14,614
14,214
13,826
13,449
13,084
12,730
12,387
12,053
11,730
11,416
11,112
10,816
10,529
10,250
9,979
9,717
9,461
9,213
8,973
8,739
8,511
8,291
8,076

59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142

VOLTAGE
DROP
(V)
1.982
1.956
1.930
1.905
1.879
1.854
1.829
1.804
1.779
1.754
1.729
1.705
1.681
1.656
1.632
1.609
1.585
1.562
1.538
1.516
1.493
1.470
1.448
1.426
1.404
1.382
1.361
1.340
1.319
1.298
1.278
1.257
1.237
1.217
1.198
1.179
1.160
1.141
1.122
1.104
1.086
1.068
1.051
1.033
1.016
0.999
0.983
0.966
0.950
0.934
0.918
0.903
0.888
0.873
0.858
0.843
0.829
0.815
0.801
0.787
0.774
0.761
0.748
0.735
0.723
0.710
0.698
0.686
0.674
0.663
0.651
0.640
0.629
0.618
0.608
0.597
0.587
0.577
0.567
0.557
0.548
0.538
0.529
0.520

RESISTANCE
(Ohms)

TEMP
(F)

7,686
7,665
7,468
7,277
7,091
6,911
6,735
6,564
6,399
6,238
6,081
5,929
5,781
5,637
5,497
5,361
5,229
5,101
4,976
4,855
4,737
4,622
4,511
4,403
4,298
4,196
4,096
4,000
3,906
3,814
3,726
3,640
3,556
3,474
3,395
3,318
3,243
3,170
3,099
3,031
2,964
2,898
2,835
2,773
2,713
2,655
2,597
2,542
2,488
2,436
2,385
2,335
2,286
2,239
2,192
2,147
2,103
2,060
2,018
1,977
1,937
1,898
1,860
1,822
1,786
1,750
1,715
1,680
1,647
1,614
1,582
1,550
1,519
1,489
1,459
1,430
1,401
1,373
1,345
1,318
1,291
1,265
1,240
1,214

143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225

VOLTAGE
DROP
(V)
0.511
0.502
0.494
0.485
0.477
0.469
0.461
0.453
0.445
0.438
0.430
0.423
0.416
0.408
0.402
0.395
0.388
0.381
0.375
0.369
0.362
0.356
0.350
0.344
0.339
0.333
0.327
0.322
0.317
0.311
0.306
0.301
0.296
0.291
0.286
0.282
0.277
0.272
0.268
0.264
0.259
0.255
0.251
0.247
0.243
0.239
0.235
0.231
0.228
0.224
0.220
0.217
0.213
0.210
0.206
0.203
0.200
0.197
0.194
0.191
0.188
0.185
0.182
0.179
0.176
0.173
0.171
0.168
0.165
0.163
0.160
0.158
0.155
0.153
0.151
0.148
0.146
0.144
0.142
0.140
0.138
0.135
0.133

RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
1,190
1,165
1,141
1,118
1,095
1,072
1,050
1,029
1,007
986
965
945
925
906
887
868
850
832
815
798
782
765
750
734
719
705
690
677
663
650
638
626
614
602
591
581
570
561
551
542
533
524
516
508
501
494
487
480
473
467
461
456
450
445
439
434
429
424
419
415
410
405
401
396
391
386
382
377
372
367
361
356
350
344
338
332
325
318
311
304
297
289
282

Table 34 — 5K Thermistor Temperatures (°C) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop
(Voltage Drop for EWT, LWT, RGT, and OAT)
TEMP
(C)
–32
–31
–30
–29
–28
–27
–26
–25
–24
–23
–22
–21
–20
–19
–18
–17
–16
–15
–14
–13
–12
–11
–10
–9
–8
–7
–6
–5
–4
–3
–2
–1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

VOLTAGE
DROP
(V)
3.705
3.687
3.668
3.649
3.629
3.608
3.586
3.563
3.539
3.514
3.489
3.462
3.434
3.406
3.376
3.345
3.313
3.281
3.247
3.212
3.177
3.140
3.103
3.065
3.025
2.985
2.945
2.903
2.860
2.817
2.774
2.730
2.685
2.639
2.593
2.547
2.500
2.454
2.407
2.360
2.312
2.265
2.217
2.170
2.123
2.076
2.029

RESISTANCE
(Ohms)

TEMP
(C)

100,260
94,165
88,480
83,170
78,125
73,580
69,250
65,205
61,420
57,875
54,555
51,450
48,536
45,807
43,247
40,845
38,592
38,476
34,489
32,621
30,866
29,216
27,633
26,202
24,827
23,532
22,313
21,163
20,079
19,058
18,094
17,184
16,325
15,515
14,749
14,026
13,342
12,696
12,085
11,506
10,959
10,441
9,949
9,485
9,044
8,627
8,231

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61

VOLTAGE
DROP
(V)
1.982
1.935
1.889
1.844
1.799
1.754
1.710
1.666
1.623
1.580
1.538
1.497
1.457
1.417
1.378
1.340
1.302
1.265
1.229
1.194
1.160
1.126
1.093
1.061
1.030
0.999
0.969
0.940
0.912
0.885
0.858
0.832
0.807
0.782
0.758
0.735
0.713
0.691
0.669
0.649
0.629
0.610
0.591
0.573
0.555
0.538
0.522

RESISTANCE
(Ohms)

TEMP
(C)

7,855
7,499
7,161
6,840
6,536
6,246
5,971
5,710
5,461
5,225
5,000
4,786
4,583
4,389
4,204
4,028
3,861
3,701
3,549
3,404
3,266
3,134
3,008
2,888
2,773
2,663
2,559
2,459
2,363
2,272
2,184
2,101
2,021
1,944
1,871
1,801
1,734
1,670
1,609
1,550
1,493
1,439
1,387
1,337
1,290
1,244
1,200

62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107

VOLTAGE
DROP
(V)
0.506
0.490
0.475
0.461
0.447
0.433
0.420
0.407
0.395
0.383
0.371
0.360
0.349
0.339
0.329
0.319
0.309
0.300
0.291
0.283
0.274
0.266
0.258
0.251
0.244
0.237
0.230
0.223
0.217
0.211
0.204
0.199
0.193
0.188
0.182
0.177
0.172
0.168
0.163
0.158
0.154
0.150
0.146
0.142
0.138
0.134

RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
1,158
1,118
1,079
1,041
1,006
971
938
906
876
836
805
775
747
719
693
669
645
623
602
583
564
547
531
516
502
489
477
466
456
446
436
427
419
410
402
393
385
376
367
357
346
335
324
312
299
285

Table 35 — 10K Thermistor Temperature (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop
(For SPT)
TEMP
(F)
–25
–24
–23
–22
–21
–20
–19
–18
–17
–16
–15
–14
–13
–12
–11
–10
–9
–8
–7
–6
–5
–4
–3
–2
–1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60

VOLTAGE
DROP
(V)
4.758
4.750
4.741
4.733
4.724
4.715
4.705
4.696
4.686
4.676
4.665
4.655
4.644
4.633
4.621
4.609
4.597
4.585
4.572
4.560
4.546
4.533
4.519
4.505
4.490
4.476
4.461
4.445
4.429
4.413
4.397
4.380
4.363
4.346
4.328
4.310
4.292
4.273
4.254
4.235
4.215
4.195
4.174
4.153
4.132
4.111
4.089
4.067
4.044
4.021
3.998
3.975
3.951
3.927
3.903
3.878
3.853
3.828
3.802
3.776
3.750
3.723
3.697
3.670
3.654
3.615
3.587
3.559
3.531
3.503
3.474
3.445
3.416
3.387
3.357
3.328
3.298
3.268
3.238
3.208
3.178
3.147
3.117
3.086
3.056
3.025

RESISTANCE
(Ohms)

TEMP
(F)

196,453
189,692
183,300
177,000
171,079
165,238
159,717
154,344
149,194
144,250
139,443
134,891
130,402
126,183
122,018
118,076
114,236
110,549
107,006
103,558
100,287
97,060
94,020
91,019
88,171
85,396
82,729
80,162
77,662
75,286
72,940
70,727
68,542
66,465
64,439
62,491
60,612
58,781
57,039
55,319
53,693
52,086
50,557
49,065
47,627
46,240
44,888
43,598
42,324
41,118
39,926
38,790
37,681
36,610
35,577
34,569
33,606
32,654
31,752
30,860
30,009
29,177
28,373
27,597
26,838
26,113
25,396
24,715
24,042
23,399
22,770
22,161
21,573
20,998
20,447
19,903
19,386
18,874
18,384
17,904
17,441
16,991
16,552
16,131
15,714
15,317

61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146

VOLTAGE
DROP
(V)
2.994
2.963
2.932
2.901
2.870
2.839
2.808
2.777
2.746
2.715
2.684
2.653
2.622
2.592
2.561
2.530
2.500
2.470
2.439
2.409
2.379
2.349
2.319
2.290
2.260
2.231
2.202
2.173
2.144
2.115
2.087
2.059
2.030
2.003
1.975
1.948
1.921
1.894
1.867
1.841
1.815
1.789
1.763
1.738
1.713
1.688
1.663
1.639
1.615
1.591
1.567
1.544
1.521
1.498
1.475
1.453
1.431
1.409
1.387
1.366
1.345
1.324
1.304
1.284
1.264
1.244
1.225
1.206
1.187
1.168
1.150
1.132
1.114
1.096
1.079
1.062
1.045
1.028
1.012
0.996
0.980
0.965
0.949
0.934
0.919
0.905

RESISTANCE
(Ohms)

TEMP
(F)

14,925
14,549
14,180
13,824
13,478
13,139
12,814
12,493
12,187
11,884
11,593
11,308
11,031
10,764
10,501
10,249
10,000
9,762
9,526
9,300
9,078
8,862
8,653
8,448
8,251
8,056
7,869
7,685
7,507
7,333
7,165
6,999
6,838
6,683
6,530
6,383
6,238
6,098
5,961
5,827
5,698
5,571
5,449
5,327
5,210
5,095
4,984
4,876
4,769
4,666
4,564
4,467
4,370
4,277
4,185
4,096
4,008
3,923
3,840
3,759
3,681
3,603
3,529
3,455
3,383
3,313
3,244
3,178
3,112
3,049
2,986
2,926
2,866
2,809
2,752
2,697
2,643
2,590
2,539
2,488
2,439
2,391
2,343
2,297
2,253
2,209

147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225

VOLTAGE
DROP
(V)
0.890
0.876
0.862
0.848
0.835
0.821
0.808
0.795
0.782
0.770
0.758
0.745
0.733
0.722
0.710
0.699
0.687
0.676
0.666
0.655
0.645
0.634
0.624
0.614
0.604
0.595
0.585
0.576
0.567
0.558
0.549
0.540
0.532
0.523
0.515
0.507
0.499
0.491
0.483
0.476
0.468
0.461
0.454
0.447
0.440
0.433
0.426
0.419
0.413
0.407
0.400
0.394
0.388
0.382
0.376
0.370
0.365
0.359
0.354
0.349
0.343
0.338
0.333
0.328
0.323
0.318
0.314
0.309
0.305
0.300
0.296
0.292
0.288
0.284
0.279
0.275
0.272
0.268
0.264

RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
2,166
2,124
2,083
2,043
2,003
1,966
1,928
1,891
1,855
1,820
1,786
1,752
1,719
1,687
1,656
1,625
1,594
1,565
1,536
1,508
1,480
1,453
1,426
1,400
1,375
1,350
1,326
1,302
1,278
1,255
1,233
1,211
1,190
1,169
1,148
1,128
1,108
1,089
1,070
1,052
1,033
1,016
998
981
964
947
931
915
900
885
870
855
841
827
814
800
787
774
762
749
737
725
714
702
691
680
670
659
649
639
629
620
610
601
592
583
574
566
557

Table 36 — 10K Thermistor Temperature (°C) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop
(For SPT)
TEMP
(C)
–32
–31
–30
–29
–28
–27
–26
–25
–24
–23
–22
–21
–20
–19
–18
–17
–16
–15
–14
–13
–12
–11
–10
–9
–8
–7
–6
–5
–4
–3
–2
–1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

VOLTAGE
DROP
(V)
4.762
4.748
4.733
4.716
4.700
4.682
4.663
4.644
4.624
4.602
4.580
4.557
4.533
4.508
4.482
4.455
4.426
4.397
4.367
4.335
4.303
4.269
4.235
4.199
4.162
4.124
4.085
4.044
4.003
3.961
3.917
3.873
3.828
3.781
3.734
3.686
3.637
3.587
3.537
3.485
3.433
3.381
3.328
3.274
3.220
3.165
3.111

RESISTANCE
(Ohms)

TEMP
(C)

200,510
188,340
177,000
166,342
156,404
147,134
138,482
130,402
122,807
115,710
109,075
102,868
97,060
91,588
86,463
81,662
77,162
72,940
68,957
65,219
61,711
58,415
55,319
52,392
49,640
47,052
44,617
42,324
40,153
38,109
36,182
34,367
32,654
31,030
29,498
28,052
26,686
25,396
24,171
23,013
21,918
20,883
19,903
18,972
18,090
17,255
16,464

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61

VOLTAGE
DROP
(V)
3.056
3.000
2.944
2.889
2.833
2.777
2.721
2.666
2.610
2.555
2.500
2.445
2.391
2.337
2.284
2.231
2.178
2.127
2.075
2.025
1.975
1.926
1.878
1.830
1.784
1.738
1.692
1.648
1.605
1.562
1.521
1.480
1.439
1.400
1.362
1.324
1.288
1.252
1.217
1.183
1.150
1.117
1.086
1.055
1.025
0.996
0.968

RESISTANCE
(Ohms)

TEMP
(C)

15,714
15,000
14,323
13,681
13,071
12,493
11,942
11,418
10,921
10,449
10,000
9,571
9,164
8,776
8,407
8,056
7,720
7,401
7,096
6,806
6,530
6,266
6,014
5,774
5,546
5,327
5,117
4,918
4,727
4,544
4,370
4,203
4,042
3,889
3,743
3,603
3,469
3,340
3,217
3,099
2,986
2,878
2,774
2,675
2,579
2,488
2,400

62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107

VOLTAGE
DROP
(V)
0.940
0.913
0.887
0.862
0.837
0.813
0.790
0.767
0.745
0.724
0.703
0.683
0.663
0.645
0.626
0.608
0.591
0.574
0.558
0.542
0.527
0.512
0.497
0.483
0.470
0.457
0.444
0.431
0.419
0.408
0.396
0.386
0.375
0.365
0.355
0.345
0.336
0.327
0.318
0.310
0.302
0.294
0.287
0.279
0.272
0.265

RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
2,315
2,235
2,157
2,083
2,011
1,943
1,876
1,813
1,752
1,693
1,637
1,582
1,530
1,480
1,431
1,385
1,340
1,297
1,255
1,215
1,177
1,140
1,104
1,070
1,037
1,005
974
944
915
889
861
836
811
787
764
742
721
700
680
661
643
626
609
592
576
561

Table 37 — 86K Thermistor vs Resistance (DTT)
TEMP
(C)

TEMP
(F)

-40
-35
-30
-25
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
70

-40
-31
-22
-13
-4
5
14
23
32
41
50
59
68
77
86
95
104
113
122
131
140
158

RESISTANCE
(Ohms)

TEMP
(C)

TEMP
(F)

2,889,600
2,087,220
1,522,200
1,121,440
834,720
627,280
475,740
363,990
280,820
218,410
171,170
135,140
107,440
86,000
69,280
56,160
45,810
37,580
30,990
25,680
21,400
15,070

75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
120
125
130
135
140
145
150
155
160
165
170
175
180

167
176
185
194
203
212
221
230
239
248
257
266
275
284
293
302
311
320
329
338
347
356

RESISTANCE
(Ohms)

12,730
10,790
9,200
7,870
6,770
5,850
5,090
4,450
3,870
3,350
2,920
2,580
2,280
2,020
1,800
1,590
1,390
1,250
1,120
1,010
920
830

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

ACCSY
DPT
LWT
LVT
OAT
RGT
SEN
SPT

RGTA

RED

LOW SOUND FAN — A shroud and a wire guard provide
protection from the rotating fan. The exposed end of the fan
motor shaft is protected from weather by grease. If fan motor
must be removed for service or replacement, be sure to regrease fan shaft and reinstall fan guard. The fan motor has a
step in the motor shaft. For proper performance, fan should be
positioned such that it is securely seated on this step. Tighten
the bolt to 15 ± 1 ft-lb (20 ± 1.3 N·m).

BLK

RGTB

RED

4
5
6
1

LVT

BLK

J12

T55

BLU

OAT

RED

BLK

SEN

T-55
ACCSY

IMPORTANT: Check for proper fan rotation (counterclockwise when viewed from above). If necessary, switch
any 2 power leads to reverse fan rotation.

SPACE TEMPERATURE
ACCESSORY OR
DUAL CHILLER LWT

4
1
2

controller is standard on size 010 and 015 units. For other sizes,
the optional or accessory Motormaster V controller uses an input signal from the AUX board. See Fig. 32. The controller is
factory configured and requires no field programming. If a situation arises where the drive does not function properly, the information provided below and in Table 38 can be used to troubleshoot the drive.

BLK

EVAPORATOR LEAVING
FLUID TEMP

RED

BLK

RED

GRN

BLK

RED

GRN

BLK

RED

GRN

BLK

RED

11
12

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

Motormaster® V Controller — The Motormaster V

EVAPORATOR ENTERING
FLUID TEMP

RED

GRN
BLK

B
C
A

DPTB

B
C

WARNING

SPTB

Hazard of electrical shock. Wait three minutes after disconnecting incoming power before servicing drive. Capacitors
retain charge after power is removed. Drive assembly
includes externally mounted current limiting resistors. Use
extreme caution when servicing the drive. Failure to comply could result in possible personal injury.

B
C
A

DPTA

B
C

SPTA

a30-4975

WARNING

LEGEND
Accessory
Discharge Pressure Transducer
Leaving Water Temperature Sensor
Low Voltage Terminal
Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor
Return Gas Temperature Sensor
Sensor Terminal Block
Space Temperature Sensor

When configured as shown in this literature, this equipment is designed to start when it receives line power.
Ensure that all personnel are clear of fans and guards are
installed before applying power. Failure to comply could
result in possible personal injury.

CAUTION

Fig. 29 — Thermistor Connections to
Main Base Board, J8 Connector

DO NOT connect incoming AC power to output terminals
T1, T2, and T3. Severe damage to the drive will result. Do
not continuously cycle input power to the drive more than
once every two minutes. Damage to the drive will result.

CAUTION
If input power has not been applied to the drive for a period
of time exceeding three years (due to storage, etc.), the
electrolytic DC bus capacitors within the drive can change
internally, resulting in excessive leakage current. This can
result in premature failure of the capacitors if the drive is
operated after such a long period of inactivity or storage. In
order to reform the capacitors and prepare the drive for
operation after a long period of inactivity, apply input
power to the drive for 8 hours prior to actually operating
the motor. Before attempting to operate the drive, motor,
and driven equipment, be sure all procedures pertaining to
installation and wiring have been properly followed. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage.

a30-499
Fig. 30 — Chilled Water Flow Switch

GENERAL OPERATION — The speed varies in proportion
to a 4 to 20 mA signal produced by the ComfortLink™ controls. The MMV output speed is displayed in Hz.
The ComfortLink controls must be configured for MMV
operation in order for it to operate. This is configured under the
Configuration menu (ConfigurationMMMMR.S) and

a30-4976
Fig. 31 — Mounted Fan Position
58

VFD. It should not be removed with power applied to the
VFD.
LOSS OF CCN COMMUNICATIONS — Carrier Comfort
Network® (CCN) communications with external control
systems can be affected by high frequency electrical noise generated by the Motormaster V control. Ensure unit is well
grounded to eliminate ground currents along communication
lines.
If communications are lost only while Motormaster V control is in operation, order a signal isolator (CEAS420876-2)
and power supplies (CEAS221045-01, 2 required) for the CCN
communication line.
Fault Codes — The drive is programmed to automatically restart after a fault and will attempt to restart three times after a
fault (the drive will not restart after CF, cF, GF, F1, F2-F9, or
Fo faults). If all three restart attempts are unsuccessful, the
drive will trip into FAULT LOCKOUT (LC), which requires a
manual reset.
Manual Reset — If fault condition has been removed, cycle
power to the chiller to reset the VFD.
Troubleshooting — Troubleshooting the Motormaster® V
control requires a combination of observing system operation
and VFD information. The drive provides 2 kinds of troubleshooting modes: a status matrix using the 3-digit display
(P57, P58) and real time monitoring of key inputs and outputs.
The collective group is displayed through parameters
50-60 and all values are read-only.
• P50: FAULT HISTORY — Last 8 faults
• P51: SOFTWARE version
• P52: DC BUS VOLTAGE — in percent of nominal.
Usually rated input voltage x 1.4
• P53: MOTOR VOLAGE — in percent of rated output
voltage
• P54: LOAD — in percent of drives rated output current
rating
• P55: VDC INPUT — in percent of maximum input:
100 will indicate full scale which is 5 v
• P56: 4-20 mA INPUT — in percent of maximum input.
20% = 4 mA, 100% = 20 mA
Manual Starter Trip — If the VFD manual starter (MS-FCHS, MS-FC-A1 or MS-FC-B1 depending on model) trips,
locate the inrush current protectors (3 round black disks per
motor) and verify their resistance. For units operating at 208 v
or 230 v, these devices should measure approximately 7 ohms.
For all other voltages, they should measure approximately
20 ohms. Check value with mating plug disconnected, power
to chiller off and at ambient temperature (not hot immediately
after stopping VFD). These are standard resistances at 77 F
(25 C). Resistance values decrease at higher temperatures and
increase at lower temperatures.
REPLACING DEFECTIVE MODULES — The ComfortLink™ replacement modules are shown in Table 40. If the main
base board (MBB) has been replaced, verify that all configuration data is correct. Follow the Configuration mode table and
verify that all items under sub-modes UNIT, OPT1 and OPT2
are correct. Any additional field-installed accessories or options (RSET, SLCT sub-modes) should also be verified as well
as any specific time and maintenance schedules.
Refer to the Start-Up Checklist for 30RAP Liquid Chillers
(completed at time of original start-up) found in the job folder.
This information is needed later in this procedure. If the checklist does not exist, fill out the current information in the Configuration mode on a new checklist. Tailor the various options and
configurations as needed for this particular installation.

selecting “YES”. This configuration menu also contains the
gains and minimum speed for the Motormaster control logic.
CONFIGURATION — The MMV is configured for 1 of 12
operation modes based on the inputs to the control terminal
block. The 30RAP units use operating modes 5-8. In these configurations, the MMV follows a 4 to 20 mA speed reference
signal present on terminals 25 (+) and 2 (-). One additional
jumper is required to configure the drive for 50/60 Hz operation and input voltage. See Table 39 for proper inputs. Once the
drive is powered, it will change to the mode selected according
to the inputs. See Fig. 33.
DRIVE PROGRAMMING

CAUTION
It is strongly recommended that the user NOT change any
programming without consulting Carrier service personnel.
Unit damage may occur from improper programming.
To enter password and change program values:
1. Press Mode.
2. Upper right decimal point blinks.
3. Display reads “00”. To enter the PROGRAM mode to access the parameters, press the Mode button. This will activate the PASSWORD prompt (if the password has not
been disabled). The display will read “00” and the upper
right-hand decimal point will be blinking. (See Fig. 33.)
4. Use the
and
buttons to scroll to the password
value (the factory default password is “1111”) and press
the Mode button. Once the correct password value is
entered, the display will read “P01”, which indicates that
the PROGRAM mode has been accessed at the beginning
of the parameter menu (P01 is the first parameter).
NOTE: If the display flashes “Er”, the password was incorrect,
and the process to enter the password must be repeated.
5. Press Mode to display present parameter number.
Upper right decimal point blinks.
Use the
and
buttons to scroll to the desired
parameter number.
Once the desired parameter number is found, press the
Mode button to display the present parameter setting. The upper right-hand decimal point will begin blinking, indicating
that the present parameter setting is being displayed, and that it
can be changed by using the up and down buttons. Use
and
to change setting. Press Mode to store new setting.
Pressing the Mode will store the new setting and also exit
the PROGRAM mode. To change another parameter, press the
Mode key again to re-enter the PROGRAM mode (the parameter menu will be accessed at the parameter that was last
viewed or changed before exiting). If the Mode key is pressed
within two minutes of exiting the PROGRAM mode, the password is not required to access the parameters. After two minutes, the password must be entered in order to access the parameters again.
To change password: first enter the current password then
change parameter P44 to the desired password.
To disable automatic control mode and enter manual speed
control mode:
1. Change P05 to ‘01- keypad’.
2. Push UP and DOWN arrow key to set manual speed.
3. Set P05 to ‘04 - 4-20mA control’ to restore 4 to 20 mA
control.
EPM CHIP — The drive uses a electronic programming module (EPM) chip to store the program parameters. This is an
EEPROM memory chip and is accessible from the front of the

LOW AMBIENT OPERATION (MOTORMASTER V)

FIOP/ACCESSORY

MM-A

FB1

FB3

BLK 11

BLK

BLK-1

YEL 12

YEL

BLK-2

BLU 13

BLU

VIO 11

*1
25

240

1/4W

FB2
BLK

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK-2
BLK-3

BLK
WHT

LEGEND
Auxiliary
Fuse Block
Motormaster
Outdoor Fan Motor
Terminal Block

BLK

VOLTAGE

208/230/460/575

13A

380

1
2

OFM2

3
1

GRN/YEL

3
2

BLK
BLK

COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(208/230,230V)

—
—
—
—
—

YEL

~
~

CHC

a30-4977

AUX
FB
MM
OFM
TB

COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(380,460,575V)

~
~

* MM SIGNAL CONNECTION

FROM
AUX-J4

BLK-1

CHC

BLK

RED

GRN/YEL

MMR
14

BLK

FC2

OFM1

BLK-3

YEL

HIGH SCCR
ONLY

WHT

1
2

CONFIGURATION TABLE
MODE

NOMINAL VOLTAGE

5
6

208/230/460/575*
208/380

60
60

CONTROL INPUT
(PINS 25, 2)
External control 4-20 mA
External control 4-20 mA

*208-v can run in mode 5 or 6.

Fig. 32 — Typical Motormaster Wiring

EPM

Mode

DANGER

MMV
TERMINAL
BLOCK
T1 T2

B-

B+

DISPLAY

BUTTONS

Mode

Fig. 33 — Motormaster® V Mode Buttons and Mode Display
60

START JUMPER
TB1-TB2
TB13A-TB2

Table 38 — Fault Codes
FAULT CODE
AF
CF
cF

CURRENT LIMIT: The output current has exceeded the
CURRENT LIMIT setting (Parameter 25) and the drive is
reducing the output frequency to reduce the output current.
If the drive remains in CURRENT LIMIT too long, it can trip
into a CURRENT OVERLOAD fault (PF).
Data Fault: User data and OEM defaults in the EPM are
corrupted.
High DC Bus Voltage Fault: Line voltage is too high; Deceleration rate is too fast; Overhauling load.
Serial Fault: The watchdog timer has timed out, indicating
that the serial link has been lost.

GF
HF
JF

LF
OF

Low DC Bus Voltage Fault: Line voltage is too low.
Output Transistor Fault: Phase to phase or phase to ground
short circuit on the output; Failed output transistor; Boost
settings are too high; Acceleration rate is too fast.
Current Overload Fault: VFD is undersized for the application; Mechanical problem with the driven equipment.

PF
SF
F1
F2-F9, Fo
Drive display = 60.0 even though it
is cold outside and it should be running slower
Drive display = ‘---’ even though
drive should be running
Drive display = 8.0 even though fan
should be running faster
VFD flashes 57 and LCS

EPM
LCS
OEM
VFD

DESCRIPTION
High Temperature Fault: Ambient temperature is too high;
Cooling fan has failed (if equipped).
Control Fault: A blank EPM, or an EPM with corrupted data
has been installed.
Incompatibility Fault: An EPM with an incompatible parameter version has been installed.

—
—
—
—

Single-phase Fault: Single-phase input power has been
applied to a three-phase drive.
EPM Fault: The EPM is missing or damaged.
Internal Faults: The control board has sensed a problem
Feedback signal is above set point

SOLUTION
Check cooling fan operation
Perform a factory reset using Parameter 48 —
PROGRAM SELECTION.
Either remove the EPM or perform a factory
reset (Parameter 48) to change the parameter
version of the EPM to match the parameter
version of the drive.
Check for loose electrical connections.
Check for faulty condenser fan motor.
Check Parameter P25 from Table 39 is set
correctly.
Restore factory defaults P48, see section
above. If that does not work, replace EPM.
Check line voltage — set P01 appropriately
Check serial connection (computer)
Check settings for PXX.
Check settings in communication software to
match PXX.
Check line voltage — set P01 appropriately
Reduce boost or increase acceleration values.
If unsuccessful, replace drive.
Check line voltage — set P01 appropriately
Check for dirty coils
Check for motor bearing failure
Check input power phasing

Consult factory
Check for proper set point
Check liquid line pressure

Start jumper is missing

Replace start jumper. See section above

Feedback signal is below set point and fan is at minimum
speed
Feedback or speed signal lost. Drive will operate at 57 Hz
until reset or loss of start command. Resetting requires
cycling start command (or power).

Check for proper set point
Check liquid line pressure
In stand alone mode: Check transducer wiring
and feedback voltage. Feedback voltage displayed on P-69. Pin 6 should be 5 v output.
Pin 5 (feedback) should be somewhere
between 0 and 5 v.

LEGEND
Electronic Programming Module
Lost Control Signal
Outside Equipment Manufacturer
Variable Frequency Drive

Table 39 — Motormaster® V Program Parameters for Operating Modes
PARAMETERS
P01
P02
P03
P04
P05
P06
P08
P09
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17
P19
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
P28
P29
P30
P31
P32
P33
P34
P35
P36
P37
P38
P39
P40
P41
P42
P43
P44
P45
P46
P47
P48
P61
P62
P63
P64
P65
P66
P67
P68

DESCRIPTION
Line Voltage: 01 = low line, 02 = high line
Carrier Freq: 01 = 4 kHz, 02 = 6 kHz, 03 = 8 kHz
Startup mode: flying restart
Stop mode: coast to stop
Standard Speed source: 01= keypad,
04=4-20mA (NO PI), 05= R22, 06=R134a
TB-14 output: 01 = none
TB-30 output: 01 = none
TB-31 Output: 01 = none
TB-13A function sel: 01 = none
TB-13B function sel: 01 = none
TB-13C function sel: 01 = none
TB-15 output: 01 = none
Control: 01 = Terminal strip
Serial link: 02 = enabled 9600,8,N,2 with timer
Units editing: 02 = whole units
Rotation: 01 = forward only, 03 = reverse only
Acceleration time: 10 sec
Deceleration time: 10 sec
DC brake time: 0
DC BRAKE VOLTAGE 0%
Min freq = 8 Hz ~ 100 – 160 rpm
Max freq
Current limit: (%)
Motor overload: 100
Base freq: 60 or 50 Hz
Fixed boost: 0.5% at low frequencies
Accel boost: 0%
Slip compensation: 0%
Preset spd #1: speed if loss of control signal
Preset spd #2: 0
Preset spd #3: 0
Preset spd 4 default — R22 set point.
TB12-2 open
Preset spd 5 default — R134a set point.
TB12-2 closed
Preset spd 6 default
Preset spd 7 default
Skip bandwidth
Speed scaling
Frequency scaling 50 or 60 Hz
Load scaling: default (not used so NA)
Accel/decel #2: default (not used so NA)
Serial address
Password:111
Speed at min signal: 8 Hz; used when PID
mode is disabled and 4-20mA input is at 4 mA
Speed at max feedback: 60 or 50 Hz. Used
when PID disabled and 4-20mA input is at 20 mA
Clear history? 01 = maintain. (set to 02 to clear)
Program selection: Program 1 – 12
PI Mode: 05= reverse, 0-5V, 01 = no PID
Min feedback = 0 (0V *10)
Max feedback = 50 (5V * 10)
Proportional gain = 4%
Integral gain = .2
PI acell/decel (set point change filter) = 5
Min alarm
Max alarm

LEGEND
NA — Not Applicable
PID — Proportional Integral Derivative
TB — Terminal Block

MODE
5
01
01
06
01

MODE
6
02
01
06
01

MODE
7
01
01
06
01

MODE
8
02
01
06
01

01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
02
01
10
10
0
0
8
60
125
100
60
0.5
0
0
57
0
0

01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
02
01
10
10
0
0
8
60
110
100
60
0.5
0
0
57
0
0

01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
02
01
10
10
0
0
8
50
125
100
50
0.5
0
0
47
0
0

01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
02
01
10
10
0
0
8
50
110
100
50
0.5
0
0
47
0
0

18.0

12.6

0
0
0
0
60
200
60
1
111

0
0
0
0
50
200
60
1
111

01
05
01
0
50
4
.2
5
0
0

01
06
01
0
50
4
.2
5
0
0

01
07
01
0
50
4
.2
5
0
0

01
08
01
0
50
4
.2
5
0
0

uncommon for actual pump duty to be different than what was
anticipated at time of selection. In many cases, it may be desirable to make some field modifications to obtain optimum
pump performance.
Before any pump modifications are made, it is recommended that actual pump performance be verified and compared to
the applicable pump curve. See base unit installation instructions. This can be done in a variety of ways:
1. If pump impeller diameter is known:
a. Connect a differential pressure gage across the
pump at the ports provided on the pump volutes.
b. Read GPM from applicable impeller curve.
2. If pump impeller diameter is not known:
If pump impeller diameter has been trimmed and the size
is not known, it is necessary to determine which impeller
curve to read.
The easiest way to confirm pump performance is to
“dead-head” the pump and read the differential pressure
across the pressure ports on the pump. “Dead-heading”
can be done by shutting the circuit setter valve on the discharge side of the pump.
NOTE: Although not all pumps can be safely “deadheaded”, centrifugal pumps (such as on the 30RAP units)
can be “dead-headed” for short amounts of time. It is recommended to keep the time short due to excessive heat
build-up in the pump.
Since the “dead-head” condition is a no-flow condition,
the head will correspond to the intersection of an impeller curve with the vertical axis of the pump chart. The
correct impeller diameter is that which corresponds to the
measured head.
3. Once the impeller diameter is known, proceed as in
Step 1.
4. Water flow rate can be determined by using a differential
pressure gage with the Bell & Gossett circuit setter balance valve calculator. (This information is also provided
in the installation instructions.) This method will not directly measure pressure differential seen by the pump, but
can be used to “double-check” the pump measurement.
5. Verify that cable connections at the switch and at the terminal block are secure.
6. For factory-installed hydronic system, verify that:
• All air has been purged from the system.
• Circuit setter balance valve has been correctly set.
7. Pump impeller has been improperly trimmed and is not
providing sufficient flow.
8. Wrong pump motor rotation. Pump must rotate clockwise
when viewed from motor end of pump.
PUMP MODIFICATIONS AND IMPELLER TRIMMING
— See applicable section in the Installation instructions.
RESET OF CHILLER WATER FLOW — See applicable section in the Installation instructions.
CHANGING OF PUMP SEALS — See Bell & Gossett service instruction manual provided with the hydronic package.

WARNING
Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut
off all power to this equipment during installation. There
may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all disconnect locations to alert others not to restore power until work
is completed.
1. Check that all power to unit is off. Carefully disconnect
all wires from the defective module by unplugging its
connectors.
2. Remove the defective module by removing its mounting
screws with a Phillips screwdriver, and removing the
module from the control box. Save the screws later use.
3. Verify that the instance jumper (MBB) or address switches (all other modules) exactly match the settings of the
defective module.
NOTE: Handle boards by mounting standoffs only to
avoid electrostatic discharge.
4. Package the defective module in the carton of the new
module for return to Carrier.
5. Mount the new module in the unit’s control box using a
Phillips screwdriver and the screws saved in Step 2.
6. Reinstall all module connectors. For accessory Navigator
replacement, make sure the plug is installed at TB3 in the
LEN connector.
7. Carefully check all wiring connections before restoring
power.
8. Verify the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch
is in the OFF position.
9. Restore control power. Verify that all module red LEDs
blink in unison. Verify that all green LEDs are blinking
and that the scrolling marquee or Navigator™ display is
communicating correctly.
10. Verify all configuration information, settings, set points
and schedules. Return the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE
CONTACT switch to its previous position.
Table 40 — Replacement Modules
MODULE
Main Base
Board (MBB)
Scrolling
Marquee
Display
Energy
Management
Module
(EMM)
Navigator
Display
EXV
AUX

REPLACEMENT
PART NO. (with
Software)

REPLACEMENT PART
NO. (without Software)

30RA502134

HK50AA029

HK50AA031

HK50AA030

30GT515218

HK50AA028

HK50AA033

N/A

30GT515217
32GB500442E

HK50AA026
N/A

Hydronic Package — If the unit is equipped with a

factory-installed hydronic package, consult the information below for proper maintenance and service. In addition to this
information, each factory-installed hydronic package is supplied with a packet of information supplied by the manufacturer, Bell & Gossett. Carrier Corporation strongly recommends
that this information be thoroughly reviewed prior to operation
of the chiller.
PUMP PERFORMANCE CHECK — The factory-installed
pumps in the 30RAP units are shipped with a single impeller
size available for that pump. The pump was selected based on
the flow and head requirements as provided to Carrier. It is not

MAINTENANCE
Recommended Maintenance Schedule — The fol-

lowing are only recommended guidelines. Jobsite conditions
may dictate that maintenance schedule is performed more often
than recommended.
Routine:
For machines with e-coat condenser coils:
• Periodic clean water rinse, especially in coastal and
industrial applications.

core face. Reduce pressure and use caution to prevent
damage to air centers.

• Check condenser coils for debris, clean as necessary.
Every month:
• Check moisture indicating sight glass for possible refrigerant loss and presence of moisture.
Every 3 months (for all machines):
• Check refrigerant charge.
• Check all refrigerant joints and valves for refrigerant
leaks, repair as necessary.
• Check chilled water flow switch operation.
• Check all condenser fans for proper operation.
• Check compressor oil level.
Every 12 months (for all machines):
• Check all electrical connections, tighten as necessary.
• Inspect all contactors and relays, replace as necessary.
• Check accuracy of thermistors, replace if greater than
± 2° F (1.2° C) variance from calibrated thermometer.
• Obtain and test an oil sample. Change oil only if
necessary.
• Check to be sure that the proper concentration of antifreeze is present in the chilled water loop, if applicable.
• Verify that the chilled water loop is properly treated.
• Check refrigerant filter driers for excessive pressure
drop, replace as necessary.
• Check chilled water strainers, clean as necessary.
• Check cooler heater operation, if equipped.
• Check condition of condenser fan blades and that they
are securely fastened to the motor shaft.
• Perform Service Test to confirm operation of all
components.
• Check for excessive cooler approach (Leaving Chilled
Water Temperature — Saturated Suction Temperature)
which may indicate fouling. Clean cooler vessel if
necessary.

CAUTION
Excessive water pressure will fracture the braze between
air centers and refrigerant tubes.

TROUBLESHOOTING
Complete Unit Stoppage and Restart — Possible causes for unit stoppage and reset methods are shown below and in Table 41. Refer to Fig. 3-7 for component arrangement and control wiring diagrams.
GENERAL POWER FAILURE — After power is restored,
restart is automatic through normal MBB start-up.
UNIT ENABLE-OFF-REMOTE CONTACT SWITCH IS
OFF — When the switch is OFF, the unit will stop immediately. Place the switch in the ENABLE position for local switch
control or in the REMOTE CONTACT position for control
through remote contact closure.
CHILLED FLUID PROOF-OF-FLOW SWITCH OPEN —
After the problem causing the loss of flow has been corrected,
reset is manual by resetting the alarm with the scrolling marquee as shown in Table 42.
OPEN 24-V CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER(S) — Determine the cause of the failure and correct. Reset circuit breaker(s). Restart is automatic after MBB start-up cycle is
complete.
COOLING LOAD SATISFIED — Unit shuts down when
cooling load has been satisfied. Unit restarts when required to
satisfy leaving fluid temperature set point.
THERMISTOR FAILURE — If a thermistor fails in either an
open or shorted condition, the unit will be shut down. Replace
EWT, LWT, or OAT as required. Unit restarts automatically,
but must be reset manually by resetting the alarm with the
scrolling marquee as shown in Table 42.

Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX) Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning
Recommendations
CAUTION

CAUTION

Do not apply any chemical cleaners to MCHX condenser
coils. These cleaners can accelerate corrosion and damage
the coil.

If unit stoppage occurs more than once as a result of any of
the safety devices listed, determine and correct cause
before attempting another restart.

Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain
proper operation of the unit. Elimination of contamination and
removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the
coil and extend the life of the unit. The following steps should
be taken to clean MCHX condenser coils:
1. Remove any foreign objects or debris attached to the
coreface or trapped within the mounting frame and
brackets.
2. Put on personal protective equipment including safety
glasses and/or face shield, waterproof clothing and
gloves. It is recommended to use full coverage clothing.
3. Start high pressure water sprayer and purge any soap or
industrial cleaners from sprayer before cleaning condenser coils. Only clean, potable water is authorized for cleaning condenser coils.
4. Clean condenser face by spraying the core steady and
uniformly from top to bottom while directing the spray
straight toward the core. Do not exceed 900 psig or 30 degree angle. The nozzle must be at least 12 in. from the

LOW SATURATED SUCTION — Several conditions can
lead to low saturated suction alarms and the chiller controls
have several override modes built in which will attempt to keep
the chiller from shutting down. Low fluid flow, low refrigerant
charge and plugged filter driers are the main causes for this
condition. To avoid permanent damage and potential freezing
of the system, do NOT repeatedly reset these alert and/or alarm
conditions without identifying and correcting the cause(s).
COMPRESSOR SAFETIES — The 30RAP units with ComfortLink™ controls include a compressor protection board that
protects the operation of each of the compressors. Each board
senses the presence or absence of current to each compressor.
If there is a command for a compressor to run and there is
no current, then one of the following safeties or conditions
have turned the compressor off:
Compressor Overcurrent — All compressors have internal
line breaks or a motor protection device located in the compressor electrical box.
Compressor Short Circuit — There will not be current if the
compressor circuit breaker that provides short circuit protection
has tripped.
Compressor Motor Over Temperature — The internal linebreak or over temperature switch has opened.
64

High-Pressure Switch Trip — The high pressure switch has
opened. Below are the factory settings for the fixed high pressure switch.
30RAP UNIT
SIZE
010-060

CUTOUT
psig
650

reset automatically before the motor protector resets, which
may take up to 2 hours.
High Discharge Gas Temperature Protection — Units
equipped with digital compressors have an additional thermistor located on the discharge line, If discharge temperature exceeds 265 F (129.4 C), the digital compressor will be shut off.
Alarms will also occur if the current sensor board malfunctions or is not properly connected to its assigned digital input. If
the compressor is commanded OFF and the current sensor
reads ON, an alert is generated. This will indicate that a compressor contactor has failed closed. In this case, a special mode,
Compressor Stuck on Control, will be enabled and all other
compressors will be turned off. An alarm will then be enabled
to indicate that service is required. Outdoor fans will continue
to operate. The first outdoor fan stage is turned on immediately.
The other stages of fan will be turned on as required by SCT.

CUT-IN
kPa
4482

psig
500

kPa
3447

ASTP Protection Trip — All non-digital Copeland compressors are equipped with an advanced scroll temperature protection (ASTP). A label located above the terminal box identifies
models that contain this technology. See Fig. 34.

Alarms and Alerts — These are warnings of abnormal
or fault conditions, and may cause either one circuit or the
whole unit to shut down. They are assigned code numbers as
described in Table 42.
Automatic alarms will reset without operator intervention if
the condition corrects itself. The following method must be
used to reset manual alarms:
Before resetting any alarm, first determine the cause of the
alarm and correct it. Enter the Alarms mode indicated by the
LED on the side of the scrolling marquee display. Press
until the sub-menu item RCRN “RESET
ENTER and
ALL CURRENT ALARMS” is displayed. Press ENTER .
The control will prompt the user for a password, by displaying
PASS and WORD. Press ENTER to display the default password, 1111. Press ENTER for each character. If the password
has been changed, use the arrow keys to change each individual character. Toggle the display to “YES” and press ENTER .
The alarms will be reset.

Recommended Cooling Time
(Minutes)

Fig. 34 — Advanced Scroll Temperature
Protection Label
Advanced scroll temperature protection is a form of internal discharge temperature protection that unloads the scroll
compressor when the internal temperature reaches approximately 300 F. At this temperature, an internal bi-metal disk
valve opens and causes the scroll elements to separate, which
stops compression. Suction and discharge pressures balance
while the motor continues to run. The longer the compressor
runs unloaded, the longer it must cool before the bi-metal disk
resets. See Fig. 35 for approximate reset times.
To manually reset ASTP, the compressor should be stopped
and allowed to cool. If the compressor is not stopped, the motor
will run until the motor protector trips, which occurs up to
90 minutes later. Advanced scroll temperature protection will

120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0

Compressor Unloaded Run Time (Minutes)
*Times are approximate.
NOTE: Various factors, including high humidity, high ambient temperature,
and the presence of a sound blanket will increase cool-down times.

Fig. 35 — Recommended Minimum Cool Down Time After Compressor is Stopped*
65

Table 41 — Troubleshooting
SYMPTOMS
Cooler Circulating Pump Does
Not Run

CAUSE
Power line open
Control fuse or circuit breaker open

REMEDY
Reset circuit breaker.
Check control circuit for ground or short. Reset breaker and
replace fuse.
Check the controls. Find the cause of trip and reset breaker.
Check connections.
Check wiring and rewire if necessary.
Check line voltage — determine location of
voltage drop and remedy deficiency.
Check motor winding for open or short.
Replace compressor if necessary.
Replace pump.
Repair leak and recharge.

Tripped power breaker
Loose terminal connection
Improperly wired controls
Low line voltage
Pump motor defective

Compressor Cycles
Off on Loss of Charge
Compressor Cycles Off on Cooler
Freeze Protection
Compressor Shuts Down on
High-Pressure Control

Unit Operates Too Long
or Continuously

Unusual or Loud System
Noises

Pump seized
Low refrigerant charge
Thermistor failure
System load was reduced faster than controller could
remove stages
High-pressure control acting erratically
Noncondensables in system
Condenser dirty
Fans not operating
System overcharged with refrigerant
Low refrigerant charge
Control contacts fused
Partially plugged or plugged expansion valve or filter drier
Defective insulation
Damaged compressor
Piping vibration
Compressor noisy

Compressor Loses Oil

Hot Liquid Line
Frosted Liquid Line
Frosted Suction Line

Freeze-Up

Leak in system
Mechanical damage (Failed seals or broken scrolls)
Oil trapped in line
Shortage of refrigerant due to leak
Restricted filter drier
Expansion valve admitting excess refrigerant (note: this is a
normal condition for brine applications)
Stuck EXV
Improper charging

System not drained for winter shutdown
Loose Thermistor

Replace thermistor.
Unit will restart after fluid temperature rises back into the
control band. Avoid rapidly removing system load.
Replace control.
Evacuate and recharge.
Clean condenser.
Repair or replace if defective.
Reduce charge.
Add refrigerant.
Replace control.
Clean or replace as needed.
Replace or repair as needed.
Check compressor and replace if necessary.
Support piping as required.
Check for loose pipe connections or damaged compressor
Replace compressor (worn bearings).
Check for loose compressor holddown bolts.
Repair leak.
Replace compressor.
Check piping for oil traps.
Repair leak and recharge.
Replace filter drier.
Replace valve if defective.
Replace valve if defective.
Make sure a full quantity of fluid is flowing through the cooler
while charging, and suction pressure in cooler is equal to or
greater than pressure corresponding to 32 F (0° C).
Recommended that system be filled with an appropriate glycol mixture to prevent freezing of pumps and fluid tubing.
Verify thermistors are fully inserted in wells.

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes
ALARM/
ALERT
CODE

ALARM
OR
ALERT

DESCRIPTION

WHY WAS THIS
ALARM
GENERATED?

ACTION TAKEN
BY CONTROL

RESET
METHOD

PROBABLE
CAUSE

Compressor feedback signal
does not match relay state

Compressor A1 shut
down.

Manual

High-pressure switch open,
faulty CSB, loss of condenser
air, filter drier plugged, noncondensables, operation
beyond capability.

T051

Alert

Circuit A, Compressor 1
Failure

A051

Alarm

Circuit A, Compressor 1
Failure

Respective current sensor
board (CSB) feedback signal
is ON when the compressor
should be off

Unit shut down

Manual

Welded compressor contactor, CSB wiring error.

T052

Alert

Circuit A, Compressor 2
Failure

Compressor feedback signal
does not match relay state

Compressor A2 shut
down.

Manual

High-pressure switch open,
faulty CSB, loss of condenser
air, filter drier plugged, noncondensables, operation
beyond capability.

A052

Alarm

Circuit A, Compressor 2
Failure

Respective current sensor
board (CSB) feedback signal
is ON when the compressor
should be off

Unit shut down

Manual

Welded compressor contactor, CSB wiring error.

T055

Alert

Circuit B, Compressor 1
Failure

Compressor feedback signal
does not match relay state

Compressor B1 shut
down.

Manual

High-pressure switch open,
faulty CSB, loss of condenser
air, filter drier plugged, noncondensables, operation
beyond capability.

A055

Alarm

Circuit B, Compressor 1
Failure

Respective current sensor
board (CSB) feedback signal
is ON when the compressor
should be off

Unit shut down

Manual

Welded compressor contactor, CSB wiring error.

T056

Alert

Circuit B, Compressor 2
Failure

Compressor feedback signal
does not match relay state

Compressor B2 shut
down.

Manual

High-pressure switch open,
faulty CSB, loss of condenser
air, filter drier plugged, noncondensables, operation
beyond capability.

A056

Alarm

Circuit B, Compressor 2
Failure

Respective current sensor
board (CSB) feedback signal
is ON when the compressor
should be off

Unit shut down

Manual

Welded compressor contactor, CSB wiring error.

A060

Alarm

Cooler Leaving Fluid
Thermistor Failure

Thermistor outside range of
–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Chiller shut down
immediately

failure, damaged
Automatic Thermistor
cable/wire or wiring error.

A061

Alarm

Cooler Entering Fluid
Thermistor Failure

Thermistor outside range of
–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Chiller shut down
immediately

failure, damaged
Automatic Thermistor
cable/wire or wiring error.

T068

None

Circuit A Return Gas Thermistor Failure

If return gas sensors are
enabled (RG.EN) and
thermistor is outside range of
–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Circuit A shut down

Thermistor failure, damaged
Automatic cable/wire or wiring error.

T069

None

Circuit B Return Gas Thermistor Failure

If return gas sensors are
enabled (RG.EN) and
thermistor is outside range of
–40 to 245 F –40 to 118 C)

Circuit B shut down

failure, damaged
Automatic Thermistor
cable/wire or wiring error.

T073

Alert

Outside Air Thermistor
Failure

Thermistor outside range of
–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Temperature reset
disabled. Chiller runs
under normal control/set
points. When capacity
reaches 0, cooler/pump
heaters are energized.

T074

Alert

Space Temperature/Dual Chiller
Thermistor Failure

Thermistor outside range of
–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Temperature reset
disabled. Chiller runs
under normal control/set
points.

Automatic Thermistor failure, damaged
cable/wire or wiring error.

T077

Alert

Circuit A Saturated
Suction Temperature
exceeds Cooler Leaving
Fluid Temperature

Faulty expansion valve,
suction pressure transducer
or leaving fluid thermistor.

Circuit A shutdown after
pumpdown complete.

Faulty expansion valve or
suction pressure transducer
Automatic or leaving fluid
thermistor.

T078

Alert

Circuit B Saturated
Suction Temperature
exceeds Cooler Leaving
Fluid Temperature

Faulty expansion valve,
suction pressure transducer
or leaving fluid thermistor.

Circuit B shutdown after
pumpdown complete

Faulty expansion valve or
pressure transducer
Automatic suction
or leaving fluid
thermistor.

T079

Alert

Lead/Lag LWT
Thermistor Failure

Thermistor outside range of
–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Chiller runs as a stand
alone machine

Dual LWT thermistor failure,
Automatic damaged cable/wire or
wiring error.

T090

Alert

Circuit A Discharge
Pressure Transducer Failure

Outside of range (0 to
667 psig)

Circuit A shut down

Transducer failure, poor
Automatic connection to MBB, or wiring
damage/error.

T091

Alert

Circuit B Discharge
Pressure Transducer Failure

Outside of range (0 to
667 psig)

Circuit B shut down

Transducer failure, poor
Automatic connection to MBB, or wiring
damage/error.

T092

Alert

Circuit A Suction
Pressure Transducer Failure

Outside of range (0 to 420
psig)

Circuit A shut down

Transducer failure, poor
Automatic connection to MBB, or wiring
damage/error.

T093

Alert

Circuit B Suction
Pressure Transducer
Failure

Outside of range (0 to
420 psig)

Circuit B shut down

Transducer failure, poor
Automatic connection to MBB, or wiring
damage/error.

T094

Alert

Discharge Gas
Thermistor Failure

Discharge thermistor (DTT) is
either open or shorted

Digital compressor shut
down.

failure, damaged
Automatic Thermistor
cable/wire or wiring error.

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)
ALARM/
ALERT
CODE

ALARM
OR
ALERT

T110

Alert

Circuit A Loss of Charge

If the compressors are off
and discharge pressure
reading is < 26 psig for
30 sec.

Circuit not allowed to
start.

Manual

Refrigerant leak or
transducer failure

T111

Alert

Circuit B Loss of Charge

If the compressors are off
and discharge pressure
reading is < 26 psig for
30 sec.

Circuit not allowed to
start.

Manual

Refrigerant leak or
transducer failure

T112

Alert

Circuit A High Saturated
Suction Temperature

Circuit saturated suction
temperature pressure
transducer > 70 F (21.1 C)
for 5 minutes

Circuit shut down

Manual

Faulty Expansion valve,
faulty suction pressure
transducer or high entering
fluid temperature.

T113

Alert

Circuit B High Saturated
Suction Temperature

Circuit saturated suction
temperature pressure
transducer > 70 F (21.1 C)
for 5 minutes

Circuit shut down

Manual

Faulty Expansion valve,
faulty suction pressure
transducer or high entering
fluid temperature.

T114

Alert

Circuit A Low Suction
Superheat

Suction superheat is
less than 5° F (2.8 C) for 5
minutes.

T115

Alert

Circuit B Low Suction
Superheat

Suction superheat is
less than 5° F (2.8 C) for 5
minutes.

T116

Alert

Circuit A Low Cooler
Suction Temperature

Mode 7 caused the compressor to unload 6 consecutive times with less than a
Circuit shut down
30-minute interval between
each circuit shutdown.

T117

Alert

Circuit B Low Cooler
Suction Temperature

Mode 8 caused the compressor to unload 6 consecutive times with less than a
Circuit shut down
30-minute interval between
each circuit shutdown.

T118

Alert

High Discharge Gas
Temperature Alert

Discharge Thermistor (DTT) Compressor A1 shut
reading is greater than 250 F down

A118

Alarm

High Discharge Gas
Temperature

3 Discharge Gas Temperature alarms occur within a
day

T126

Alert

DESCRIPTION

Circuit A High
Discharge Pressure

WHY WAS THIS
ALARM
GENERATED?

ACTION TAKEN
BY CONTROL

Compressor operation outside of operating envelope.

RESET
METHOD

PROBABLE
CAUSE

Circuit A shut down.

Automatic restart
after first daily
occurrence.
Manual restart
thereafter.

Faulty expansion valve,
faulty suction pressure
transducer, faulty suction gas
thermistor, circuit
overcharged

Circuit B shut down.

Automatic restart
after first daily
occurrence.
Manual restart
thereafter.

Faulty expansion valve,
faulty suction pressure
transducer, faulty suction
gas thermistor, circuit
overcharged

Compressor A1 shut
down

Manual

Faulty expansion valve, low
refrigerant charge, plugged
filter drier, faulty suction
pressure transducer, low
cooler fluid flow

Manual

Faulty expansion valve, low
refrigerant charge, plugged
filter drier, faulty suction
pressure transducer, low
cooler fluid flow

Automatic

Refrigerant charge, plugged
filter drier, head pressure
control.

Manual

Refrigerant charge, plugged
filter drier, head pressure
control.

Circuit shut down

Automatic, only
after first 3 daily
occurrences.
Manual reset
thereafter. Reading from OAT sensor must drop 5 F
(2.8 C) before
restart

Faulty transducer/high
pressure switch, low/
restricted condenser
airflow

Circuit shut down

Automatic, only
after first 3 daily
occurrences. Manual reset thereafter.
Reading from OAT
sensor must drop
5 F (2.8 C) before
restart

Faulty transducer/high
pressure switch, low/
restricted condenser
airflow

Circuit shut down

Automatic
restart after first
daily occurrence.
Manual restart
thereafter.

Faulty or sticking EXV, low
refrigerant charge, plugged
filter drier.

Alert

Circuit B High
Discharge Pressure

Compressor operation outside of operating envelope.

Alert

Circuit A Low Suction
Pressure

Suction pressure below
34 psig for 8 seconds or
below 23 psig

T134

Alert

Circuit B Low Suction
Pressure

Suction pressure below
34 psig for 8 seconds or
below 23 psig

Circuit shut down

Automatic
restart after first
daily occurrence.
Manual restart
thereafter.

A140

Alert

Reverse Rotation
Detected

Incoming chiller power leads
not phased correctly

Chiller not allowed to
start.

Manual

Reverse any two incoming
power leads to correct. Check
for correct fan rotation first.

A150

Alarm

Emergency Stop

CCN emergency stop
command received

Chiller shutdown
without going through
pumpdown.

Automatic once
CCN command for
EMSTOP returns to
normal

CCN Network
command.

A151

Alarm

Illegal Configuration

One or more illegal
configurations exists.

Chiller is not allowed to
start.

Manual once
configuration errors
are corrected

Configuration error.
Check unit settings.

Alarm

Unit Down Due to
Failure

Both circuits are down due
to alarms/alerts.

Chiller is unable
to run.

Automatic once
alarms/alerts are
cleared that prevent the chiller from
starting.

Alarm notifies user
that chiller is 100%
down.

T127

T133

A152

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)
ALARM/
ALERT
CODE

ALARM
OR
ALERT

WHY WAS THIS
ALARM
GENERATED?

ACTION TAKEN
BY CONTROL

RESET
METHOD

T153

Alert

Real Time Clock
Hardware Failure

Internal clock on MBB fails

Occupancy schedule
will not be used. Chiller
defaults to Local On
mode.

Automatic when
correct clock control
restarts.

Time/Date/Month/
Day/Year not
properly set.

A154

Alarm

Serial EEPROM
Hardware Failure

Hardware failure with MBB

Chiller is unable
to run.

Manual

Main Base Board
failure.

T155

Alert

Serial EEPROM
Storage Failure

Configuration/storage
failure with MBB

No Action

Manual

Potential failure of
MBB. Download
current operating
software. Replace
MBB if error occurs
again.

A156

Alarm

Critical Serial EEPROM
Storage Failure

Configuration/storage
failure with MBB

Chiller is not allowed
to run.

Manual

Main Base Board
failure.

A157

Alarm

A/D Hardware Failure

Hardware failure with
peripheral device

Chiller is not allowed
to run.

Manual

Main Base Board
failure.

A172

Alarm

Loss of Communication
with EXV Board

MBB loses communication
with EXV board

Chiller is not allowed
to run.

Automatic

Wiring error, faulty
wiring or failed
EXV board.

Automatic

Wiring error, faulty
wiring or failed
Energy Management Module (EMM).

Automatic

Faulty signal
generator, wiring
error, or faulty EMM.

Automatic

Wiring error, faulty
wiring or failed
AUX board.

DESCRIPTION

PROBABLE
CAUSE

T173

Alert

Loss of Communication
with EMM

MBB loses communication
with EMM

4 to 20 mA
temperature reset
disabled. Demand
Limit set to 100%. 4 to
20 mA set point
disabled.

T174

Alert

4 to 20 mA Cooling Set
Point Input Failure

If configured with EMM and
input less than 2 mA or
greater than 22 mA

Set point function
disabled. Chiller
controls to CSP1.

T175

Alert

Loss of Communication
with the AUX Board

MBB loses communication
with AUX Board.

T176

Alert

4 to 20 mA
Temperature Reset
Input Failure

If configured with EMM
and input less than 2 mA or
greater than 22 mA

Reset function
disabled. Chiller
returns to normal set
point control.

Automatic

Faulty signal
generator, wiring
error, or faulty EMM.

Alert

4 to 20 mA Demand
Limit Input Failure

If configured with EMM and
input less than 2 mA or
greater than 22 mA

Demand limit function
disabled. Chiller
returns to 100%
demand limit
control.

Automatic

Faulty signal
generator, wiring
error, or faulty EMM.

Both pump outputs
are turned off.

Manual

Wiring error, faulty
pump contactor
auxiliary contacts.

T177

A189

Alarm

Cooler Pump Auxiliary
Contact Inputs Miswired

Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts
are closed when Pump 2
output is energized or if
Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts
are closed when Pump 1
output is energized.

T190

Alert

Cooler Pump 1 Aux
Contacts Failed to Close
at Start-Up

Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts
did not close within
26 seconds after pump
was started

Pump 1 turned off.
Pump 2 will be started
if available.

Manual

Wiring error, faulty
contacts on pump
contactor

T191

Alert

Cooler Pump 2 Aux
Contacts Failed to Close
at Start-Up

Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts
did not close within
26 seconds after pump
was started

Pump 2 turned off.
Pump 1 will be started
if available.

Manual

Wiring error, faulty
contacts on pump
contactor

T192

Alert

Cooler Pump 1 Failed
to Provide Flow at
Start-Up

Pump 1 did not provide
flow to close flow switch
within 60 seconds

Pump 1 turned off.
Pump 2 will be started
if available.

Manual

Wiring error, pump
circuit breaker
tripped, contactor
failure

T193

Alert

Cooler Pump 2 Failed
to Provide Flow at
Start-Up

Pump 2 did not provide
flow to close flow switch
within 60 seconds

Pump 1 turned off.
Pump 2 will be started
if available.

Manual

Wiring error, pump
circuit breaker
tripped, contactor
failure

T194

Alert

Cooler Pump 1 Aux
Contacts Opened
During Normal
Operation

Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts
open for 26 seconds after
initially made. All
compressors shut down.
Pump 1 turned off.

Pump 2 will be started
if available. Chiller
allowed to run if
Pump 2 successfully
starts.

Manual

Wiring error, faulty
contacts on pump
contactor

Alert

Cooler Pump 2 Aux
Contacts Opened
During Normal
Operation

Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts
open for 26 seconds after
initially made. All
compressors shut down.
Pump 2 turned off.

Pump 1 will be started
if available. Chiller
allowed to run if
Pump 1 successfully
starts.

Manual

Wiring error, faulty
contacts on pump
contactor

Cooler flow switch contacts
open for 3 seconds after
initially made

All compressors
shut down. Pump 1
turned off. Pump 2 will
be started if available.
Chiller allowed to run if
Pump 2 successfully
starts and flow switch
is closed.

Manual

Wiring error, pump
circuit breaker
tripped, contactor
failure

T195

T196

Alert

Flow Lost While Pump 1
Running

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)
ALARM/
ALERT
CODE

ALARM
OR
ALERT

DESCRIPTION

WHY WAS THIS
ALARM
GENERATED?

ACTION TAKEN
BY CONTROL

RESET
METHOD

Manual

PROBABLE
CAUSE

T197

Alert

Flow Lost While Pump 2
Running

Cooler flow switch contacts
open for 3 seconds after
initially made

All compressors shut
down. Pump 2 turned
off. Pump 1 will be
started if available.
Chiller allowed to run if
Pump 1 successfully
starts and flow switch
is closed.

T198

Alert

Cooler Pump 1 Aux
Contacts Closed While
Pump Off

Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts
closed for 26 seconds
when pump state is off

Chiller not allowed to
start

Automatic when
aux contacts open

Wiring error, faulty
pump contactor
(welded contacts)

T199

Alert

Cooler Pump 2 Aux
Contacts Closed While
Pump Off

Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts
closed for 26 seconds
when pump state is off

Chiller not allowed to
start

Automatic when
aux contacts open

Wiring error, faulty
pump contactor
(welded contacts)

T200

Alert

Cooler Flow/Interlock
Contacts Failed to Close
at Start-Up

Cooler flow switch contacts
failed to close within
1 minute (if cooler pump
control is enabled) or
within 5 minutes (if cooler
pump control is not
enabled) after start-up

Chiller not allowed to
start. For models with
dual pumps, the
second pump will be
started if available

Manual

Wiring error, pump
circuit breaker
tripped, contactor
failure, faulty flow
switch or interlock

A201

Alarm

Cooler Flow/Interlock
Contacts Opened
During Normal
Operation

Flow switch opens for at
least 3 seconds after
being initially closed

All compressors shut
down. For models with
dual pumps, the
second pump will be
started if available

Manual

Cooler pump failure,
faulty flow switch or
interlock, pump
circuit breaker
tripped

A202

Alarm

Cooler Pump Interlock
Closed When Pump is
Off

If configured for cooler
pump control and flow
switch input is closed for
5 minutes while pump
output(s) are off

Chiller shut down

Dual chiller control
disabled. Chiller runs
as a stand-alone
machine.

Automatic

Wiring error, faulty
wiring, failed Slave
chiller MBB module,
power loss at slave
chiller, wrong slave
address.

Automatic

Wiring error, faulty
wiring, failed master
chiller MBB module,
power loss at Master
chiller.

Automatic

CCN Address for
both chillers is the
same. Must be
different. Check
CCN.A under the
OPT2 sub-mode in
Configuration at both
chillers.

Automatic

Building load greater
than unit capacity,
low water/brine flow
or compressor fault.
Check for other
alarms/alerts.

T203

Alert

Loss of Communication
with Slave Chiller

Master chiller MBB
loses communication
with slave chiller MBB

T204

Alert

Loss of Communication
with Master Chiller

Slave chiller MBB loses
communication with
master chiller MBB

Dual chiller control
disabled. Chiller runs
as a stand-alone
machine

T205

T206

Automatic when
aux contacts open

Alert

Master and Slave Chiller
with Same Address

Master and slave chiller
have the same CCN
address (CCN.A)

Dual chiller routine
disabled. Master/slave
run as stand-alone
chillers.

Alert

High Leaving Chilled
Water Temperature

LWT read is greater than
LCW Alert Limit, Total
capacity is 100% and LWT
is greater than LWT
reading one minute ago

Alert only. No action
taken.

Both EWT and LWT
must be at least 6 F
(3.3 C) above Brine
Freeze point
(BR.FZ).
Automatic for first,
Manual reset thereafter.
Manual

Wiring error, pump
circuit breaker
tripped, contactor
failure

Wiring error, faulty
pump contactor
(welded contacts)

A207

Alarm

Cooler Freeze
Protection

Cooler EWT or LWT is less
than Brine Freeze (BR.FZ)

Chiller shutdown
without going through
pumpdown. Cooler
pump continues to
run a minimum of
5 minutes (if control
enabled).

A208

Alarm

EWT or LWT
Thermistor failure

Cooler EWT is less than
LWT by 3° F (1.7° C) for
1 minute after a circuit is
started

Chiller shutdown.
Cooler pump shut off
(if control enabled).

Cooler Pump 1
Scheduled
Maintenance Due

Pump 1 Service
Countdown (P.1.DN)
expired. Complete pump 1
maintenance and enter
'YES' for Pump 1
Maintenance Done
(P.1.MN) item.

None

Automatic

Routine pump
maintenance
required

Cooler Pump 2
Scheduled
Maintenance Due

Pump 2 Service
Countdown (P.2.DN)
expired. Complete pump 2
maintenance and
enter 'YES' for Pump 1
Maintenance Done
(P.2.MN) item.

None

Automatic

Routine pump
maintenance
required

T300

T301

Alert

Faulty thermistor,
low water flow.

Faulty cooler pump,
low water flow,
plugged fluid
strainer.

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)
ALARM/
ALERT
CODE

ALARM
OR
ALERT

DESCRIPTION

WHY WAS THIS
ALARM
GENERATED?

ACTION TAKEN
BY CONTROL

RESET
METHOD

PROBABLE
CAUSE

Alert

Strainer Blowdown
Scheduled
Maintenance Due

Strainer Service
Countdown (S.T.DN)
expired. Complete strainer
blowdown and enter 'YES'
for Strainer Maintenance
Done (S.T.MN) item.

None

Automatic

Routine strainer
maintenance
required

T303

Alert

Condenser Coil
Maintenance Due

Coil Service Countdown
(C.L.DN) expired.
Complete condenser coil
cleaning and enter 'YES'
for Coil Maintenance Done
(C.L.MN) item.

None

Automatic

Routine condenser
coil maintenance
required

T500

Alert

Current Sensor Board
A1 Failure

Alert occurs when CSB output is a constant high value

Compressor A1 shut
down

Automatic

CSB failure.
Wiring error.

T501

Alert

Current Sensor Board
A2 Failure

Alert occurs when CSB output is a constant high value

Compressor A2 shut
down

Automatic

CSB failure.
Wiring error.

T502

Alert

Current Sensor Board
A3 Failure

Alert occurs when CSB output is a constant high value

Compressor A3 shut
down

Automatic

CSB failure.
Wiring error.

T503

Alert

Current Sensor Board
B1 Failure

Alert occurs when CSB output is a constant high value

Compressor B1 shut
down

Automatic

CSB failure.
Wiring error.

T504

Alert

Current Sensor Board
B2 Failure

Alert occurs when CSB output is a constant high value

Compressor B2 shut
down

Automatic

CSB failure.
Wiring error.

T505

Alert

Current Sensor Board
B3 Failure

Alert occurs when CSB output is a constant high value

Compressor B3 shut
down

Automatic

CSB failure.
Wiring error.

T950

Alert

Loss of Communication
with Water System
Manager

No communications have
been received by the MBB
within 5 minutes of last
transmission

WSM forces removed.
Chiller runs under own
control

Automatic

Failed module, wiring
error, failed
transformer, loose
connection plug,
wrong address

T951

Alert

Loss of Communication
with Chillervisor System
Manager

No communications have
been received by the MBB
within 5 minutes of last
transmission

CSM forces removed.
Chiller runs under own
control

Automatic

Failed module, wiring
error, failed
transformer, loose
connection plug,
wrong address

T952

Alert

Loss of Communication
with Hydronic System
Manager

No communications have
been received by the MBB
within 5 minutes of last
transmission

HSM forces removed.
Chiller runs under own
control

Automatic

Failed module, wiring
error, failed
transformer, loose
connection plug,
wrong address

T302

CCN
CSB
EEPROM
EMM
EWT
EXV
HSM
LCW
LWT
MBB
OAT
SCT
WSM

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

LEGEND FOR TABLE 42
Carrier Comfort Network
Current Sensor Board
Electronic Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory
Energy Management Module
Entering Fluid Temperature
Electronic Expansion Valve
Hydronic System Manager
Leaving Chilled Water
Leaving Fluid Temperature
Main Base Board
Outdoor-Air Temperature
Saturated Condensing Temperature
Water System Manager

Low Refrigerant Charge — If the compressor operates for an
extended period of time with low refrigerant charge, the compressor ASTP device will open, which will cause the compressor to trip on its overload protection device.
Circuit Breaker Trip — The compressors are protected from
short circuit by a breaker in the control box.
Wiring Error — A wiring error might not allow the compressor to start.
To check out alerts T051-T056:
1. Turn on the compressor in question using Service Test
mode. If the compressor does not start, then most likely
the problem is one of the following: HPS open, open internal protection, circuit breaker trip, incorrect safety wiring, or incorrect compressor wiring.
2. If the compressor does start, verify it is rotating in the correct direction.

COMPRESSOR FAILURE ALERTS
T051, T052 (Circuit A Compresser Failures)
T055, T056 (Circuit B Compressor Failures) — Alert codes
051, 052, 055, and 056 are for compressors A1, A2, B1, and
B2 respectively. These alerts occur when the current sensor
(CS) does not detect compressor current during compressor operation. When this occurs, the control turns off the compressor.
If the current sensor board reads OFF while the compressor
relay has been commanded ON, an alert is generated.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Compressor Overload — Either the compressor internal overload protector is open or the external overload protector (Kriwan module) has activated. The external overload protector
modules are mounted in the compressor wiring junction box.
Temperature sensors embedded in the compressor motor windings are the inputs to the module. The module is powered with
24 vac from the units main control box. The module output is a
normally closed contact that is wired in series with the compressor contactor coil. In a compressor motor overload condition, contact opens, deenergizing the compressor contactor.

IMPORTANT: Prolonged operation in the wrong direction
can damage the compressor. Correct rotation can be verified by a gage set and looking for a differential pressure
rise on start-up.
71

of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C). Failure of this thermistor will
disable any elements of the control which requires its use. The
cause of the alert is usually a faulty thermistor in the T55, or
T58 device, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection.
T090 (Circuit A Discharge Pressure Transducer Failure)
T091 (Circuit B Discharge Pressure Transducer Failure) —
Alert codes 090 and 091 are for circuits A and B respectively.
These alerts occur when the pressure is outside the range of 0.0
to 667.0 psig. A circuit cannot run when this alert is active. Use
the scrolling marquee to reset the alert. The cause of the alert is
usually a faulty transducer, faulty 5-v power supply, or a loose
connection.
T092 (Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer Failure)
T093 (Circuit B Suction Pressure Transducer Failure)
—
Alert codes 092 and 093 are for circuits A and B respectively.
These alerts occur when the pressure is outside the range of 0.0
to 420.0 psig. A circuit cannot run when this alert is active. Use
the scrolling marquee to reset the alert. The cause of the alert is
usually a faulty transducer, faulty 5-v power supply, or a loose
connection.
T094 (Discharge Gas Thermistor Failure) — This alert occurs for units which have the digital compressor installed on
circuit A. If discharge gas temperature is open or shorted, the
circuit will be shutoff. The alert will reset itself when discharge
temperature is less than 250 F (121.1 C). The cause of the alert
is usually low refrigerant charge or a faulty thermistor.
T110 (Circuit A Loss of Charge)
T111 (Circuit B Loss of Charge) — Alert codes 110 and 111
are for circuits A and B respectively. These alerts occur when
the compressor is OFF and the discharge pressure is less than
26 psig.
T112 (Circuit A High Saturated Suction Temperature)
T113 (Circuit B High Saturated Suction Temperature) —
Alert codes 112 and 113 occur when compressors in a circuit
have been running for at least 5 minutes and the circuit saturated suction temperature is greater than 70 F (21.1 C). The high
saturated suction alert is generated and the circuit is shut down.
T114 (Circuit A Low Superheat)
T115 (Circuit B Low Superheat) — Alert codes 114 and 115
occur when the superheat of a circuit is less than 5 F (2.8 C) for
5 continuous minutes. The low superheat alert is generated and
the circuit is shut down.
T116 (Circuit A Low Cooler Suction Temperature)
T117 (Circuit B Low Cooler Suction Temperature) — Alert
codes 116 and 117 are for circuits A and B respectively. These
alerts are generated if the capacity stages are reduced three
times without a 30 minute interval between capacity reductions
due to operating mode 7 or mode 8.
T118 (High Discharge Gas Temperature Alert)
A118 (High Discharge Gas Temperature Alarm) — This
alert or alarm occurs for units which have the digital compressor installed on circuit A. If discharge gas temperature is greater than 268 F (131.1 C), the circuit will be shut off. The alert
will reset itself when discharge temperature is less than 250 F
(121.1 C). If this alert occurs 3 times within a day, the A118
alarm will be generated and the alarm must be reset manually.
The cause of the alert is usually low refrigerant charge or a
faulty thermistor.
T126 (Circuit A High Head Pressure)
T127 (Circuit B High Head Pressure) — Alert codes 126 and
127 are for circuits A and B respectively. These alerts occur
when the appropriate saturated condensing temperature is
greater than the operating envelope shown in Fig 14. Prior to
the alert, the control will shut down one compressor on a circuit
if that circuit's saturated condensing temperature is greater than
the maximum SCT minus 5° F (2.7° C). If SCT continues to

IMPORTANT: If the CS is always detecting current, verify
that the compressor is on. If the compressor is on, check
the contactor and the relay on the MBB. If the compressor
is off and there is no current, verify the CSB wiring and
replace if necessary.
IMPORTANT: Return to Normal mode and observe compressor operation to verify that compressor current sensor
is working and condenser fans are energized.
COMPRESSOR STUCK ON FAILURE ALARMS
Circuit A A051, A052
Circuit B A055, A056 — Alarm codes 051, 052, 055, and
056 are for compressors A1, A2, B1, and B2. These alarms occur when the CSB detects current when the compressor should
be off. When this occurs, the control turns off the compressor.
If the current sensor board reads ON while the compressor
relay has been commanded OFF for a period of 4 continuous
seconds, an alarm is generated. These alarms are only monitored for a period of 10 seconds after the compressor relay has
been commanded OFF. This is done to facilitate a service technician forcing a relay to test a compressor.
In addition, if a compressor stuck failure occurs and the current sensor board reports the compressor and the request off,
certain diagnostics will take place as follows:
1. If any of the compressors are diagnosed as stuck on and
the current sensor board is on and the request is off, the
control will command the condenser fans to maintain
normal head pressure.
2. The control will shut-off all other compressors.
The possible causes include welded contactor or frozen
compressor relay on the MBB.
To check out alarms A051-A056:
1. Place the unit in Service Test mode. All compressors
should be off.
2. Verify that there is not 24-v at the contactor coil. If there
is 24 v at the contactor, check relay on MBB and wiring.
3. Check for welded contactor.
4. Verify CSB wiring.
5. Return to Normal mode and observe compressor operation to verify that compressor current sensor is working
and condenser fans are energized.
A060 (Cooler Leaving Fluid Thermistor Failure) — The
sensor reading is outside the range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to
118 C) then the alarm will occur. The cause of the alarm is usually a faulty thermistor, a shorted or open thermistor caused by
a wiring error, or a loose connection. Failure of this thermistor
will shut down the entire unit.
A061 (Cooler Entering Thermistor Failure) — If the sensor
reading is outside the range of –40 to 240 F (–40 to116 C) then
the alarm will occur. The cause of the alarm is usually a faulty
thermistor, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection. Failure of this thermistor will shut
down the entire unit.
T068, T69 (Circuit A,B Compressor Return Gas Temperature Thermistor Failure) — This alert occurs when the compressor return gas temperature sensor is outside the range of
–40 to 240 F (–40 to 116 C). Failure of this thermistor will shut
down the appropriate circuit.
T073 (Outside Air Temperature Thermistor Failure) — This
alert occurs when the outside air temperature sensor is outside
the range of –40 to 240 F (–40 to 116 C). Failure of this thermistor will disable any elements of the control which requires its
use.
T074 (Space Temperature Thermistor Failure) — This alert
occurs when the space temperature sensor is outside the range
72

T153 (Real Time Clock Hardware Failure) — A problem
has been detected with MBB real time clock hardware. Try resetting the power and check the indicator lights. If the alarm
continues, the board should be replaced.
A154 (Serial EEPROM Hardware Failure) — A problem
has been detected with the EEPROM on the MBB. Try
resetting the power and check the indicator lights. If the alarm
continues, the board should be replaced.
T155 (Serial EEPROM Storage Failure Error) — A problem
has been detected with the EEPROM storage on the MBB. Try
resetting the power and check the indicator lights. If the alert
continues, the board should be replaced.
A156 (Critical Serial EEPROM Storage Failure Error) — A
problem has been detected with the EEPROM storage on the
MBB. Try resetting the power and check the indicator lights. If
the alarm continues, the board should be replaced.
A157 (A/D Hardware Failure) — A problem has been detected with A/D conversion on the boards. Try resetting the power
and check the indicator lights. If the alarm continues, the board
should be replaced.
A172 (Loss of Communication with the EXV Board)
—
This alarm indicates that there are communications problems
with the EXV board. The alarm will automatically reset.
T173 (Energy Management Module Communication Failure) — This alert indicates that there are communications
problems with the energy management. All functions performed by the EMM will stop, which can include demand limit, reset and capacity input. The alarm will automatically reset.
T174 (4 to 20 mA Cooling Set Point Input Failure) — This
alert indicates a problem has been detected with cooling set
point 4 to 20 mA input. The input value is either less than 2 mA
or greater than 22 mA.
T175 (Loss of Communication with the AUX Board) —
This alarm indicates that there are communications problems
with the AUX board. All functions performed by the AUX
board will stop, which can include digital scroll unloader operation and low ambient head pressure control. The alarm will
automatically reset.
T176 (4 to 20 mA Reset Input Failure) — This alert indicates a problem has been detected with reset 4 to 20 mA input.
The input value is either less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA.
The reset function will be disabled when this occurs.
T177 (4 to 20 mA Demand Limit Input Failure) — This
alert indicates a problem has been detected with demand limit
4 to 20 mA input. The input value is either less than 2 mA or
greater than 22 mA. The reset function will be disabled when
this occurs.
T500, T501 (Current Sensor Board Failure — A xx Circuit
A)
T503, T504 (Current Sensor Board Failure — B xx Circuit
B) — Alert codes 500, 501, 503, and 504 are for compressors
A1, A2, B1, and B2 respectively. These alerts occur when the
output of the CSB is a constant high value. These alerts reset
automatically. If the problem cannot be resolved, the CSB must
be replaced.

rise to greater than the maximum SCT, the alert will occur and
the circuit's remaining compressor will shut down. The cause
of the alarm is usually an overcharged system, high outdoor
ambient temperature coupled with dirty outdoor coil, plugged
filter drier, or a faulty high-pressure switch.
T133 (Circuit A Low Suction Pressure)
T134 (Circuit B Low Suction Pressure) — Alert codes 133
and 134 are for circuits A and B respectively. These alerts are
generated if one of the two following conditions is satisfied:
the circuit suction pressure is below 34 psig (234.4 kPa) for 8
seconds, or the suction pressure is below 23 psig (158.6 kPa).
The cause of this alert may be low refrigerant charge, plugged
liquid line filter drier, or sticking EXV. Check head pressure
operation. If not equipped, consider adding low ambient temperature head pressure control.
Add wind baffles if required.
A140 (Reverse Rotation Detected) — A test is made once, on
power up, for suction pressure change on the first activated circuit. The unit control determines failure as follows:
1. The suction pressure of both circuits is sampled 5 seconds
before the compressor is brought on, right when the compressor is brought on and 5 seconds afterwards.
2. The rate of suction pressure change from 5 seconds before the compressor is brought on to when the compressor is brought on is calculated.
3. The rate of suction pressure change from when the
compressor is brought on to 5 seconds afterwards is
calculated.
4. With the above information, the test for reverse rotation is
made. If the suction pressure change 5 seconds after compression is greater than the suction pressure change 5 seconds before compression – 1.25, then there is a reverse
rotation error.
This alarm will disable mechanical cooling and will require
manual reset.
A150 (Unit is in Emergency Stop) — If the CCN emergency
stop command is received, the alarm is generated and the unit
will be immediately stopped.
If the CCN point name "EMSTOP" in the system table is set
to emergency stop, the unit will shut down immediately and
broadcast an alarm back to the CCN, indicating that the unit is
down. This alarm will clear when the variable is set back to
"enable."
A151 (Illegal Configuration) — An A151 alarm indicates an
invalid configuration has been entered. The following are illegal configurations.
• Invalid unit size has been entered.
• Dual thermostat configured for single-circuit unit.
• Dual thermostat and switch demand limit configure
• AUX board incorrect revision.
• Unit configuration set to invalid type.
A152 (Unit Down Due to Failure) — Both circuits are off
due to alerts and/or alarms. Reset is automatic when all alarms
are cleared. This alarm indicates the unit is at 0% capacity.

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES
Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

ITEM
EWT
LWT
SETP
CTPT
LOD.F

DISPLAY
ITEM DESCRIPTION
AUTO VIEW OF RUN STATUS
xxx.x ºF
Entering Fluid Temp
xxx.x ºF
Leaving Fluid Temp
xxx.x ºF
Active Set Point
xxx.x ºF
Control Point
xxx
Load/Unload Factor

STAT

Control Mode

VIEW
LD.PM
OCC
LS.AC
MODE
CAP
STGE
ALRM
TIME

YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
xxx
x
xxx
xx.xx

Lead Pump
Occupied
Low Sound Active
Override Modes in Effect
Percent Total Capacity
Requested Stage
Current Alarms & Alerts
Time of Day

MNTH

Month of Year

DATE
YEAR

RUN

HOUR

HRS.U
STR.U
HR.P1
HR.P2
HRS.A
HRS.B
HR.A1
HR.A2
HR.B1
HR.B2

xx
Day of Month
xx
Year of Century
UNIT RUN HOUR AND START
xxxx HRS
Machine Operating Hours
xxxx
Machine Starts
xxxx HRS
Pump 1 Run Hours
xxxx HRS
Pump 2 Run Hours
CIRC AND COMP RUN HOURS
xxxx HRS
Circuit A Run Hours
xxxx HRS
Circuit B Run Hours
xxxx HRS
Compressor A1 Run Hours
xxxx HRS
Compressor A2 Run Hours
xxxx HRS
Compressor B1 Run Hours
xxxx HRS
Compressor B2 Run Hours

COMMENT

0=Service Test
1=Off Local
2=Off CCN
3=Off Time
4=Off Emrgcy
5=On Local
6=On CCN
7=On Time

00:00-23:59
1 - 12 (1 = January,
2 = February, etc.)
01-31

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE

STRT

VERS

ITEM
ST.A1
ST.A2
ST.B1
ST.B2
PUMP
SI.PM
P.1.DN
P.2.DN
P.1.MN
P.2.MN
PMDT
P.1.M0
P.1.M1
P.1.M2
P.1.M3
P.1.M4
P.2.M0
P.2.M1
P.2.M2
P.2.M3
P.2.M4
STRN
SI.ST
S.T.DN
S.T.MN
ST.DT
S.T.M0
S.T.M1
S.T.M2
S.T.M3
S.T.M4
COIL
SI.CL
C.L.DN
C.L.MN
CL.DT
C.L.M0
C.L.M1
C.L.M2
C.L.M3
C.L.M4
MBB
EXV
AUX1
EMM
MARQ
NAVI

DISPLAY
ITEM DESCRIPTION
COMPRESSOR STARTS
xxxx
Compressor A1 Starts
xxxx
Compressor A2 Starts
xxxx
Compressor B1 Starts
xxxx
Compressor B2 Starts
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
PUMP MAINTENANCE
xxxx HRS
Pump Service Interval
xxxx HRS
Pump 1 Service Countdown
xxxx HRS
Pump 2 Service Countdown
YES/NO
Pump 1 Maintenance Done
YES/NO
Pump 2 Maintenance Done
PUMP MAINTENANCE DATES
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
STRAINER MAINTENANCE
xxxx HRS
Strainer Srvc Interval
xxxx HRS
Strainer Srvc Countdown
YES/NO
Strainer Maint. Done
STRAINER MAINTENANCE DATES
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
COIL MAINTENANCE
xxxx HRS
Coil Cleaning Srvc Int
xxxx HRS
Coil Service Countdown
YES/NO
Coil Cleaning Maint.Done
COIL MAINTENANCE DATES
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBERS
CESR131460-XXXXX
CESR131172-XXXXX
CESR131333-XXXXX
CESR131174-XXXXX
CESR131171-XXXXX
CESR130227-XXXXX

COMMENT

User Entry
User Entry

User Entry

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

TEST

OUTS

CMPA

CMPB

Service Test Mode

EXV.A
EXV.B
FAN1
FAN2
FAN3
FAN4
FAN5
FAN6
V.HPA
V.HPB
CLP.1
CLP.2
UL.TM
CL.HT
RMT.A

xxx%
xxx%
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
xx
xx
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
xx
ON/OFF
ON/OFF

CC.A1
UL.TM
CC.A2
MLV

ON/OFF
xx
ON/OFF
ON/OFF

CC.B1
CC.B2

ON/OFF
ON/OFF

COMMENT
To enable Service Test mode, move
Enable/Off/Remote contact switch to
OFF. Change TEST to ON.
Move switch to ENABLE

OUTPUTS
EXV % Open
EXV % Open
Fan 1 Relay
Fan 2 Relay
Fan 3 Relay
Fan 4 Relay
Fan 5 Relay
Fan 6 Relay
Var Head Press %
Var Head Press %
Cooler Pump Relay 1
Cooler Pump Relay 2
Comp A1 Unload Time
Cooler/Pump Heater
Remote Alarm Relay
CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR TEST
Compressor A1 Relay
Comp A1 Unload Time
Compressor A2 Relay
Minimum Load Valve Relay
CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR TEST
Compressor B1 Relay
Compressor B2 Relay

Temperature Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

UNIT

CIR.A

CIR.B

ITEM

DISPLAY
ITEM DESCRIPTION
ENTERING AND LEAVING UNIT TEMPERATURES
xxx.x °F
Cooler Entering Fluid
xxx.x °F
Cooler Leaving Fluid
xxx.x °F
Outside Air Temperature
xxx.x °F
Space Temperature
xxx.x °F
Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid
TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT A
xxx.x °F
Saturated Condensing Tmp
xxx.x °F
Saturated Suction Temp
xxx.x °F
Compr Return Gas Temp
xxx.x °F
Discharge Gas Temp
xxx.x ΔF
Suction Superheat Temp
TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT B
xxx.x °F
Saturated Condensing Tmp
xxx.x °F
Saturated Suction Temp
xxx.x °F
Compr Return Gas Temp
xxx.x ΔF
Suction Superheat Temp

CEWT
CLWT
OAT
SPT
DLWT
SCT.A
SST.A
RGT.A
D.GAS
SH.A
SCT.B
SST.B
RGT.B
SH.B

COMMENT

Pressures Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

ITEM

PRC.A

DP.A
SP.A

PRC.B

DP.B
SP.B

DISPLAY
ITEM DESCRIPTION
PRESSURES CIRCUIT A
xxx.x PSIG
Discharge Pressure
xxx.x PSIG
Suction Pressure
PRESSURES CIRCUIT B
xxx.x PSIG
Discharge Pressure
xxx.x PSIG
Suction Pressure

COMMENT

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Set Points Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

COOL

HEAD

FRZ

ITEM

DISPLAY

CSP.1
CSP.2
CSP.3

xxx.x °F
xxx.x °F
xxx.x °F

H.DP
F.ON
F.OFF
B.OFF
F.DLT

xxx.x °F
xxx.x °F
xxx.x °F
xx.x
xxx

BR.FZ

xx.x °F

ITEM DESCRIPTION
COOLING SET POINTS
Cooling Set Point 1
Cooling Set Point 2
ICE Set Point
HEAD PRESSURE SET POINTS
Head Set Point
Fan On Set Point
Fan Off Set Point
Base Fan Off Delta Temp
Fan Stage Delta
BRINE FREEZE SET POINT
Brine Freeze Point

RANGE

COMMENT

–20 to 70
–20 to 70
–20 to 32

Default: 44 F
Default: 44 F
Default: 32 F

85 to 120

10 to 50
0 to 50

Default: 95 F
Default: 95 F
Default: 72 F
Default: 23 F
Default: 15 F

–20 to 34

Default: 34 F

Inputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

GEN.I

CRCT

4-20

ITEM
STST
FLOW
PM.F.1
PM.F.2
HT.RQ
DLS1
DLS2
ICED
DUAL
FKA1
FKA2
FKA3
FKA4
FKB1
FKB2
FKB3
FKB4
DMND
RSET
CSP

DISPLAY
ITEM DESCRIPTION
GENERAL INPUTS
ON/OFF
Start/Stop Switch
ON/OFF
Cooler Flow Switch
ON/OFF
Cooler Pump 1 Interlock
ON/OFF
Cooler Pump 2 Interlock
ON/OFF
Heat Request
ON/OFF
Demand Limit Switch 1
ON/OFF
Demand Limit Switch 2
ON/OFF
Ice Done
ON/OFF
Dual Set Point Switch
CIRCUIT INPUTS
ON/OFF
Compressor A1 Feedback
ON/OFF
Compressor A2 Feedback
ON/OFF
Compressor A3 Feedback
ON/OFF
Compressor A4 Feedback
ON/OFF
Compressor B1 Feedback
ON/OFF
Compressor B2 Feedback
ON/OFF
Compressor B3 Feedback
ON/OFF
Compressor B4 Feedback
4-20 MA INPUTS
xx.x
4-20 ma Demand Signal
xx.x
4-20 ma Reset Signal
xx.x
4-20 ma Cooling Set Point

COMMENT

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

GEN.O

A.EXV

B.EXV

CIR.A

CIR.B

ITEM
FAN1
FAN2
FAN3
FAN4
FAN5
FAN6
V.HPA
V.HPB
C.WP1
C.WP2
CLHT
MLV.R
EXV.A
APPR
AP.SP
X.SH.R
S.SH.R
SH_R
OVR.A
SPH.A
ASH.S
AMP.S
PLM.A
SPR.1
EXV.B
APPR
AP.SP
OVR.B
SPH.B
ASH.S
AMP.S
PLM.B
SPR.2
CC.A1
DPE.R
CC.A2
CC.A3
CC.A4
CC.B1
CC.B2
CC.B3
CC.B4

DISPLAY
ITEM DESCRIPTION
GENERAL OUTPUTS
ON/OFF
Fan 1 Relay
ON/OFF
Fan 2 Relay
ON/OFF
Fan 3 Relay
ON/OFF
Fan 4 Relay
ON/OFF
Fan 5 Relay
ON/OFF
Fan 6 Relay
ON/OFF
Fan Speed Circuit A
ON/OFF
Fan Speed Circuit B
ON/OFF
Cooler Pump Relay 1
ON/OFF
Cooler Pump Relay 2
ON/OFF
Cooler/Pump Heater
ON/OFF
Minimum Load Valve Relay
OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A EXV
ON/OFF
EXV % Open
ON/OFF
Circuit A Approach
ON/OFF
Approach Setpoint
SH Reset at Max Unl-Dig
Digload to Start SH RST
Amount of SH Reset
ON/OFF
EXVA Override
ON/OFF
Suction Superheat Temp
ON/OFF
Active Superheat Setpt
ON/OFF
Active Mop Setpt
ON/OFF
Cir A EXV Position Limit
ON/OFF
Spare 1 Temperature
OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A EXV
ON/OFF
EXV % Open
ON/OFF
Circuit B Approach
ON/OFF
Approach Setpoint
ON/OFF
EXVB Override
ON/OFF
Suction Superheat Temp
ON/OFF
Active Superheat Setpt
ON/OFF
Active Mop Setpt
ON/OFF
Cir B EXV Position Limit
ON/OFF
Spare 2 Temperature
OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A
ON/OFF
Compressor A1 Relay
ON/OFF
Comp A1 Load Percent
ON/OFF
Compressor A2 Relay
ON/OFF
Compressor A3 Relay
ON/OFF
Compressor A4 Relay
OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B
ON/OFF
Compressor B1 Relay
ON/OFF
Compressor B2 Relay
ON/OFF
Compressor B3 Relay
ON/OFF
Compressor B4 Relay

COMMENT

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

DISP

UNIT

OPT1

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
Test Display LEDs
Metric Display

TEST
METR

ON/OFF
ON/OFF

LANG

PAS.E
PASS

ENBL/DSBL
XXXX

SIZE
SZA.1
SZA.2
SZA.3
SZA.4
SZB.1
SZB.2
SZB.3
SZB.4
SH.SP
FAN.S
EXV
A1.TY

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
X
YES/NO
YES/NO

MAX.T

FLUD

MLV.S
CSB.E
CPC
PM1E
PM2E
PM.P.S
PM.SL

YES/NO
ENBL/DSBL
ON/OFF
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
X

Minimum Load Valve Select
Csb Boards Enable
Cooler Pump Control
Cooler Pump 1 Enable
Cooler Pump 2 Enable
Cooler Pmp Periodic Strt
Cooler Pump Select

PM.DY
PM.DT
ROT.P
EMM
CND.T
MOPS
APPR

XX MIN
XXXX HRS
YES/NO
YES/NO
X
XX
XX

Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly
Pump Changeover Hours
Rotate Cooler Pumps Now
EMM Module Installed
Cnd HX Typ:0=RTPF 1=MCHX
EXV MOP Set Point
Config Approach Set Point

Language Selection
Password Enable
Service Password
UNIT CONFIGURATION
Unit Size
Compressor A1 Size
Compressor A2 Size
Compressor A3 Size
Compressor A4 Size
Compressor B1 Size
Compressor B2 Size
Compressor B3 Size
Compressor B4 Size
Suction Superheat Setpt
Number of Fans
EXV Module Installed
Compressor A1 Digital
Maximum A1 Unload Time
UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE
Cooler Fluid

COMMENT

Off = English On = Metric
Default: 0
0 = English
1 = Espanol
2 = Francais
3 = Portuguese

Default: 5
Default: No
Default: 7
Max = 12 (010,015)
Max = 10 (018-060)
Default: Water
1 = Water
2 = Medium Temperature Brine
Default: Enable
Default: Off

Default: No
Default: Automatic
0 = Automatic
1 = Pump 1 Starts first
2 = Pump 2 Starts first
0 to 10 minutes, Default: 1 min.
Default: 500 hours
User Entry

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE

OPT2

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION
UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS

CTRL

Control Method

LOAD

Loading Sequence Select

LLCS

Lead/Lag Circuit Select

LCWT

High LCW Alert Limit

DELY

Minutes Off Time

ICE.M
LS.MD

ENBL/DSBL
X

Ice Mode Enable
Low Sound Mode Select

LS.ST
LS.ND

00:00
00:00

Low Sound Start Time
Low Sound End Time

LS.LT

XXX %

Low Sound Capacity Limit

CCNA

XXX

CCN Address

CCNB

XXX

CCN Bus Number

BAUD

CCN Baud Rate

COMMENT
Default: 0
0 = Enable/Off/Remote Switch
2 = Occupancy
3 = CCN Control
Default: 1
1 = Equal
2 = Staged
Default: 1
1 = Automatic
2 = Circuit A Leads
3 = Circuit B Leads
Default: 60
Range: 2 to 60 F
Default: 0 Minutes
Range: 0 to 15 Minutes
Default: Disable
Default: 0
0 = Mode Disable
1 = Fan Noise Only
2 = Fan/Compressor Noise
Default: 00:00
Default: 00:00
Default: 100%
Range: 0 to 100%

CCN NETWORK CONFIGS

CCN

Default: 1
Range: 0 to 239
Default: 1
Range: 0 to 239
Default: 3
1 = 2400
2 = 4800
3 = 9600
4 =19,200
5 =38,400

HEAD PRESSURE CMP. DELTA
HP.A

A1.DT

SCT Delta For Comp A1

A2.DT

SCT Delta For Comp A2

Default:12
Range: 0 to 50
Default:12
Range: 0 to 50

HEAD PRESSURE CMP. DELTA
HP.B

B1.DT

SCT Delta For Comp B1

B2.DT

SCT Delta For Comp B2

Default:12
Range: 0 to 50
Default:12
Range: 0 to 50

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE

EXV.A

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION
CIR A EXV CONFIGURATION

STR.A

XXX

EXV CIrc.A Start Pos

MIN.A

XXX

EXV Circ.A Min Position

RNG.A

XXXXX

EXVA Steps In Range

SPD.A

XXXXX

EXVA STeps Per Second

POF.A

XXX

EXVA Fail Position In %

MIN.A

XXXXX

EXVA Minimum Steps

MAX.A

XXXXX

EXVA Maximum Steps

OVR.A

XXX

EXVA Overrun Steps

TYP.A

0,1

EXVA Stepper Type

H.SCT

XXX

High SCT Threshold

X.PCT

Open EXV X% On 2nd Comp

X.PER

Move EXV X% On DISCRSOL

A.PCT

XXX

Pre-open EXV - Fan Adding

M.PCT

XXX

Pre-close EXV - Fan Sub

S.PCT

XXX

Pre-close EXV - Lag Shut

DELY

XXX

Lag Start Delay

COMMENT
Default: 50
0 to 100
Default: 8
0 to 100
0 to 65535
Default: 200
0 to 65535
Default: 0
0 to 100
Default: 0
0 to 65535
0 to 65535
Default: 167
0 to 65535
Default: 1
0 = UNIPOLAR
1 = BIPOLAR
Default: 115
50 to 140
Default: 10
0 to 30
Default: 5
0 to 30
Default: 10
0 to 100
Default: 10
0 to 100
Default: 10
0 to 100
Default: 10
0 to 100

CIR B EXV CONFIGURATION
STR.B

EXV.B

XXX

EXV CIrc.B Start Pos

MIN.B

XXX

EXV Circ.B Min Position

RNG.B

XXXXX

EXVB Steps In Range

SPD.B

XXXXX

EXVB STeps Per Second

POF.B

XXX

EXVB Fail Position In %

MIN.B

XXXXX

EXVB Minimum Steps

MAX.B

XXXXX

EXVB Maximum Steps

OVR.B

XXX

EXVB Overrun Steps

TYP.B

0,1

EXVB Stepper Type

Default: 50
0 to 100
Default: 8
0 to 100
0 to 65535
Default: 200
0 to 65535
Default: 0
0 to 100
Default: 0
0 to 65535
0 to 65535
Default: 167
0 to 65535
Default: 1
0 = UNIPOLAR
1 = BIPOLAR

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE

RSET

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION
MOTORMASTER
Motormaster Select

MMR.S

YES/NO

P.GAN

Head Pressure P Gain

I.GAN

XX.X

Head Pressure I Gain

D.GAN

XX.X

Head Pressure D Gain

MIN.S

Minimum Fan Speed
RESET COOL TEMP

COMMENT
Default: NO
Default: 1
Range: 1 to 4
Default: 0.1
Range: -20 to 20
Default: 0.0
Range: -20 to 20
Default: 5

CRST

Cooling Reset Type

MA.DG

XX.XΔF

4-20 - Degrees Reset

RM.NO

XXX.X °F

Remote - No Reset Temp

RM.F

XXX.X °F

Remote - Full Reset Temp

RM.DG

XX.X °F

Remote - Degrees Reset

RT.NO

XXX.XΔF

Return - No Reset Temp

RT.F

XXX.XΔF

Return - Full Reset Temp

RT.DG

XX.X °F

Return - Degrees Reset

DMDC

Demand Limit Select

DM20

XXX%

Demand Limit at 20 mA

SHNM

XXX

Loadshed Group Number

SHDL

XXX%

Loadshed Demand Delta

SHTM

XXX

Maximum Loadshed Time

DLS1

XXX%

Demand Limit Switch 1

DLS2

XXX%

Demand Limit Switch 2

Default: 0
0 = No Reset
1 = 4 to 20 mA Input
2 = Outdoor Air Temperature
3 = Return Fluid
4 = Space Temperature
Default: 0.0 ΔF
Range: -30 to 30 ΔF
Default: 125 F
Range: 0° to125 F
Default: 0 F
Range: 0° to125 F
Default: 0.0 ΔF
Range: -30 to 30 ΔF
Default: 10.0 ΔF
Range: 0° to125 F
Default: 0 ΔF
Range: 0° to125 F
Default: 0.0 ΔF
Range: -30 to 30 ΔF
Default: 0
0 = None
1 = Switch
2 - 4 to 20 mA Input
3 = CCN Loadshed
Default: 100%
Range: 0 to 100%
Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99
Default: 0%
Range: 0 to 60%
Default: 60 minutes
Range: 0 to 120 minutes
Default: 80%
Range: 0 to 100%
Default: 50%
Range: 0 to 100%

LLEN

ENBL/DSBL

Lead/Lag Chiller Enable

Default: Disable

MSSL

SLVE/MAST

Master/Slave Select

SLVA

XXX

Slave Address

LLBL

Lead/Lag Balance Select

LLBD

XXX

Lead/Lag Balance Delta

LLDY

XXX

Lag Start Delay

PARA

YES

Parallel Configuration

Default: Master
Default: 2
Range: 0 to 239
Default: Master Leads
0 = Master Leads
1 = Slave Leads
2 = Automatic
Default: 168 hours
Range: 40 to 400 hours
Default: 5 minutes
Range: 0 to 30 minutes
Default: YES (CANNOT BE
CHANGED)

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE

SLCT

SERV

BCST

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION
SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD

CLSP

Cooling Set Point Select

RL.S

ENBL/DSBL

Ramp Load Select

CRMP

ENBL/DSBL

Cooling Ramp Loading

SCHD

Schedule Number

Z.GN

X.X

Deadband Multiplier

EN.A1
EN.A2
EN.B1
EN.B2

YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO

T.D.B
OAT.B
G.S.BC
BC.AK

ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF

SERVICE CONFIGURATION
Enable Compressor A1
Enable Compressor A2
Enable Compressor B1
Enable Compressor B2
BROADCAST CONFIGURATION
CCN Time/Date Broadcast
CCN OAT Broadcast
Global Schedule Broadcst
CCN Broadcast Ack'er

COMMENT
Default: Single
0 = Single
1 = Dual Switch
2 = Dual CCN Occupied
3 = 4 to 20 mA
Input (requires EMM)
Default: Enable
Default: 1.0
Range: 0.3 to 2
Default: 1
Range: 1 to 99
Default: 1
Range: 1 to 4

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE
TIME

DATE

ITEM
HH.MM

Month of Year

DOM

Day of Month

DAY

Day of Week

STR.M
STR.W
STR.D
MIN.A
STP.M
STP.W
STP.D
MIN.S

HOL.L

HD.01

HD.02

HD.03

HD.04

HD.05

HD.06

HD.07

HD.08

ITEM DESCRIPTION
TIME OF DAY
XX.XX
Hour and Minute
MONTH, DATE, DAY, AND YEAR

MNTH

YEAR

DST

DISPLAY

MON
DAY
LEN

XXXX
Year of Century
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME
XX
Month
X
Week
X
Day
XX
Minutes to Add
XX
Month
XX
Week
XX
Day
XX
Minutes to Subtract
LOCAL HOLIDAY SCHEDULES
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 01
XX
Holiday Start Month
XX
Start Day
XX
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 02

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

Start Day
Duration (days)

Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 03
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 04
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 05
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 06
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 07
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 08

COMMENT
Military (00:00 - 23:59)
1 - 12 (1 = January,
2 = February, etc.)
Range: 01 -31
1 - 7 (1 = Sunday,
2 = Monday, etc.)

Default: 4 Range 1- 12
Default: 1 Range 1- 5
Default: 7 Range 1- 7
Default: 60 Range 0 - 99
Default: 10 Range 1- 12
Default: 5 Range 1- 5
Default: 7 Range 1- 7
Default: 60 Range 0 - 99

1 - 12 (1 = January,
2 = February, etc.)
01-31

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE

HD.09

HD.10

HD.11

HD.12

HD.13

HD.14

HD.15

HD.16

HD.17

HD.18

HD.19

ITEM

DISPLAY
ITEM DESCRIPTION
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 09

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

Start Day
Duration (days)

Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 10
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 11
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 12
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 13
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 14
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 15
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 16
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 17
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 18
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 19

COMMENT
1 - 12 (1 = January,
2 = February, etc.)
01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,
2 = February, etc.)
01-31

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE

HD.20

HD.21

HD.22

HD.23

HD.24

HD.25

HD.26

HD.27

HD.28

HD.29

HD.30

ITEM

DISPLAY
ITEM DESCRIPTION
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 20

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY
LEN

XX
XX

Start Day
Duration (days)

Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 21
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 22
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 23
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 24
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 25
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 26
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 27
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 28
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 29
Holiday Start Month
Start Day
Duration (days)
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 30

COMMENT
1 - 12 (1 = January,
2 = February, etc.)
01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,
2 = February, etc.)
01-31

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE
SCH.N
SCH.L

PER.1

PER.2

PER.3

PER.4

PER.5

ITEM

OCC.1
UNC.1
MON.1
TUE.1
WED.1
THU.1
FRI.1
SAT.1
SUN.1
HOL.1
OCC.2
UNC.2
MON.2
TUE.2
WED.2
THU.2
FRI.2
SAT.2
SUN.2
HOL.2
OCC.3
UNC.3
MON.3
TUE.3
WED.3
THU.3
FRI.3
SAT.3
SUN.3
HOL.3
OCC.4
UNC.4
MON.4
TUE.4
WED.4
THU.4
FRI.4
SAT.4
SUN.4
HOL.4
OCC.5
UNC.5
MON.5
TUE.5
WED.5
THU.5
FRI.5
SAT.5
SUN.5
HOL.5

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Schedule Number 0
LOCAL OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 1
XX:XX
Period Occupied Time
XX:XX
Period Unoccupied Time
YES/NO
Monday In Period
YES/NO
Tuesday In Period
YES/NO
Wednesday In Period
YES/NO
Thursday In Period
YES/NO
Friday In Period
YES/NO
Saturday In Period
YES/NO
Sunday In Period
YES/NO
Holiday In Period
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 2
XX:XX
Period Occupied Time
XX:XX
Period Unoccupied Time
YES/NO
Monday In Period
YES/NO
Tuesday In Period
YES/NO
Wednesday In Period
YES/NO
Thursday In Period
YES/NO
Friday In Period
YES/NO
Saturday In Period
YES/NO
Sunday In Period
YES/NO
Holiday In Period
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 3
XX:XX
Period Occupied Time
XX:XX
Period Unoccupied Time
YES/NO
Monday In Period
YES/NO
Tuesday In Period
YES/NO
Wednesday In Period
YES/NO
Thursday In Period
YES/NO
Friday In Period
YES/NO
Saturday In Period
YES/NO
Sunday In Period
YES/NO
Holiday In Period
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 4
XX:XX
Period Occupied Time
XX:XX
Period Unoccupied Time
YES/NO
Monday In Period
YES/NO
Tuesday In Period
YES/NO
Wednesday In Period
YES/NO
Thursday In Period
YES/NO
Friday In Period
YES/NO
Saturday In Period
YES/NO
Sunday In Period
YES/NO
Holiday In Period
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 5
XX:XX
Period Occupied Time
XX:XX
Period Unoccupied Time
YES/NO
Monday In Period
YES/NO
Tuesday In Period
YES/NO
Wednesday In Period
YES/NO
Thursday In Period
YES/NO
Friday In Period
YES/NO
Saturday In Period
YES/NO
Sunday In Period
YES/NO
Holiday In Period

COMMENT

Military (00:00 - 23:59)
Military (00:00 - 23:59)

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)
SUB-MODE

PER.6

PER.7

PER.8

OVR

ITEM
OCC.6
UNC.6
MON.6
TUE.6
WED.6
THU.6
FRI.6
SAT.6
SUN.6
HOL.6
OCC.7
UNC.7
MON.7
TUE.7
WED.7
THU.7
FRI.7
SAT.7
SUN.7
HOL.7
OCC.8
UNC.8
MON.8
TUE.8
WED.8
THU.8
FRI.8
SAT.8
SUN.8
HOL.8
OVR.T
OVR.L
T.OVR

DISPLAY
ITEM DESCRIPTION
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 6
XX:XX
Period Occupied Time
XX:XX
Period Unoccupied Time
YES/NO
Monday In Period
YES/NO
Tuesday In Period
YES/NO
Wednesday In Period
YES/NO
Thursday In Period
YES/NO
Friday In Period
YES/NO
Saturday In Period
YES/NO
Sunday In Period
YES/NO
Holiday In Period
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 7
XX:XX
Period Occupied Time
XX:XX
Period Unoccupied Time
YES/NO
Monday In Period
YES/NO
Tuesday In Period
YES/NO
Wednesday In Period
YES/NO
Thursday In Period
YES/NO
Friday In Period
YES/NO
Saturday In Period
YES/NO
Sunday In Period
YES/NO
Holiday In Period
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 8
XX:XX
Period Occupied Time
XX:XX
Period Unoccupied Time
YES/NO
Monday In Period
YES/NO
Tuesday In Period
YES/NO
Wednesday In Period
YES/NO
Thursday In Period
YES/NO
Friday In Period
YES/NO
Saturday In Period
YES/NO
Sunday In Period
YES/NO
Holiday In Period
SCHEDULE OVERRIDE
X
Timed Override Hours
X
Override Time Limit
YES/NO
Timed Override

COMMENT
Military (00:00 - 23:59)
Military (00:00 - 23:59)

Military (00:00 - 23:59)
Military (00:00 - 23:59)

Default: 0 Range 0-4 hours
Default: 0 Range 0-4 hours
User Entry

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Operating Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

MODE

ITEM

DISPLAY

MD01
MD02
MD03
MD05
MD06
MD07
MD08
MD09
MD10
MD13
MD14
MD15
MD16
MD17
MD18
MD19
MD20
MD21
MD22
MD23
MD24
MD25

ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF

ITEM DESCRIPTION
MODES CONTROLLING UNIT
CSM Controlling Chiller
WSM Controlling Chiller
Master/Slave Control
Ramp Load Limited
Timed Override in effect
Low Cooler Suction TempA
Low Cooler Suction TempB
Slow Change Override
Minimum OFF time active
Dual Set Point
Temperature Reset
Demand Limited
Cooler Freeze Protection
Low Temperature Cooling
High Temperature Cooling
Making Ice
Storing Ice
High SCT Circuit A
High SCT Circuit B
Minimum Comp. On Time
Pump Off Delay Time
Low Sound Mode

COMMENT

Alarms Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

ITEM

CRNT

AXXX
TXXX
PXXX
YES/NO

RCRN
HIST

DISPLAY
ITEM DESCRIPTION
CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARMS
Current Alarms 1-25

COMMENT
Alarms are hown as AXXX
Alerts are shown as TXXX

Reset All Current Alarms
ALARM HISTORY

AXXX
TXXX
PXXX

Alarm History 1-20

Alarms are shown as AXXX
Alerts are shown as TXXX

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES
CCN DISPLAY TABLES — A_UNIT (General Unit Parameters)
DESCRIPTION
Control Mode

Occupied
CCN Chiller
Low Sound Active
Alarm State
Active Demand Limit
Override Modes in Effect
Percent Total Capacity
Requested Stage
Active Set Point
Control Point
Entering Fluid Temp
Leaving Fluid Temp
Emergency Stop
Minutes Left for Start
PUMPS
Cooler Pump Relay 1
Cooler Pump Relay 2
Cooler Pump 1 Interlock
Cooler Pump 2 Interlock
Cooler Flow Switch
Lead Pump
Rotate Cooler Pumps Now
Heat/Cool Select

VALUE
0 = Test
1 = Local Off
2 = CCN Off
3 = Clock Off
4 = Emergency Stop
5 = Local On
6 = CCN On
7 = Clock On
8 = Heat Enabled
9 = Pump Delay
No/Yes
Start/Stop
No/Yes
Normal/Alert/Alarm
0 to 100
No/Yes
0 to 100
0 to 99
–20 to 70
–20 to 70
snnn.n
snnn.n
Enable/Emstop
00:00 to 15:00

UNITS

POINT NAME
STAT

OCC
CHIL_S_S
LSACTIVE
ALM
DEM_LIM
MODE
CAP_T
STAGE
SP
CTRL_PNT
EWT
LWT
EMSTOP
MIN_LEFT

N
Y
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
Y
N

No/Yes

COOLPMP1
COOLPMP2
PMP1_FBK
PMP2_FBK
COOLFLOW
LEADPUMP
ROT_PUMP

N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y

Heat/Cool

HC_SEL

%
%
F
F
F
F
Enable
minutes

Off/On
Off/On
Open/Close
Open/Close
Open/Close

FORCIBLE

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCA_AN (Circuit A Analog Parameters)
DESCRIPTION
CIRCUIT A ANALOG VALUES
Percent Total Capacity
Percent Available Cap.
Discharge Pressure
Suction Pressure
Head Setpoint
Saturated Condensing Tmp
Saturated Suction Temp
EXV % Open
Var Head Press Output
Compr Return Gas Temp
Discharge Gas Temp
Suction Superheat Temp
Spare 1 Temperature

VALUE

UNITS

0-100
0-100
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
snnn.n
snnn.n
nnn
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n

%
%
PSIG
PSIG
°F
F
F
%
milliamps
F
°F
F
°F

POINT NAME
CAPA_T
CAPA_A
DP_A
SP_A
HSP
TMP_SCTA
TMP_SSTA
EXV_A
VHP_ACT
TMP_RGTA
DISGAS
SH_A
SPR1_TMP

FORCIBLE
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCADIO (Circuit A Discrete Inputs/Outputs)
DESCRIPTION
CIRC. A DISCRETE OUTPUTS
Compressor A1 Relay
Compressor A2 Relay
Minimum Load Valve Relay

VALUE

UNITS

POINT NAME

FORCIBLE

On/Off
On/Off
On/Off

K_A1_RLY
K_A2_RLY
MLV_RLY

N
N
N

CIRC. A DISCRETE INPUTS
Compressor A1 Feedback
Compressor A2 Feedback

On/Off
On/Off

K_A1_FBK
K_A2_FBK

N
N

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCB_AN (Circuit B Analog Parameters)
DESCRIPTION
CIRCUIT B ANALOG VALUES
Percent Total Capacity
Percent Available Cap.
Discharge Pressure
Suction Pressure
Head Setpoint
Saturated Condensing Tmp
Saturated Suction Temp
EXV % Open
Var Head Press Output
Compr Return Gas Temp
Suction Superheat Temp
Spare 2 Temperature

VALUE

UNITS

0-100
0-100
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
snnn.n
snnn.n
nnn
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n

%
%
PSIG
PSIG
°F
F
F
%
milliamps
F
F
°F

POINT NAME
CAPB_T
CAPB_A
DP_B
SP_B
HSP
TMP_SCTB
TMP_SSTB
EXV_B
VHP_ACT
TMP_RGTB
SH_B
SPR2_TMP

FORCIBLE
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCBDIO (Circuit B Discrete Inputs/Outputs)
DESCRIPTION
CIRC. B DISCRETE OUTPUTS
Compressor B1 Relay
Compressor B2 Relay
Minimum Load Valve Relay

VALUE

UNITS

On/Off
On/Off
On/Off

K_B1_RLY
K_B2_RLY
MLV_RLY

N
N
N

CIRC. B DISCRETE INPUTS
Compressor B1 Feedback
Compressor B2 Feedback

On/Off
On/Off

K_B1_FBK
K_B2_FBK

N
N

POINT NAME

FORCIBLE

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
CCN DISPLAY TABLES — OPTIONS (Unit Parameters)
DESCRIPTION
FANS
Fan 1 Relay
Fan 2 Relay
Cooler/Pump Heater

VALUE
Off/On
Off/On
Off/On

UNIT ANALOG VALUES
Cooler Entering Fluid
Cooler Leaving Fluid
Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid

snnn.n
snnn.n
snnn.n

TEMPERATURE RESET
4-20 mA Reset Signal
Outside Air Temperature
Space Temperature
DEMAND LIMIT
4-20 mA Demand Signal
Demand Limit Switch 1
Demand Limit Switch 2
CCN Loadshed Signal

MISCELLANEOUS
Heat Request
Dual Setpoint Switch
Cooler LWT Setpoint
Ice Done

UNITS

POINT NAME

FORCIBLE

FAN_1
FAN_2
COOL_HTR

N
N
N

F
F
F

COOL_EWT
COOL_LWT
DUAL_LWT

N
N
N

nn.n
snnn.n
snnn.n

mA
F
F

RST_MA
OAT
SPT

N
Y
Y

nn.n
Off/On
Off/On
0 = Normal
1 = Redline
2 = Loadshed

LMT_MA
DMD_SW1
DMD_SW2
DL_STAT

N
N
N
N

HEAT_REQ
DUAL_IN
LWT_SP
ICE_DONE

N
N
N
N

Off/On
Off/On
snnn.n
Off/On

F

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — UNIT (Unit Configuration)
DESCRIPTION
Unit Size
Compressor A1 Size
Compressor A2 Size
Compressor B1 Size
Compressor B2 Size
Suction Superheat Setpt
Number of Fans
Compressor A1 Digital?
Maximum A1 Unload Time

VALUE
nnn
nnn
nnn
nnn
nnn
nn.n
n
No/Yes
nn

DEFAULT

9.0
No
12

UNITS
tons
tons
tons
tons
tons
F

sec

POINT NAME
SIZE
SIZE_A1
SIZE_A2
SIZE_B1
SIZE_B2
SH_SP
FAN_TYPE
CPA1TYPE
MAXULTME

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — OPTIONS1 (Options 1 Configuration)
DESCRIPTION
Cooler Fluid
Minimum Load Vlv Select
CSB Board Enable
Cooler Pump Control
Cooler Pump 1 Enable
Cooler Pump 2 Enable
Cooler Pmp Periodic Strt
Cooler Pump Select
Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly
Pump Changeover Hours
EMM Module Installed
Cnd HX Typ: 0=RTPF 1=MCHX
EXV MOP Set Point
Config Approach Setpoint

VALUE
1 = Water
2 = Med. Brine
No/Yes
Dsable/Enable
Off/On
No/Yes
No/Yes
No/Yes
0 = Automatic, 1 =
Pump 1, 2 = Pump 2
0 to 10
10 to 2000
No/Yes
0/1
nn.n
nn.n

DEFAULT
1

UNITS

No
Enable
Off
No
No
No
0
1
100
No
1

MLV_FLG
CSB_ENA
CPC
PMP1_ENA
PMP2_ENA
PUMP_PST
PMP_SLCT
minutes
hours

°F
°F

POINT NAME
FLUIDTYP

PUMP_DLY
PMP_DLTA
EMM_BRD
COILTYPE
MOP_SP
IAPPROSP

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — OPTIONS2 (Options 2 Configuration)
DESCRIPTION
Control Method
Loading Sequence Select
Lead/Lag Circuit Select
Cooling Setpoint Select

Ramp Load Select
Heat Cool Select
High LCW Alert Limit
Minutes off time
Deadband Multiplier
Ice Mode Enable
Low Sound Mode Select
Low Sound Start Time
Low Sound End Time
Low Sound Capacity Limit

VALUE
0 = Switch
2 = Occupancy
3 = CCN
1 = Equal Loading
2 = Staged Loading
1 = Automatic
2 = Circuit A Leads
3 = Circuit B Leads
0 = Single
1 = Dual, remote switch controlled
2 = Dual CCN occupancy
3 = 4-20 mA input
Enable/Dsable
Cool/Heat
2 to 60
0 to 15
1.0 to 4.0
Enable/Dsable
0 = Disabled
1 = Fan only
2 = Capacity/Fans
00:00 to 23:59
00:00 to 23:59
0 to 100

DEFAULT
0

UNITS

POINT NAME
CONTROL

SEQ_TYP

LEAD_TYP

CLSP_TYP

Enable
Cool
60.0
0
1.0
Dsable
0

RAMP_EBL
HEATCOOL
LCW_LMT
DELAY
Z_GAIN
ICE_CNFG
LS_MODE

F
min

00:00
00:00
100

LS_START
LS_END
LS_LIMIT

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — SCHEDOVR (Timed Override Setup)
DESCRIPTION
Schedule Number
Override Time Limit
Timed Override Hours
Timed Override

VALUE
0 to 99
0 to 4
0 to 4
No/Yes

DEFAULT
1
0
0
No

UNITS
hours
hours

POINT NAME
SCHEDNUM
OTL
OVR_EXT
TIMEOVER

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — RESETCON (Temperature Reset and Demand Limit)
DESCRIPTION
COOLING RESET
Cooling Reset Type

VALUE

DEFAULT

UNITS

POINT NAME

0 = No Reset
1 = 4-20 mA input
2 = External temp – OAT
3 = Return Fluid
4 = External temp - SPT

4-20 MA RESET
4-20 – Degrees Reset

–30 to 30

0.0

F

420_DEG

REMOTE RESET
Remote – No Reset Temp
Remote – Full Reset Temp
Remote – Degrees Reset

0 to 125
0 to 125
–30 to 30

125.0
0.0
0.0

F
F
F

REM_NO
REM_FULL
REM_DEG

RETURN TEMPERATURE RESET
Return – No Reset Temp
Return – Full Reset Temp
Return – Degrees Reset

0 to 125
0 to 125
–30 to 30

10.0
0.0
0.0

F
F
F

RTN_NO
RTN_FULL
RTN_DEG

0 = None
1 = External switch input
2 = 4-20 mA input
3 = Loadshed
0 to 100
0 to 99
0 to 60
0 to 120
0 to 100
0 to 100

DEMAND LIMIT
Demand Limit Select

Demand Limit at 20 mA
Loadshed Group Number
Loadshed Demand Delta
Maximum Loadshed Time
Demand Limit Switch 1
Demand Limit Switch 2

100
0
0
60
80
50

CRST_TYP

DMD_CTRL

%
%
minutes
%
%

DMT20MA
SHED_NUM
SHED_DEL
SHED_TIM
DLSWSP1
DLSWSP2

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — DUALCHIL (Dual Chiller Configuration Settings)
DESCRIPTION
LEAD/LAG
Lead/Lag Chiller Enable
Master/Slave Select
Slave Address
Lead/Lag Balance Select
Lead/Lag Balance Delta
Lag Start Delay
Parallel Configuration

VALUE
Enable/Dsable
Master/Slave
0 to 239
0 = None
40 to 400
0 to 30
Yes

DEFAULT
Dsable
Master
2
0
168
5
Yes

UNITS

POINT NAME
LL_ENA
MS_SEL
SLV_ADDR
LL_BAL
LL_BAL_D
LL_DELAY
PARALLEL

hours
minutes

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — DISPLAY (Marquee Display SETUP)
DESCRIPTION
Service Password
Password Enable
Metric Display
Language Selection

VALUE
nnnn
Enable/Disable
Off/On
0 = ENGLISH
1 = FRANCAIS
2 = ESPANOL
3 = PORTUGUES

DEFAULT
1111
Enable
Off
0

UNITS

POINT NAME
PASSWORD
PASS_EBL
DISPUNIT
LANGUAGE

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — EXVACONF (EXV Circuit A Configuration)
DESCRIPTION
EXV Circ. A Start Pos
EXV Circ. A Min Position
EXVA Steps in Range
EXVA Steps Per Second
EXVA Fail Position in %
EXVA Minimum Steps
EXVA Maximum Steps
EXVA Overrun Steps
EXVA Stepper Type
High SCT Threshold
Open EXV X% on 2nd Comp
Open EXV X% on DISCRSOL
Pre-Open EXV - Fan Adding
Pre-Close EXV - Fan Sub
Pre-Close EXV - Lag Shut
Lag Start Delay

VALUE
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnnnn
nnnnn
nnnn.nn
nnnnn
nnnnn
nnnnn
nnn
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn

DEFAULT
50.0
8.0
1596/2500
200
0
0
1596/2500
167
Bipolar
115
10
5
10
10
10
10

UNITS
%
%
steps
steps
%
steps
steps
steps
°F
%
%
%
%
%
secs

POINT NAME
EXVASTRT
EXVAMINP
EVXARANG
EXVARATE
EXVAPOSF
EXVAMINS
EXVAMAXS
EXVAOVRS
EXVATYPE
HIGH_SCT
EXV_HSCT
EXVDISCR
EXV_AFAN
EXV_MFAN
EXV_SLAG
DELAYLAG

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — EXVBCONF (EXV Circuit B Configuration)
DESCRIPTION
EXV Circ. B Start Pos
EXV Circ. B Min Position
EXVB Steps in Range
EXVB Steps Per Second
EXVB Fail Position in %
EXVB Minimum Steps
EXVB Maximum Steps
EXVB Overrun Steps
EXVB Stepper Type

VALUE
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnnnn
nnnnn
nnnn.nn
nnnnn
nnnnn
nnnnn
nnn

DEFAULT
50.0
8.0
1596/2500
200
0
0
1596/2500
167
Bipolar

UNITS
%
%
steps
steps
%
steps
steps
steps

POINT NAME
EXVBSTRT
EXVBMINP
EVXBRANG
EXVBRATE
EXVBPOSF
EXVBMINS
EXVBMAXS
EXVBOVRS
EXVBTYPE

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — MM_CONF (Motormaster Configuration)
DESCRIPTION
Motormaster Select
Head Pressure P Gain
Head Pressure I Gain
Head Pressure D Gain
Minimum Fan Speed

VALUE
No/Yes
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n

DEFAULT
No
1.0
0.1
0.0
5.0

UNITS

POINT NAME
MM_SLCT
HP_PGAIN
HP_IGAIN
HP_DGAIN
MIN_VHP

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
CCN SERVICE TABLES — SERVICE
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE
Brine Freeze Point
Pump Service Interval
COMPRESSOR ENABLE
Enable Compressor A1
Enable Compressor A2
Enable Compressor B1
Enable Compressor B2

VALUE

DEFAULT

UNITS
F
hours

nnn.n
nnnnn
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable

POINT NAME
BRN_FRZ
SI_PUMPS
ENABLEA1
ENABLEA2
ENABLEB1
ENABLEB2

CCN SETPOINT TABLES — SETPOINT
DESCRIPTION
COOLING
Cooling Setpoint 1
Cooling Setpoint 2
ICE Setpoint

–20 to 70
–20 to 70
–20 to 32

44.0
44.0
32.0

RAMP LOADING
Cooling Ramp Loading

0.2 to 2.0

1.0

–20 to 34

34.0

Brine Freeze Point
Head Setpoint
Fan On Set Point
Fan Off Set Point
Fan Stage Delta
Base Fan Off Delta Temp

VALUE

DEFAULT

UNITS
F
F
F

POINT NAME
CSP1
CSP2
CSP3

CRAMP
F
F
F
F
F
F

BRN_FRZ
HSP
FANONSP
FANOFFSP
FSTGDLTA
B_FANOFF

UNITS
%
delta F
delta F

POINT NAME
EXV_A
CIRA_APP
APPRA_SP
EXVAOVRR
SH_A
ACTSH_SP
ACMOP_SP
PLMA

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — CIRA_EXV
DESCRIPTION
EXV % Open
Circuit A Approach
Approach Setpoint
EXVA Override
Suction Superheat Temp
Active Superheat Setpt
Active MOP Setpt
Cir A EXV Position Limit

VALUE
nnn
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnnnn
nnn.n
nn.n
nn.n
nnn

DEFAULT

delta F
delta F
delta F
%

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — CIRB_EXV
DESCRIPTION
EXV % Open
Circuit B Approach
Approach Setpoint
EXVB Override
Suction Superheat Temp
Active Superheat Setpt
Active MOP Setpt
Cir B EXV Position Limit

VALUE
nnn
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnnnn
nnn.n
nn.n
nn.n
nnn

DEFAULT

UNITS
%
delta F
delta F
delta F
delta F
delta F
%

POINT NAME
EXV_B
CIRB_APP
APPRB_SP
EXVBOVRR
SH_B
ACTSH_SP
ACMOP_SP
PLMB

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — STRTHOUR
DESCRIPTION
Machine Operating Hours
Machine Starts

VALUE
nnnnnn
nnnnnn

UNITS
hours

POINT NAME
HR_MACH
CY_MACH

Circuit A Run Hours
Compressor A1 Run Hours
Compressor A2 Run Hours
Circuit B Run Hours
Compressor B1 Run Hours
Compressor B2 Run Hours

nnnnnn
nnnnnn
nnnnnn
nnnnnn
nnnnnn
nnnnnn

hours
hours
hours
hours
hours
hours

HR_CIRA
HR_A1
HR_A2
HR_CIRB
HR_B1
HR_B2

Circuit A Starts
Compressor A1 Starts
Compressor A2 Starts
Circuit B Starts
Compressor B1 Starts
Compressor B2 Starts

nnnnnn
nnnnnn
nnnnnn
nnnnnn
nnnnnn
nnnnnn

PUMP HOURS
Pump 1 Run Hours
Pump 2 Run Hours

nnnnnn
nnnnnn

CY_CIRA
CY_A1
CY_A2
CY_CIRB
CY_B1
CY_B2

hours
hours

HR_PUMP1
HR_PUMP2

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — CURRMODS
DESCRIPTION
CSM controlling Chiller
WSM controlling Chiller
Master/Slave control
Ramp Load Limited
Timed Override in effect
Low Cooler Suction TempA
Low Cooler Suction TempB
Slow Change Override
Minimum OFF time active
Dual Setpoint
Temperature Reset
Demand/Sound Limited
Cooler Freeze Protection
Low Temperature Cooling
High Temperature Cooling
Making ICE
Storing ICE
High SCT Circuit A
High SCT Circuit B
Minimum Comp. On Time
Pump Off Delay Time
Low Sound Mode

VALUE
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off

POINT NAME
MODE_1
MODE_2
MODE_3
MODE_5
MODE_6
MODE_7
MODE_8
MODE_9
MODE_10
MODE_13
MODE_14
MODE_15
MODE_16
MODE_17
MODE_18
MODE_19
MODE_20
MODE_21
MODE_22
MODE_23
MODE_24
MODE_25

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — ALARMS
DESCRIPTION
Active Alarm #1
Active Alarm #2
Active Alarm #3
Active Alarm #4
Active Alarm #5
Active Alarm #6
Active Alarm #7
Active Alarm #8
Active Alarm #9
Active Alarm #10
Active Alarm #11
Active Alarm #12
Active Alarm #13
Active Alarm #14
Active Alarm #15
Active Alarm #16
Active Alarm #17
Active Alarm #18
Active Alarm #19
Active Alarm #20
Active Alarm #21
Active Alarm #22
Active Alarm #23
Active Alarm #24
Active Alarm #25

VALUE
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx
Axxx or Txxx

POINT NAME
ALARM01C
ALARM02C
ALARM03C
ALARM04C
ALARM05C
ALARM06C
ALARM07C
ALARM08C
ALARM09C
ALARM10C
ALARM11C
ALARM12C
ALARM13C
ALARM14C
ALARM15C
ALARM16C
ALARM17C
ALARM18C
ALARM19C
ALARM20C
ALARM21C
ALARM22C
ALARM23C
ALARM24C
ALARM25C

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — VERSIONS
DESCRIPTION

VERSION
CESR131172CESR131333CESR131460CESR131174CESR131171CESR130227-

EXV
AUX
MBB
EMM
MARQUEE
NAVIGATOR

VALUE
nn-nn
nn-nn
nn-nn
nn-nn
nn-nn
nn-nn

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — LOADFACT
DESCRIPTION
CAPACITY CONTROL
Load/Unload Factor
Control Point
Entering Fluid Temp
Leaving Fluid Temp

VALUE
snnn.n
snnn.n
snnn.n
snnn.n

Ramp Load Limited
Slow Change Override
Cooler Freeze Protection
Low Temperature Cooling
High Temperature Cooling
Minimum Comp. On Time

On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off

UNITS

F
F
F

POINT NAME
SMZ
CTRL_PNT
EWT
LWT
MODE_5
MODE_9
MODE_16
MODE_17
MODE_18
MODE_23

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — PM-PUMP
DESCRIPTION
Pump Service Interval
Pump 1 Service Countdown
Pump 1 Maintenance Done
Pump 2 Service Countdown
Pump 2 Maintenance Done
Pump 1 Maintenance Date
Pump 1 Maintenance Date
Pump 1 Maintenance Date
Pump 1 Maintenance Date
Pump 1 Maintenance Date
Pump 2 Maintenance Date
Pump 2 Maintenance Date
Pump 2 Maintenance Date
Pump 2 Maintenance Date
Pump 2 Maintenance Date

VALUE
nnnnnn
nnnnnn
Yes/No
nnnnnn
Yes/No
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
mm/dd/yy hh:mm

UNITS
hours
hours
hours

POINT NAME
SI_PUMPS
P1_CDOWN
P1_MAINT
P2_CDOWN
P2_MAINT
PMP1_PM0
PMP1_PM1
PMP1_PM2
PMP1_PM3
PMP1_PM4
PMP2_PM0
PMP2_PM1
PMP2_PM2
PMP2_PM3
PMP2_PM4

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — PM-STRN
DESCRIPTION
Strainer Srvc Interval
Strainer Srvc Countdown
Strainer Maint. Done
Strainer Maint. Date
Strainer Maint. Date
Strainer Maint. Date
Strainer Maint. Date
Strainer Maint. Date

VALUE
nnnnnn
nnnnnn
Yes/No
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
mm/dd/yy hh:mm

UNITS
hours
hours

POINT NAME
SI_STRNR
ST_CDOWN
ST_MAINT
STRN_PM0
STRN_PM1
STRN_PM2
STRN_PM3
STRN_PM4

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — PM-COIL
DESCRIPTION
Coil Cleaning Srvc Inter
Coil Service Countdown
Coil Cleaning Maint.Done
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date

VALUE
nnnnnn
nnnnnn
Yes/No
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
mm/dd/yy hh:mm

UNITS
hours
hours

POINT NAME
SI_COIL
CL_CDOWN
CL_MAINT
COIL_PM0
COIL_PM1
COIL_PM2
COIL_PM3
COIL_PM4

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — TESTMODE
DESCRIPTION
Service Test Mode
Compressor A1 Relay
Compressor A2 Relay
Compressor B1 Relay
Compressor B2 Relay
Fan 1 Relay
Fan 2 Relay
Cooler Pump Relay 1
Cooler Pump Relay 2
Comp A1 Unload Time
Minimum Load Valve Relay
Remote Alarm Relay
EXV % Open
EXV % Open

VALUE
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
nn
On/Off
On/Off
nn
nn

UNITS

sec

%
%

POINT NAME
NET_CTRL
S_A1_RLY
S_A2_RLY
S_B1_RLY
S_B2_RLY
S_FAN_1
S_FAN_2
S_CLPMP1
S_CLPMP2
S_A1ULTM
S_MLV
S_ALM
S_EXV_A
S_EXV_B

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — RUNTEST
DESCRIPTION
Percent Total Capacity
Percent Available Cap.
Discharge Pressure
Suction Pressure
Head Setpoint
Saturated Condensing Tmp
Saturated Suction Temp
Compr Return Gas Temp
Discharge Gas Temp
Suction Superheat Temp
Compressor A1 Relay
Compressor A2 Relay
Minimum Load Valve Relay
Compressor A1 Feedback
Compressor A2 Feedback
Percent Total Capacity
Percent Available Cap.
Discharge Pressure
Suction Pressure
Head Setpoint
Saturated Condensing Tmp
Saturated Suction Temp
Compr Return Gas Temp
Suction Superheat Temp
Compressor B1 Relay
Compressor B2 Relay
Minimum Load Valve Relay

VALUE
nnn
nnn
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
nnn
nnn
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off

Compressor B1 Feedback
Compressor B2 Feedback
Fan 1 Relay
Fan 2 Relay

On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off

Outside Air Temperature
Space Temperature
Cooler Pump Relay 1
Cooler Pump Relay 2
Cooler Pump 1 Interlock
Cooler Pump 2 Interlock
Cooler Entering Fluid
Cooler Leaving Fluid
Compressor A1 Size
Compressor A2 Size
Compressor B1 Size
Compressor B2 Size
Cooler Flow Switch

UNITS
%
%
psig
psig
F
F
F
F
F
^F

%
%
psig
psig
F
F
F
F
^F

POINT NAME
CAPA_T
CAPA_A
DP_A
SP_A
HSP
TMP_SCTA
TMP_SSTA
TMP_RGTA
DISGAS
SH_A
K_A1_RLY
K_A2_RLY
MLV_RLY
K_A1_FBK
K_A2_FBK
CAPB_T
CAPB_A
DP_B
SP_B
HSP
TMP_SCTB
TMP_SSTB
TMP_RGTB
SH_B
K_B1_RLY
K_B2_RLY
MLV_RLY
K_B1_FBK
K_B2_FBK
FAN_1
FAN_2

F
F

nnn.n
nnn.n
On/Off
On/Off
Open/Closed
Open/Closed
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn
nnn
nnn
nnn
On/Off

F
F
tons
tons
tons
tons

OAT
SPT
COOLPMP1
COOLPMP2
PMP1_FBK
PMP2_FBK
COOL_EWT
COOL_LWT
SIZE_A1
SIZE_A2
SIZE_B1
SIZE_B2
COOLFLOW

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — DUALCHIL
DESCRIPTION
Dual Chiller Link Good?
Master Chiller Role

VALUE
Yes/No
Stand Alone,
Lead Chiller,
Lag Chiller
Stand Alone,
Lead Chiller,
Lag Chiller
snnn.n
snnn.n
snnn.n

UNITS

F
F
F

LEAD_CP
LAG_CP
CTRL_PNT

Cool EnteringFluid-Slave
Cool Leaving Fluid-Slave
Cooler Entering Fluid
Cooler Leaving Fluid
Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid

snnn.n
snnn.n
snnn.n
snnn.n
snnn.n

F
F
F
F
F

COOLEWTS
COOLLWTS
COOL_EWT
COOL_LWT
DUAL_LWT

Percent Avail.Capacity
Percent Avail.Cap.Slave

0-100
0-100

%
%

CAP_A
CAP_A_S

Lag Start Delay Time
Load/Unload Factor
Load/Unload Factor-Slave
Lead SMZ Clear Commanded
Lag SMZ Clear Commanded
Lag Commanded Off?

hh:mm
snnn.n
snnn.n
Yes/No
Yes/No
Yes/No

Dual Chill Lead CapLimit
Dual Chill Lag CapLimit

0-100
0-100

Slave Chiller Role
Lead Chiller Ctrl Point
Lag Chiller Ctrl Point
Control Point

POINT NAME
DC_LINK
MC_ROLE
SC_ROLE

LAGDELAY
SMZ
SMZSLAVE
LEADSMZC
LAG_SMZC
LAG_OFF
%
%

100

DCLDCAPL
DCLGCAPL

APPENDIX C — FACTORY SETTINGS FOR PUMP AND MANUAL STARTERS
PUMP OPTION

PUMP SIZE

1, 8

1.0 HP

2, 9

1.5 HP

3, B

2.0 HP

4, C

3.0 HP

5, 6, D, F

5.0 HP

7, G

7.5 HP

UNIT VOLTAGE
V-Hz (3 Ph)
208/230-60
380-60
460-60
575-60
208/230-60
380-60
460-60
575-60
208/230-60
380-60
460-60
575-60
208/230-60
380-60
460-60
575-60
208/230-60
380-60
460-60
575-60
208/230-60
380-60
460-60
575-60

101

OVERLOAD
SETTING
4.0
2.0
1.6
2.4
5.4
2.7
2.2
3.3
6.6
3.3
2.6
4.0
8.8
4.4
3.5
5.3
14.0
7.0
5.6
8.5
22.8
11.4
9.1
13.8

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING
Optional BACnet Communications Wiring —

7 8

2 34

10's

9 0

2 34

7 8

9 0

The following section is used to configure the UPC Open controller which is used when the BACnet communications option
is selected. The UPC Open controller is mounted in the main
control box per unit components arrangement diagrams.
TO ADDRESS THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER — The
user must give the UPC Open controller an address that is
unique on the BACnet* network. Perform the following procedure to assign an address:
1. If the UPC Open controller is powered, pull the screw terminal connector from the controller's power terminals labeled Gnd and HOT. The controller reads the address
each time power is applied to it.
2. Using the rotary switches (see Fig. A and B), set the controller's address. Set the Tens (10's) switch to the tens digit of the address, and set the Ones (1's) switch to the ones
digit.
As an example in Fig. B, if the controller’s address is 25,
point the arrow on the Tens (10's) switch to 2 and the arrow on
the Ones (1's) switch to 5.

1's

Fig. B — Address Rotary Switches
BACNET DEVICE INSTANCE ADDRESS — The UPC
Open controller also has a BACnet Device Instance address.
This Device Instance MUST be unique for the complete BACnet system in which the UPC Open controller is installed. The
Device Instance is auto generated by default and is derived by
adding the MAC address to the end of the Network Number.
The Network Number of a new UPC Open controller is 16101,
but it can be changed using i-Vu® Tools or BACView device.
By default, a MAC address of 20 will result in a Device Instance of 16101 + 20 which would be a Device Instance of
1610120.

BT485
TERMINATOR

BACNET
CONNECTION
(BAS PORT)

POWER LED

Tx1 LED
Rx1 LED

Tx2 LED
Rx2 LED

8
67 9

EIA-485
JUMPERS

8
67 9

BACNET
BAUD RATE
DIP SWITCHES
ADDRESS
ROTARY
SWITCHES
RUN LED
ERROR LED

Fig. A — UPC Open Controller

* Sponsored by ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers).

102

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)
CONFIGURING THE BAS PORT FOR BACNET MS/
TP — Use the same baud rate and communication settings for
all controllers on the network segment. The UPC Open controller is fixed at 8 data bits, No Parity, and 1 Stop bit for this
protocol's communications.
If the UPC Open controller has been wired for power, pull
the screw terminal connector from the controller's power terminals labeled Gnd and HOT. The controller reads the DIP
Switches and jumpers each time power is applied to it.
Set the BAS Port DIP switch DS3 to “enable.” Set the BAS
Port DIP switch DS4 to “E1-485.” Set the BMS Protocol DIP
switches DS8 through DS5 to “MSTP.” See Table A.

Fig. C — DIP Switches

Table A — SW3 Protocol Switch Settings
for MS/TP
DS8
Off

DS7
Off

DS6
Off

DS5
Off

DS4
On

Wire the controllers on an MS/TP network segment in a daisy-chain configuration. Wire specifications for the cable are
22 AWG (American Wire Gage) or 24 AWG, low-capacitance,
twisted, stranded, shielded copper wire. The maximum length
is 2000 ft.
Install a BT485 terminator on the first and last controller on
a network segment to add bias and prevent signal distortions
due to echoing. See Fig. A, D, and E.
To wire the UPC Open controller to the BAS network:
1. Pull the screw terminal connector from the controller's
BAS Port.
2. Check the communications wiring for shorts and
grounds.
3. Connect the communications wiring to the BAS port’s
screw terminals labeled Net +, Net -, and Shield.
NOTE: Use the same polarity throughout the network
segment.
4. Insert the power screw terminal connector into the UPC
Open controller's power terminals if they are not currently connected.
5. Verify communication with the network by viewing a
module status report. To perform a module status report
using the BACview keypad/display unit, press and hold
the “FN” key then press the “.” Key.

DS3
Off

Verify that the EIA-485 jumpers below the CCN Port are set
to EIA-485 and 2W.
The example in Fig. C shows the BAS Port DIP Switches
set for 76.8k (Carrier default) and MS/TP.
Set the BAS Port DIP Switches DS2 and DS1 for the appropriate communications speed of the MS/TP network (9600,
19.2k, 38.4k, or 76.8k bps). See Fig. D and Table B.
Table B — Baud Selection Table
BAUD RATE
9,600
19,200
38,400
76,800

DS2
Off
On
Off
On

DS1
Off
Off
On
On

WIRING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER TO THE MS/
TP NETWORK — The UPC Open controller communicates
using BACnet on an MS/TP network segment communications
at 9600 bps, 19.2 kbps, 38.4 kbps, or 76.8 kbps.

Fig. D — Network Wiring

103

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)

Fig. E — BT485 Terminator Installation

temperature rating specifications list two acceptable alternatives. The Halar specification has a higher temperature rating
and a tougher outer jacket than the SmokeGard specification,
and it is appropriate for use in applications where the user is
concerned about abrasion. The Halar jacket is also less likely to
crack in extremely low temperatures.
NOTE: Use the specified type of wire and cable for maximum
signal integrity.

To install a BT485 terminator, push the BT485 terminator
on to the BT485 connector located near the BACnet connector.
NOTE: The BT485 terminator has no polarity associated with
it.
To order a BT485 terminator, consult Commercial Products
i-Vu Open Control System Master Prices.
MS/TP WIRING RECOMMENDATIONS — Recommendations are shown in Tables C and D. The wire jacket and UL

Table C — MS/TP Wiring Recommendations
SPECIFICATION
Cable
Conductor
Insulation
Color Code
Twist Lay
Shielding
Jacket
DC Resistance
Capacitance
Characteristic Impedance
Weight
UL Temperature Rating
Voltage
Listing
AWG
CL2P
DC
FEP
NEC
O.D.
TC
UL

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

RECOMMMENDATION
Single twisted pair, low capacitance, CL2P, 22 AWG (7x30), TC foam FEP, plenum rated cable
22 or 24 AWG stranded copper (tin plated)
Foamed FEP 0.015 in. (0.381 mm) wall 0.060 in. (1.524 mm) O.D.
Black/White
2 in. (50.8 mm) lay on pair 6 twists/foot (20 twists/meter) nominal
Aluminum/Mylar shield with 24 AWG TC drain wire
SmokeGard Jacket (SmokeGard PVC) 0.021 in. (0.5334 mm) wall 0.175 in. (4.445 mm) O.D.
Halar Jacket (E-CTFE) 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) wall 0.144 in. (3.6576 mm) O.D.
15.2 Ohms/1000 feet (50 Ohms/km) nominal
12.5 pF/ft (41 pF/meter) nominal conductor to conductor
100 Ohms nominal
12 lb/1000 feet (17.9 kg/km)
SmokeGard 167°F (75°C)
Halar -40 to 302°F (-40 to 150°C)
300 Vac, power limited
UL: NEC CL2P, or better

LEGEND
American Wire Gage
Class 2 Plenum Cable
Direct Current
Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer
National Electrical Code
Outside Diameter
Tinned Copper
Underwriters Laboratories

104

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)
Table D — Open System Wiring Specifications and Recommended Vendors
WIRING SPECIFICATIONS
Wire Type

RECOMMENDED VENDORS AND PART NUMBERS
Connect Air
Contractors
Belden RMCORP Wire and Cable
International

Description

22 AWG, single twisted shielded pair, low capacitance, CL2P,
TC foam FEP, plenum rated. See MS/TP Installation Guide for
specifications.
MS/TP
Network (RS-485) 24 AWG, single twisted shielded pair, low capacitance, CL2P,
TC foam FEP, plenum rated. See MS/TP Installation Guide
for specifications.
Rnet
4 conductor, unshielded, CMP, 18 AWG, plenum rated.
AWG
CL2P
CMP
FEP
TC

—
—
—
—
—

W221P-22227

—

25160PV

CLP0520LC

W241P-2000F

82841

25120-OR

—

W184C-2099BLB

6302UE

21450

CLP0442

LEGEND
American Wire Gage
Class 2 Plenum Cable
Communications Plenum Rated
Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer
Tinned Copper

ber and CCN Bus number. The factory default settings for
CCN Element and CCN Bus number are 1 and 0 respectively.
If modifications to the default Element and Bus number are
required, both the ComfortLink and UPC Open configurations
must be changed.
The following configurations are used to set the CCN Address and Bus number in the ComfortLink control. These configurations can be changed using the scrolling marquee display
or accessory Navigator handheld device.
Configuration→CCN→CCN.A (CCN Address)
Configuration→CCN→CCN.B (CCN Bus Number)
The following configurations are used to set the CCN Address and Bus Number in the UPC Open controller. These configurations can be changed using the accessory BACview6 display.
Navigation: BACview→CCN
Home: Element Comm Stat
Element: 1
Bus: 0

LOCAL ACCESS TO THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER — The user can use a BACview6 handheld keypad display unit or the Virtual BACview software as a local user interface to an Open controller. These items let the user access the
controller network information. These are accessory items and
do not come with the UPC Open controller.
The BACview6 unit connects to the local access port on the
UPC Open controller. See Fig. F. The BACview software must
be running on a laptop computer that is connected to the local
access port on the UPC Open controller. The laptop will require an additional USB link cable for connection.
See the BACview Installation and User Guide for instructions on connecting and using the BACview6 device.
To order a BACview6 Handheld (BV6H), consult Commercial Products i-Vu Open Control System Master Prices.
CONFIGURING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER'S
PROPERTIES — The UPC Open device and ComfortLink
control must be set to the same CCN Address (Element) num-

Fig. F — BACview6 Device Connection

105

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)
If the UPC Open is used with the chiller application of
Lead/Lag/Standby, all chillers and UPC Open's CCN element
numbers must be changed to a unique number in order to follow CCN specifications. In this application, there can only be a
maximum of 3 UPC Open controllers on a CCN bus.
For the CCN Alarm Acknowledger configuration, the UPC
Open defaults to CCN Acknowledger. If a Chiller Lead/Lag/
Standby application is being used, then the Carrier technician
must change the configuration to only one CCN Acknowledger
on the CCN bus.
For the CCN Time Broadcaster configuration, the UPC
Open defaults to CCN Time Broadcaster. If the Chiller Lead/
Lag/Standby application is used, then the Carrier technician
must change the configuration to only one CCN Time Broadcaster on the CCN bus.
TROUBLESHOOTING — If there are problems wiring or
addressing the UPC Open controller, contact Carrier Technical
Support.
COMMUNICATION LEDS — The LEDs indicate if the
controller is communicating with the devices on the network.
See Tables E and F. The LEDs should reflect communication

traffic based on the baud rate set. The higher the baud rate the
more solid the LEDs become. See Fig. A for location of LEDs
on UPC Open module.
REPLACING THE UPC OPEN BATTERY — The UPC
Open controller's 10-year lithium CR2032 battery provides a
minimum of 10,000 hours of data retention during power outages.
IMPORTANT: Power must be ON to the UPC Open when
replacing the battery, or the date, time, and trend data will
be lost.
Remove the battery from the controller, making note of the
battery's polarity. Insert the new battery, matching the battery's
polarity with the polarity indicated on the UPC Open
controller.
NETWORK POINTS LIST — The points list for the controller is shown in Table G.
Refer to Appendix B for additional information on CCN
point name.

Table E — LED Status Indicators
LED
Power
Rx
Tx
Run
Error

STATUS
Lights when power is being supplied to the controller. The UPC Open controller is protected by internal solid-state polyswitches on
the incoming power and network connections. These polyswitches are not replaceable and will reset themselves if the condition
that caused the fault returns to normal.
Lights when the controller receives data from the network segment; there is an Rx LED for Ports 1 and 2.
Lights when the controller transmits data to the network segment; there is an Rx LED for Ports 1 and 2.
Lights based on controller status. See Table F.
Lights based on controller status. See Table F.

Table F — Run and Error LEDs Controller and Network Status Indication
RUN LED
2 flashes per second
2 flashes per second
2 flashes per second
2 flashes per second
2 flashes per second
5 flashes per second
5 flashes per second
7 flashes per second
14 flashes per second

ERROR LED
Off
2 flashes, alternating with Run LED
3 flashes, then off
1 flash per second
On
On
Off
7 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED
14 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED

106

STATUS
Normal
Five minute auto-restart delay after system error
Controller has just been formatted
Controller is alone on the network
Exec halted after frequent system errors or control programs halted
Exec start-up aborted, Boot is running
Firmware transfer in progress, Boot is running
Ten second recovery period after brownout
Brownout

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)
Table G — Network Points List
POINT DESCRIPTION
4-20 ma Demand Signal
4-20 ma Reset Signal
Active Demand Limit
Active Setpoint
Alarm State
CCN Chiller
CCN Loadshed Signal
Circuit A Run Hours
Circuit A Starts
Circuit B Run Hours
Circuit B Starts
Coil Cleaning Maint.Done
Coil Cleaning Srvc Inter
Coil Service Countdown
Comp A1 Unload Time
Compr Return Gas Temp
Compr Return Gas Temp
Compressor A1 Feedback
Compressor A1 Relay
Compressor A1 Run Hours
Compressor A1 Starts
Compressor A2 Feedback
Compressor A2 Relay
Compressor A2 Run Hours
Compressor A2 Starts
Compressor B1 Feedback
Compressor B1 Relay
Compressor B1 Run Hours
Compressor B1 Starts
Compressor B2 Feedback
Compressor B2 Relay
Compressor B2 Run Hours
Compressor B2 Starts

Control Mode

Control Point
Cooler Entering Fluid
Cooler Flow Switch
Cooler Freeze Protection
Cooler Leaving Fluid
Cooler LWT Setpoint
Cooler Pump 1 Interlock
Cooler Pump 2 Interlock
Cooler Pump Relay 1
Cooler Pump Relay 2
Cooler Pump Select
Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly
Cooler/Pump Heater
Cooling Ramp Loading
Cooling Setpoint 1
R
W

CCN POINT
NAME
LMT_MA
RST_MA
DEM_LIM
SP

READ/ UNITS
WRITE
R
mA
R
°F
R/W
%
R
°F

ALM

CHIL_S_S
DL_STAT
HR_CIRA
CY_CIRA
HR_CIRB
CY_CIRB
CL_MAINT
SI_COIL
CL_CDOWN
A1UNLTME
TMP_RGTA
TMP_RGTB
K_A1_FBK
K_A1_RLY
HR_A1
CY_A1
K_A2_FBK
K_A2_RLY
HR_A2
CY_A2
K_B1_FBK
K_B1_RLY
HR_B1
CY_B1
K_B2_FBK
K_B2_RLY
HR_B2
CY_B2

R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R

CONTROL

CTRL_PNT
COOL_EWT
COOLFLOW
MODE_16
COOL_LWT
LWT_SP
PMP1_FBK
PMP2_FBK
COOLPMP1
COOLPMP2
PMP_SLCT
PUMP_DLY
COOL_HTR
CRAMP
CSP1

R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
R/W
R/W

DEFAULT
VALUE

RANGE

100

0 - 100

Start

1 = Normal
2 = Alert
3 = Alarm
Start/Stop

No
8760

Yes/No
0 - 65535

44.0

1 = Test
2 = Local Off
3 = CCN Off
4 = Clock Off
5 = Emergency Stop
6= Local On
7 = CCN On
8 = Clock On
9 = Heat Enabled
10 = Pump Delay
-20 - 70

min

0 - 10

°F

1.0
44.0

0.2 - 2.0
-20 - 70

hr
hr

hr
hr
°F
°F

°F
°F

LEGEND
— Read
— Write

107

BACNET
OBJECT ID
AV:36
AV:33
AV:2
AV:4

BACNET
OBJECT NAME
lmt_ma_1
rst_ma_1
dem_lim_1
sp_1

MSV:1

alm_msv_1

BV:4
AV:37
AV:59
AV:65
AV:62
AV:68
BV:54
AV:50
AV:49
AV:73
AV:20
AV:28
BV:16
BV:13
AV:60
AV:66
BV:17
BV:14
AV:61
AV:67
BV:20
BV:18
AV:63
AV:69
BV:21
BV:19
AV:64
AV:70

chil_s_s_1
dl_stat_1
hr_cira_1
cy_cira_1
hr_cirb_1
cy_cirb_1
cl_maint_1
si_coil_1
cl_cdown_1
a1unltme_1
tmp_rgta_1
tmp_rgtb_1
k_a1_fbk_1
k_a1_rly_1
hr_a1_1
cy_a1_1
k_a2_fbk_1
k_a2_rly_1
hr_a2_1
cy_a2_1
k_b1_fbk_1
k_b1_rly_1
hr_b1_1
cy_b1_1
k_b2_fbk_1
k_b2_rly_1
hr_b2_1
cy_b2_1

MSV:2

stat_msv_1

AV:5
AV:30
BV:11
BV:42
AV:31
AV:38
BV:9
BV:10
BV:7
BV:8
AV:40
AV:41
BV:24
AV:56
AV:53

ctrl_pnt_1
cool_ewt_1
coolflow_1
mode_16_1
cool_lwt_1
lwt_sp_1
pmp1_fbk_1
pmp2_fbk_1
coolpmp1_1
coolpmp2_1
pmp_slct_1
pump_dly_1
cool_htr_1
cramp_1
csp1_1

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)
Table G — Network Points List (cont)
POINT DESCRIPTION

POINT NAME

Cooling Setpoint 2
CSM Controlling Chiller
Demand Level 1
Demand Level 2
Demand Level 3
Demand Limit Switch 1
Demand Limit Switch 2
Demand/Sound Limited
Discharge Gas Temp
Discharge Pressure
Discharge Pressure
Dual Setpoint
Dual Setpoint Switch
Element Comm Status
Element Communications
Alarm
Emergency Stop
Entering Fluid Temp
EXV % Open
EXV % Open
Fan 1 Relay
Fan 2 Relay
Head Setpoint
Heat Request
High SCT Circuit A
High SCT Circuit B
High Temperature Cooling
Ice Done
Ice Setpoint

EMSTOP
EWT
EXV_A
EXV_B
FAN_1
FAN_2
HSP
HEAT_REQ
MODE_21
MODE_22
MODE_18
ICE_DONE
CSP3

R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W

Lead/Lag Circuit Select

LEAD_TYP

R/W

Lead/Lag Circuit Select
Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid
Leadpump
Leaving Fluid Temp - Prime
Variable
Loading Sequence Select
Local Schedule
Low Cooler Suction Temp A
Low Cooler Suction Temp B
Low Sound Active
Low Sound Mode
Low Temperature Cooling
Machine Operating Hours
Machine Starts
Making ICE
Master/Slave Control
Minimum Comp. On Time
Minimum Load Valve Relay
Minimum OFF Time Active
Minutes Off Time
Occupied
Outside Air Temperature
Override Modes in Effect
Percent Available Cap.
Percent Available Cap.

LEAD_TYP
DUAL_LWT
LEADPUMP

R
R
R

°F

LWT

°F

SEQ_TYPE

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R
R
R

R
W

CSP2
MODE_1

READ/ UNITS
WRITE
R/W
°F
R
R
%
R
%
R
%
R
R
R
R
°F
R
psig
R
psig
R
R
R

DMD_SW1
DMD_SW2
MODE_15
DISGAS
DP_A
DP_B
MODE_13
DUAL_IN

DEFAULT
VALUE
44.0

RANGE
-20 - 70

MODE_7
MODE_8
LSACTIVE
MODE_25
MODE_17
HR_MACH
CY_MACH
MODE_19
MODE_3
MODE_23
MLV_RLY
MODE_10
DELAY
OCC
OAT
MODE
CAP_A
CAPB_A

Enabled

Enabled/Emstop

32.0

-20 - 32
1 = Automatic
2 = Circuit A Leads
3 = Circuit B Leads

°F
%
%

°F

min

°F
%
%

LEGEND
— Read
— Write

108

0 - 15

BACNET
OBJECT ID
AV:54
BV:30
AV:75
AV:76
AV:77
BV:25
BV:26
BV:41
AV:15
AV:13
AV:23
BV:39
BV:29
BV:2999

BACNET
OBJECT NAME
csp2_1
mode_1_1
dmv_lvl_1_perct_1
dmv_lvl_2_perct_1
dmv_lvl_3_perct_1
dmd_sw1_1
dmd_sw2_1
mode_15_1
disgas_1
dp_a_1
dp_b_1
mode_13_1
dual_in_1
element_stat_1

BV:58

comm_lost_alm_1

BV:6
AV:6
AV:18
AV:27
BV:22
BV:23
AV:29
BV:28
BV:47
BV:48
BV:44
BV:27
AV:55

emstop_1
ewt_1
exv_a_1
exv_b_1
fan_1_1
fan_2_1
hsp_1
heat_req_1
mode_21_1
mode_22_1
mode_18_1
ice_done_1
csp3_1

AV:43

lead_typ_1

MSV:6
AV:32
MSV:9

lead_typ_msv_1
dual_lwt_1
leadpump_msv_1

AV:7

lwt_1

AV:74
BV:1
BV:35
BV:36
BV:2
BV:51
BV:43
AV:57
AV:58
BV:45
BV:32
BV:49
BV:15
BV:38
AV:42
BV:3
AV:34
BV:5
AV:12
AV:22

seq_type_1
schedule_1
mode_7_1
mode_8_1
lsactive_1
mode_25_1
mode_17_1
hr_mach_1
cy_mach_1
mode_19_1
mode_3_1
mode_23_1
mlv_rly_1
mode_10_1
delay_1
occ_1
oat_1
mode_1
capa_a_1
capb_a_1

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)
Table G — Network Points List (cont)
POINT DESCRIPTION
Percent Total Capacity
Percent Total Capacity
Percent Total Capacity
Pump 1 Maintenance Done
Pump 1 Run Hours
Pump 1 Service Countdown
Pump 2 Maintenance Done
Pump 2 Run Hours
Pump 2 Service Countdown
Pump Changeover Hours
Pump Off Delay Time
Pump Service Interval
Ramp Load Limited
Requested Stage
Rotate Cooler Pumps Now
Saturated Condensing Tmp
Saturated Condensing Tmp
Saturated Suction Temp
Saturated Suction Temp
Slow Change Override
Space Temperature
Storing ICE
Strainer Maint. Done
Strainer Srvc Countdown
Strainer Srvc Interval
Suction Pressure
Suction Pressure
Suction Superheat Temp
Suction Superheat Temp
System Cooling Demand
Level
System Demand Limiting
Temperature Reset
Timed Override In Effect
User Defined Analog 1
User Defined Analog 2
User Defined Analog 3
User Defined Analog 4
User Defined Analog 5
User Defined Binary 1
User Defined Binary 2
User Defined Binary 3
User Defined Binary 4
User Defined Binary 5
Var Head Press Output
WSM Controlling Chiller
R
W

POINT NAME
CAP_T
CAPA_T
CAPB_T
P1_MAINT
HR_PUMP1
P1_CDOWN
P2_MAINT
HR_PUMP2
P2_CDOWN
PMP_DLTA
MODE_24
SI_PUMPS
MODE_5
STAGE
ROT_PUMP
TMP_SCTA
TMP_SCTB
TMP_SSTA
TMP_SSTB
MODE_9
SPT
MODE_20
ST_MAINT
ST_CDOWN
SI_STRNR
SP_A
SP_B
SH_A
SH_B

MODE_14
MODE_6

VHP_ACT
MODE_2

READ/ UNITS
WRITE
R
%
R
%
R
%
R/W
R
hr
R
hr
R/W
R
hr
R
hr
R/W
hr
R
R/W
hr
R
R
R/W
R
°F
R
°F
R
°F
R
°F
R
R/W
°F
R
R/W
R
hr
R/W
hr
R
psig
R
psig
R
°^F
R
°^F

DEFAULT
VALUE

RANGE

BACNET
OBJECT ID
AV:3
AV:11
AV:21
BV:52
AV:71
AV:46
BV:53
AV:72
AV:47
AV:39
BV:50
AV:48
BV:33
AV:9
BV:12
AV:16
AV:25
AV:17
AV:26
BV:37
AV:35
BV:46
BV:55
AV:52
AV:51
AV:14
AV:24
AV:44
AV:45

BACNET
OBJECT NAME
cap_t_1
capa_t_1
capb_t_1
p1_maint_1
hr_pump1_1
p1_cdown_1
p2_maint_1
hr_pump2_1
p2_cdown_1
pmp_dlta_1
mode_24_1
si_pumps_1
mode_5_1
stage_1
rot_pump_1
tmp_scta_1
tmp_sctb_1
tmp_ssta_1
tmp_sstb_1
mode_9_1
spt_1
mode_20_1
st_maint_1
st_cdown_1
si_strnr_1
sp_a_1
sp_b_1
sh_a_1
sh_b_1

Yes/No

500

10 - 2000

8760

0 - 65535

No/Yes

8760

-40.0 - 245

Yes/No

8760

0 - 65535

AV:9006

cool_demand_level_1

R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R

BV:57
BV:40
BV:34
AV:2901
AV:2902
AV:2903
AV:2904
AV:2905
BV:2911
BV:2912
BV:2913
BV:2914
BV:2915
AV:19
BV:31

dem_lmt_act_1
mode_14_1
mode_6_1
user_analog_1_1
user_analog_2_1
user_analog_3_1
user_analog_4_1
user_analog_5_1
user_binary_1_1
user_binary_2_1
user_binary_3_1
user_binary_4_1
user_binary_5_1
vhp_act_1
mode_2_1

sq m
sq m
sq m
sq m
sq m
sq m
sq m
sq m
sq m
sq m
mA

LEGEND
— Read
— Write

109

APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS
30RAP Maintenance Interval Requirements
WEEKLY
Compressor

Check oil level.

Economizer

Cooler

None.

Controls

Condenser

None.

Starter

None.
Review Alarm/Alert History.
None.

MONTHLY
Compressor

Check oil level.

Cooler

None.

Condenser

None.

Economizer
Controls
Starter

None.
Inspect sight glass for moisture and refrigerant level.
None.

QUARTERLY
Compressor
Cooler
Condenser

Check oil level

Economizer

Check refrigerant charge. Check all connections for leaks.
None.

Controls
Starter

None.
Perform an Automated Controls test. Run all compressors
and ensure proper operation.
Ensure operation of units flow switch.

ANNUALLY
Compressor

Cooler

Condenser

Check Oil Level. Obtain and test an oil
sample.
Check refrigerant charge. Check all connections for leaks. Check approach on unit to
determine if tubes need cleaning. Check for
temperature drop across filter drier to determine if filter needs replacement.
Inspect all coils and clean. Check condenser
approach to determine if tubes need to be
cleaned.

Economizer

Verify proper operation of EXVs and TXVs

Controls

Perform an Automated Controls test. Run all compressors
and ensure proper operation. Ensure operation of unit flow
switch.

Starter

Inspect all electrical connections and tighten as needed.
Measure current to each compressor and inspect contactors.

NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty.

110

APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont)
30RAP Weekly Maintenance Log
Plant ___________________________
Machine Model No. ________________

DATE

OIL LEVEL

CHECK ALARMS
/ FAULTS

OPERATOR
INITIALS

REMARKS

NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty.

111

APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont)
30RAP Monthly Maintenance Log
Month
Date
Operator
UNIT SECTION
Compressor

Cooler

Condenser

Controls

Starter

112
System

1
/

ACTION
Check Oil Level
Send Oil Sample Out for Analysis
Leak Test
Inspect and Clean Cooler
Inspect Cooler Heater
Leak Test
Record Water Pressure Differential (PSI)
Inspect Water Pumps
Leak Test
Inspect and Clean Condenser Coil
General Cleaning and Tightening Connections
Check Pressure Transducers
Confirm Accuracy of Thermistors
General Tightening & Cleaning Connections
Inspect All Contactors
Check Refrigerant Charge
Verify Operation Of EXVs And Record Position
Record System Super Heat

2
/

UNIT
yes/no
yes/no
ppm
yes/no
amps
yes/no
PSI
yes/no
ppm
yes/no
yes/no
yes/no
yes/no
yes/no
yes/no
yes/no
0-100%
deg. F

NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements
are not covered under warranty.

3
/

4
/

5
/

6
/

7
/

8
/

ENTRY
Annually
Every 3 - 5 Years

Annually
Annually

Annually

9
/

10
/ /

11
/ /

12
/ /

APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont)
30RAP Seasonal Shutdown Log
Month
Date
Operator
UNIT SECTION
Cooler
Controls

1
/

2
/

3
/

ACTION
Isolate and Drain Cooler
Add Glycol for Freeze Protection
Do Not Disconnect Control Power

NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements
are not covered under warranty.

4
/

5
/

6
/

7
/

ENTRY

8
/

9
/

10
/ /

11
/ /

12
/ /

113

Copyright 2010 Carrier Corporation
Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.
Catalog No. 04-53300067-01
Printed in U.S.A.
Form 30RAP-2T
Pg 114
12-10
Replaces: 30RAP-1T

START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 30RAP LIQUID CHILLER
(Remove and use for Job File)
I. Project Information
JOB NAME ______________________________________________________________________________
ADDRESS _______________________________________________________________________________
CITY

____________________________________________ STATE _______________ ZIP______________

INSTALLING CONTRACTOR ________________________________________________________________
SALES OFFICE ___________________________________________________________________________
START-UP PERFORMED BY ________________________________________________________________
Design Information
CAPACITY

CEAT

EWT

LWT

FLUID TYPE

FLOW RATE

P.D.

UNIT MODEL ______________________________ SERIAL ________________________________

II. Preliminary Equipment Check
IS THERE ANY PHYSICAL DAMAGE?

 YES

 NO

DESCRIPTION ____________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________
1. UNIT IS INSTALLED LEVEL AS PER THE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.

 YES

 NO

2. POWER SUPPLY AGREES WITH THE UNIT NAMEPLATE.

 YES

 NO

3. ELECTRICAL POWER WIRING IS INSTALLED PROPERLY.

 YES

 NO

4. UNIT IS PROPERLY GROUNDED.

 YES

 NO

5. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION HAS BEEN SIZED AND INSTALLED PROPERLY.

 YES

 NO

6. ALL TERMINALS ARE TIGHT.

 YES

 NO

7. ALL PLUG ASSEMBLIES ARE TIGHT.

 YES

 NO

8. ALL CABLES AND THERMISTORS HAVE BEEN INSPECTED FOR CROSSED WIRES.

 YES

 NO

9. ALL THERMISTORS ARE FULLY INSERTED INTO WELLS.

 YES

 NO

1. ALL CHILLED WATER VALVES ARE OPEN.

 YES

 NO

2. ALL PIPING IS CONNECTED PROPERLY.

 YES

 NO

3. ALL AIR HAS BEEN PURGED FROM THE SYSTEM.

 YES

 NO

4. CHILLED WATER PUMP IS OPERATING WITH THE CORRECT ROTATION.

 YES

 NO

Chilled Water System Check

 YES

 NO

6. CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH IS OPERATIONAL.

 YES

 NO

7. WATER LOOP VOLUME GREATER THAN MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS. (See Table 40).

 YES

 NO

8. PROPER LOOP FREEZE PROTECTION PROVIDED TO _____ °F (°C).
 YES
ANTIFREEZE TYPE _____________________ CONCENTRATION __________%.
IF OUTDOOR AMBIENT IS BELOW 32 F (0° C) THEN ITEMS 9-11 HAVE TO BE
COMPLETED TO PROVIDE COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION TO –20 F (–29 C). (REFER
TO WINTER SHUTDOWN FOR PROPER COOLER WINTERIZATION PROCEDURE.)

 NO

 YES

 NO

10. COOLER HEATERS INSTALLED AND OPERATIONAL.

 YES

 NO

11. CHILLED WATER PUMP CONTROLLED BY CHILLER.

 YES

 NO

1. COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL IS CORRECT.

 YES

 NO

2. VERIFY COMPRESSOR MOUNTING BOLT TORQUE IS 7-10 FT-LB. (9.5-13.5 N-M).

 YES

 NO

3. LEAK CHECK UNIT. LOCATE, REPAIR AND REPORT ANY REFRIGERANT LEAKS.

 YES

 NO

4. VOLTAGE IS WITHIN UNIT NAMEPLATE RANGE.

 YES

 NO

5. CONTROL TRANSFORMER PRIMARY CONNECTION SET FOR PROPER VOLTAGE.

 YES

 NO

9. OUTDOOR PIPING WRAPPED WITH ELECTRIC HEATER TAPE,
INSULATED AND OPERATIONAL.

III. Unit Start-Up

6. CONTROL TRANSFORMER SECONDARY VOLTAGE =
7. CHECK VOLTAGE IMBALANCE:
A-B
A-C
B-C
AVERAGE VOLTAGE =
(A-B + A-C + B-C)/3
MAXIMUM DEVIATION FROM AVERAGE VOLTAGE =
VOLTAGE IMBALANCE = ____________% (MAX. DEVIATION/AVERAGE VOLTAGE) X 100
VOLTAGE IMBALANCE LESS THAN 2%.
 YES
(DO NOT START CHILLER IF VOLTAGE IMBALANCE IS GREATER THAN 2%.
CONTACT LOCAL UTILITY FOR ASSISTANCE.)

 NO

 YES

 NO

1. COMPLETE COMPONENT TEST.

 YES

 NO

2. CHECK REFRIGERANT AND OIL CHARGE.

 YES

 NO

3. RECORD COMPRESSOR MOTOR CURRENT.

 YES

 NO

4. RECORD CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.

 YES

 NO

5. RECORD OPERATING TEMPERATURES AND PRESSURES.

 YES

 NO

8. VERIFY COOLER FLOW RATE.
PRESSURE ENTERING COOLER
PRESSURE LEAVING COOLER
COOLER PRESSURE DROP
Psig X 2.31 ft./psi =
kPa X 0.334 m/psi
COOLER FLOW RATE

________ psig (kPa)
________ psig (kPa)
________ psig (kPa)
________ ft of water
________ m of water
________ gpm (l/s) (See Cooler Pressure
Drop Curves from
Installation Instructions)

Start and Operate Machine. Complete the Following:

6. PROVIDE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER’S PERSONNEL.

CL-2

Instruction Time ________ hours.

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE
CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE

5. CHILLED WATER PUMP STARTER INTERLOCKED WITH CHILLER.

OPERATING DATA:
RECORD THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION FROM THE PRESSURES AND TEMPERATURES MODES WHEN
MACHINE IS IN A STABLE OPERATING CONDITION:
PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE
CIRCUIT A

CIRCUIT B

DISCHARGE PRESSURE

DP.A

DP.B

SUCTION PRESSURE

SP.A

SP.B

SATURATED CONDENSING TEMP

SCT.A

SCT.B

SATURATED SUCTION TEMP

SST.A

SST.B

RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE

RGT.A

RGT.B

LIQUID LINE TEMPERATURE*
DISCHARGE LINE TEMPERATURE*
*Readings taken with a digital thermometer.

COOLER EWT

EWT

COOLER LWT

LWT

OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE

OAT

CONTROL POINT

CTPT

PERCENT TOTAL CAPACITY

CAP

LEAD/LAG LEAVING FLUID

DLWT

(Dual Chiller Control Only)

Compressor Running Current — All readings taken at full load.
COMPRESSOR MOTOR CURRENT

COMPRESSOR A1
COMPRESSOR A2
COMPRESSOR B1
COMPRESSOR B2

CONDENSER FAN MOTOR CURRENT
FAN MOTOR 1
FAN MOTOR 2
FAN MOTOR 3
FAN MOTOR 4

COOLER PUMP MOTOR CURRENT
COOLER PUMP 1
COOLER PUMP 2

CL-3

SUB-MODE
VERS

ITEM
MBB
AUX1
EXV
EMM
MARQUEE
NAVIGATOR

DISPLAY

ITEM
EXPANSION
CESR-131460- _ _-_ _
CESR-131333- _ _-_ _
CESR-131172- _ _-_ _
CESR-131174- _ _-_ _
CESR-131171- _ _-_ _
CESR-131227- _ _-_ _

(PRESS ENTER AND ESCAPE SIMULTANEOUSLY TO OBTAIN
SOFTWARE VERSIONS)
COMMENTS:
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
SIGNATURES:
START-UP
TECHNICIAN _____________________________

CUSTOMER
REPRESENTATIVE _____________________________

DATE ___________________________________

DATE ________________________________________

CL-4

Record Software Versions
MODE — RUN STATUS

III. Unit Start-Up (cont)
RECORD CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
UNIT (Configuration Settings)
SUBMODE

ITEM

ITEM EXPANSION

DISPLAY

ENTRY

UNIT CONFIGURATION

UNIT

SIZE

UNIT SIZE

XXX

SZA.1

COMPRESSOR A1 SIZE

SZA.2

COMPRESSOR A2 SIZE

SZA.3

COMPRESSOR A3 SIZE

SZA.4

COMPRESSOR A4 SIZE

SZB.1

COMPRESSOR B1 SIZE

SZB.2

COMPRESSOR B2 SIZE

SZB.3

COMPRESSOR B3 SIZE

SZB.4

COMPRESSOR B4 SIZE

SH.SP

SUPERHEAT SETPOINT

XX.X F

FAN.S

FAN STAGING SELECT

EXV

EXV MODULE INSTALLED

YES/NO

A1.TY

COMPRESSOR A1 DIGITAL?

YES/NO

MAX.T

MAXIMUM A1 UNLOAD TIME

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘UNIT’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘OPT1’.
PRESS ENTER KEY. RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW:
OPTIONS1 (Options Configuration)
SUBMODE

ITEM

ITEM EXPANSION

DISPLAY

UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE
FLUD

OPT1

COOLER FLUID

MLV.S

MINIMUM LOAD VALVE SELECT

YES/NO

D.G.EN

DISCHARGE GAS TEMP ENABLE

ENBL/DSBL

CSB.E

CSB BOARDS ENABLE

ENBL/DSBL

CPC

COOLER PUMP CONTROL

ON/OFF

PM1E

COOLER PUMP 1 ENABLE

YES/NO

PM2E

COOLER PUMP 2 ENABLE

YES/NO

PM.P.S

COOLER PMP PERIODIC STRT

YES/NO

PM.SL

COOLER PUMP SELECT

PM.DY

COOLER PUMP SHUTDOWN DLY

XX MIN

PM.DT

PUMP CHANGEOVER HOURS

XXXX HRS

ROT.P

ROTATE COOLER PUMPS NOW

YES/NO

EMM

EMM MODULE INSTALLED

YES/NO

CND.T

CND HX TYP 0=RTPF 1=MCHX

0/1

MOPS

EXV MOP SET POINT

APPR

CONFIG APPROACH SETPOINT

CL-5

ENTRY

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘OPT1’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘OPT2’.
PRESS ENTER KEY.
RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.
OPTIONS2 (Options Configuration)
SUBMODE

ITEM

ITEM EXPANSION

DISPLAY

ENTRY

UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS

OPT2

CTRL

CONTROL METHOD

LOAD

LOADING SEQUENCE SELECT

LLCS

LEAD/LAG CIRCUIT SELECT

LCWT

HIGH LCW ALERT LIMIT

XX.X F

DELY

MINUTES OFF TIME

ICE.M

ICE MODE ENABLE

ENBL/DSBL

CLS.C

CLOSE CONTROL SELECT

ENBL/DSBL

LS.MD

LOW SOUND MODE SELECT

LS.ST

LOW SOUND START TIME

00:00

LS.ND

LOW SOUND END TIME

00:00

LS.LT

LOW SOUND CAPACITY LIMIT

XXX %

CTRL

CONTROL METHOD

CCNA

CCN ADDRESS

XXX

CCNB

CCN BUS NUMBER

XXX

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘OPT2’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘CCN’.
PRESS ENTER KEY.
RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.
CCN (CCN Network Configuration)
SUB-MODE

CCN

ITEM

ITEM EXPANSION

DISPLAY

CCNA

CCN ADDRESS

XXX

CCNB

CCN BUS NUMBER

XXX

BAUD

CCN BAUD RATE

ENTRY

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘CCN’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘HP.A’.
PRESS ENTER KEY.
RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.
HP.A (Head Pressure Cmp. Delta Configuration)
SUB-MODE
HP.A

ITEM

ITEM EXPANSION

DISPLAY

A1.DT

SCT DELTA FOR COMP A1

A2.DT

SCT DELTA FOR COMP A2

ENTRY

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘HP.A’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘HP.B’.
PRESS ENTER KEY.
RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.
HP.B (Head Pressure Cmp. Delta Configuration)
SUB-MODE
HP.B

ITEM

ITEM EXPANSION

DISPLAY

B1.DT

SCT DELTA FOR COMP B1

B2.DT

SCT DELTA FOR COMP B2

CL-6

ENTRY

III. Unit Start-Up (cont)

III. Unit Start-Up (cont)
PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘HP.B’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘EXV.A’.
PRESS ENTER KEY.
RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.
EXV.A (Circuit A EXV Configuration)
SUB-MODE

EXV.A

ITEM

ITEM EXPANSION

DISPLAY

STR.A

EXV CIRC.A START POS

XXX

MIN.A

EXV CIRC.A MIN POSITION

XXX

RNG.A

EXVA STEPS IN RANGE

XXXXX

SPD.A

EXVA STEPS PER SECOND

XXXXX

POF.A

EXVA FAIL POSITION IN %

XXX

MIN.A

EXVA MINIMUM STEPS

XXXXX

MAX.A

EXVA MAXIMUM STEPS

XXXXX

OVR.A

EXVA OVERRUN STEPS

XXX

TYP.A

EXVA STEPPER TYPE

0,1

H.SCT

HIGH SCT THRESHOLD

XXX

X.PCT

OPEN EXV X% ON 2ND COMP

X.PER

MOVE EXV X% ON DISCRSOL

A.PCT

PRE-OPEN EXV - FAN ADDING

XXX

M.PCT

PRE-CLOSE EXV - FAN SUB

XXX

S.PCT

PRE-CLOSE EXV - LAG SHUT

XXX

DELY

LAG START DELAY

XXX

ENTRY

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘EXV.A’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘EXV.B’.
PRESS ENTER KEY.
RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.
EXV.B (Circuit B EXV Configuration)
SUB-MODE

EXV.B

ITEM

ITEM EXPANSION

DISPLAY

STR.B

EXV CIRC.B START POS

XXX

MIN.B

EXV CIRC.B MIN POSITION

XXX

RNG.B

EXVB STEPS IN RANGE

XXXXX

SPD.B

EXVB STEPS PER SECOND

XXXXX

POF.B

EXVB FAIL POSITION IN %

XXX

MIN.B

EXVB MINIMUM STEPS

XXXXX

MAX.B

EXVB MAXIMUM STEPS

XXXXX

OVR.AB

EXVB OVERRUN STEPS

XXX

TYP.B

EXVB STEPPER TYPE

0,1

ENTRY

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘EXV.B’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘MM’.
PRESS ENTER KEY.
RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.
MM (Motormaster Configuration Settings)
SUB-MODE

ITEM

ITEM EXPANSION

DISPLAY

MMR.S

MOTORMASTER SELECT

YES/NO

P.GAN

HEAD PRESSURE P GAIN

I.GAN

HEAD PRESSURE I GAIN

XX.X

D.GAN

HEAD PRESSURE D GAIN

XX.X

MIN.S

MINIMUM FAN SPEED

CL-7

ENTRY

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘MM’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘RSET’.
PRESS ENTER KEY.
RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.
RSET (Reset Configuration Settings)
SUBMODE

ITEM

RSET

ITEM EXPANSION

DISPLAY

ENTRY

RESET COOL TEMP
CRST

COOLING RESET TYPE

MA.DG

4-20 - DEGREES RESET

XX.X °F

RM.NO

REMOTE - NO RESET TEMP

XXX.X °F

RM.F

REMOTE - FULL RESET TEMP

XXX.X °F

RM.DG

REMOTE - DEGREES RESET

XX.X °F

RT.NO

RETURN - NO RESET TEMP

XXX.X °F

RT.F

RETURN - FULL RESET TEMP

XXX.X °F

RT.DG

RETURN - DEGREES RESET

XX.X °F

DMDC

DEMAND LIMIT SELECT

DM20

DEMAND LIMIT AT 20 MA

XXX %

SHNM

LOADSHED GROUP NUMBER

XXX

SHDL

LOADSHED DEMAND DELTA

XXX %

SHTM

MAXIMUM LOADSHED TIME

XXX

DLS1

DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1

XXX %

DLS2

DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2

XXX %

LLEN

LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE

ENBL/DSBL

MSSL

MASTER/SLAVE SELECT

SLVE/MAST

SLVA

SLAVE ADDRESS

XXX

LLBL

LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT

LLBD

LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA

XXX

LLDY

LAG START DELAY

XXX

PARA

PARALLEL CONFIGURATION

YES/NO

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘RSET’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘SLCT’.
PRESS ENTER KEY.
RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW:
SLCT (Setpoint and Ramp Load Configuration)
SUBMODE

ITEM

SLCT

ITEM EXPANSION

DISPLAY

SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD
CLSP

COOLING SETPOINT SELECT

RL.S

RAMP LOAD SELECT

ENBL/DSBL

CRMP

COOLING RAMP LOADING

X.X

SCHD

SCHEDULE NUMBER

Z.GN

DEADBAND MULTIPLIER

X.X

CL-8

ENTRY

III. Unit Start-Up (cont)

III. Unit Start-Up (cont)
PRESS ESCAPE KEY SEVERAL TIMES TO GET TO THE MODE LEVEL (BLANK DISPLAY). USE THE
ARROW KEYS TO SCROLL TO THE SET POINT LED. PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY SETPOINTS.
RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW:
SETPOINT
SUBMODE

ITEM

COOL

ITEM EXPANSION

DISPLAY

COOLING SETPOINTS
CSP.1

COOLING SETPOINT 1

XXX.X °F

CSP.2

COOLING SETPOINT 2

XXX.X °F

ICE SETPOINT

XXX.X °F

CSP.3

HEAD PRESSURE SETPOINTS

HEAD

H.DP

HEAD SET POINT

XXX.X °F

F.ON

FAN ON SET POINT

XXX.X °F

F.OFF

FAN OFF SET POINT

XXX.X °F

B.OFF

BASE FAN OFF DELTA TEMP

XX.X °F

FAN STAGE DELTA

XX.X °F

F.DLT
FRZ

BRINE FREEZE SETPOINT
BR.FZ

BRINE FREEZE POINT

CL-9

XXX.X °F

ENTRY

COMPONENT TEST
USE ESCAPE/ARROW KEYS TO ILLUMINATE CONFIGURATION LED. PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY ‘DISP’.
PRESS ENTER AGAIN TO DISPLAY ‘TEST’ FOLLOWED BY ‘OFF’. PRESS ENTER TO STOP DISPLAY AT
‘OFF’ AND ENTER AGAIN SO ‘OFF’ DISPLAY FLASHES. ‘PASS’ AND ‘WORD’ WILL FLASH IF PASSWORD
NEEDS TO BE ENTERED. PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY PASSWORD FIELD AND USE THE ENTER KEY FOR
EACH OF THE FOUR PASSWORD DIGITS. USE ARROW KEYS IF PASSWORD IS OTHER THAN STANDARD.
AT FLASHING ‘OFF’ DISPLAY, PRESS THE UP ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘ON’ AND PRESS ENTER. ALL LED
SEGMENTS AND MODE LEDS WILL LIGHT UP. PRESS ESCAPE TO STOP THE TEST. PRESS ESCAPE TO
RETURN TO THE ‘DISP’ DISPLAY. PRESS THE ESCAPE KEY AGAIN AND USE THE ARROW KEYS TO ILLUMINATE THE SERVICE TEST LED. PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY ‘TEST’. PRESS ENTER TO STOP DISPLAY
AT ‘OFF’ AND ENTER AGAIN SO ‘OFF’ FLASHES. PRESS THE UP ARROW KEY AND ENTER TO ENABLE
THE MANUAL MODE. PRESS ESCAPE AND DISPLAY NOW SAYS ‘TEST’ ‘ON’. REFER TO THE TABLE
BELOW.
Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory
SUB-MODE

KEYPAD
ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY
ON/OFF

ENTER

ITEM
EXPANSION
SERVICE TEST MODE

TEST

COMMENT

Completed
(Yes/No)

To Enable Service Test Mode,
move Enable/Off/Remote
Contact switch to OFF. Change
TEST to ON. Move switch to
ENABLE.

OUTPUTS AND PUMPS
ENTER

OUTS

FAN1

ON/OFF

FAN 1 RELAY

Condenser fan contactor 1

FAN2

ON/OFF

FAN 2 RELAY

Condenser fan contactor 2

FAN3

ON/OFF

FAN 3 RELAY

Condenser fan contactor 3

FAN4

ON/OFF

FAN 4 RELAY

Condenser fan contactor 4

FAN5

ON/OFF

FAN 5 RELAY

Condenser fan contactor 5

FAN6

ON/OFF

FAN 6 RELAY

Condenser fan contactor 6

V.HPA

XXX%

VAR HEAD PRESS %

V.HPB

XXX%

VAR HEAD PRESS %

CLP.1

ON/OFF

COOLER PUMP 1 RELAY

CLP.2

ON/OFF

COOLER PUMP 2 RELAY

CL.HT

ON/OFF

COOLER/PUMP HEATER

RMT.A

ON/OFF

REMOTE ALARM RELAY

CC.A1

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY

UL.TM

0 to 15

COMP A1 UnLOAD TIME

CC.A2

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY

CC.A3

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR A3 RELAY

CC.A4

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR A4 RELAY

MLV

ON/OFF

MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY

CC.B1

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY

See Note

CC.B2

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY

See Note

CC.B3

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR B3 RELAY

See Note

CC.B4

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR B4 RELAY

See Note

CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR TEST
ENTER

CMPA

CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR TEST
ENTER

CMPB

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.
Copyright 2010 Carrier Corporation
Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.
Catalog No. 04-53300067-01
Printed in U.S.A.
Form 30RAP-2T
Pg CL-10
12-10
Replaces: 30RAP-1T

III. Unit Start-Up (cont)

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : msdt05k
Create Date                     : 2010:12:20 11:14:45-05:00
Modify Date                     : 2010:12:21 08:21:19-05:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2
Metadata Date                   : 2010:12:21 08:21:19-05:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 30rap-2t.fm
Creator                         : msdt05k
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.4.0 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:69599775-354f-4c60-a62e-6b438f3b6a61
Instance ID                     : uuid:48636de7-eaa0-4f6d-9583-8bf7da1c2c53
Page Count                      : 124

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Carrier Aquasnap Air Cooled Chillers With Comfortlink Controls 30Rap010 060 Users Manual 30rap 2t

30RAP010-060 to the manual 556e3ae9-fcb8-42ef-b900-abf4bd5d8276

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation